DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder Instruction Manual bvh2407gb

DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder
Instruction Manual
BV-H2407 GB
Legal Notice
PASS - Service you can rely on

Fast, comprehensive, anywhere in the world
Quality and reliability are the cornerstones of our company’s

philosophy. That is why we consider a comprehensive service
concept simply par for the course, from strict quality control,
installation and commissioning through to seamless support
across the entire product life cycle.
With over 30 service stations and over 180 service specialists,
you can count on us to be there whenever – and wherever –
you need us.
During office hours, service specialists from all divisions are

on hand to analyze problems and failures. Look at
www.schenckprocess.com for your nearest
Schenck Process Location.
Are you looking for individual, perfect-fit service solutions?

Then our service system PASS is the ticket. It covers the en-
tire service spectrum, from simple inspections through to full
service. Interested?
Then find out more about the individual components at
www.schenckprocess.com/en/service.
© by Schenck Process GmbH

Pallaswiesenstraße 100, 64293 Darmstadt, Germany
Phone: +49 6151 1531-0 ; www.schenckprocess.com
All rights reserved. Any reproduction of this documentation,
regardless of method, without prior permission by
Schenck Process GmbH in writing, even by excerpt, is prohi-
bited.
Subject to change without prior notice.
Note: Translation of the original German Instruction
(origin: ST4, 9007199727104651 V2)

Table of Contents
Table of Contents
1 About This Manual ................................................................

................................................................................................
................................................................................................
................................................................1
................................1
2 Safety notes................................
notes................................................................
................................................................................................
................................................................................................
..........................................................................
..........................................3
..........3
2.1 Signal Words .........................................................................................................................................4
2.1.1 Signal Words for Safety Warnings ................................................................................................4
2.1.2 Signal Words for Application Notes ..............................................................................................5
2.2 Five Safety Rules of Electrical Engineering ..........................................................................................6
2.3 Damaged / Defective Electrical Components ........................................................................................6
3 General Diagram ................................................................

................................................................................................
................................................................................................
..................................................................
..................................7
..7
3.1 What is the DISOCONT Tersus?...........................................................................................................7
3.2 Some Definitions ...................................................................................................................................8
3.3 Measuring principle ...............................................................................................................................8
3.4 Control operating modes .................................................................................................................... 10
3.5 Control strategies ............................................................................................................................... 10
3.5.1 Weighfeeder with Controlled Belt Velocity ................................................................................. 10
3.5.2 The beltweigher with feed control .............................................................................................. 12
3.5.3 Beltweigher with a constant load ............................................................................................... 13
3.6 Belt Influence Compensation BIC....................................................................................................... 13
3.7 Measuring and Feeding at the Discharge Point (VAP) ...................................................................... 14
3.8 Batching .............................................................................................................................................. 14
3.9 Additional Bin Weighers ..................................................................................................................... 15
4 Operation................................................................
................................................................................................
................................................................................................
............................................................................
............................................17
4.1 Behavior after Connecting the Power ................................................................................................. 17
4.2 Operating and Control Access............................................................................................................ 17
4.2.1 Connecting an operating panel (VHM) with a scale controller (VCU) ........................................ 18
4.2.1.1 Connection via Ethernet Cable .................................................................................................. 18
4.2.1.2 Connection via Bluetooth ........................................................................................................... 18
4.2.1.3 Connection via RS485 ............................................................................................................... 19
4.2.2 Connecting EasyServe (PC) with the scales controller (VCU) .................................................. 19
4.2.2.1 Connection via Ethernet ............................................................................................................. 19
4.2.2.2 Connection via WLAN ................................................................................................................ 20
4.2.2.3 Connection via Bluetooth ........................................................................................................... 20
4.2.2.4 Connection via RS-232 .............................................................................................................. 20
4.2.3 Connecting the web browser with the scales controller (VCU) .................................................. 21
4.2.4 The web server in the scales controller (VCU) .......................................................................... 21
4.3 VHM operating panel .......................................................................................................................... 23
4.3.1 Display and Operation Fields ..................................................................................................... 24
4.3.1.1 Name of the Device .................................................................................................................... 24
4.3.1.2 Event messages ......................................................................................................................... 24
4.3.1.3 Selecting the operating range .................................................................................................... 25
4.3.1.4 On/Off Operation ........................................................................................................................ 25
4.3.1.5 Detail Selection .......................................................................................................................... 26
4.3.1.6 Measured Values and Graphics ................................................................................................. 26
DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual BV-H2407GB, 1238

Schenck Process Group -i-
Table of Contents
4.3.1.7 Command and Edit Keys ........................................................................................................... 26

4.3.1.8 Symbol for Running Operation ................................................................................................... 26
4.3.2 Authorization for Control Commands ......................................................................................... 26
4.3.2.1 Modes of Operation: Normal Operation and Keyboard Operation............................................. 26
4.3.2.2 Restrictions for Operating Panel with Ethernet Connection and Connection Monitoring .......... 27
4.3.2.3 Access to Special Functions ...................................................................................................... 27
4.3.3 Basic Operating Functions ......................................................................................................... 27
4.3.3.1 Switch Feeding On/Off ............................................................................................................... 28
4.3.3.2 Set setpoint ................................................................................................................................ 28
4.3.3.3 Relative Setpoint ........................................................................................................................ 28
4.3.3.4 Resetting (zero setting) the totalizing counter............................................................................ 29
4.3.3.5 Acknowledging Event Messages ............................................................................................... 29
4.3.4 Special Operating Functions ...................................................................................................... 30
4.3.4.1 Volumetric / (Volumetric Synchronous) / Gravimetric Modes of Regulator Operation............... 30
4.3.4.2 Keyboard Mode ON/OFF ........................................................................................................... 30
4.3.4.3 Trend .......................................................................................................................................... 31
4.3.4.4 Cleaning and Testing the Display .............................................................................................. 33
4.3.4.5 Display the Most Recent Events ('Errors') ................................................................................. 34
4.3.4.6 Display Stored Counter Readings .............................................................................................. 34
4.3.4.7 Display the Most Recent Parameter Alterations. ....................................................................... 34
4.3.4.8 Bin Weigher: Display and Operation .......................................................................................... 34
4.3.5 Service Functions ....................................................................................................................... 35
4.3.5.1 Display Parameter Alterations.................................................................................................... 35
4.3.5.2 Reading and Setting Parameters ............................................................................................... 35
4.3.5.3 Setting the Clock ........................................................................................................................ 36
4.3.5.4 Reset to Factory Settings ........................................................................................................... 36
4.3.5.5 Simulation Mode ........................................................................................................................ 36
4.3.5.6 Operating the calibration functions ............................................................................................ 37
4.3.6 Configuring the VHM Operating Panel ....................................................................................... 37
4.3.6.1 Accessing the Configuration ...................................................................................................... 37
4.3.6.2 Setting the Address (VHM addr.) ............................................................................................... 38
4.3.6.3 Setting the Display ..................................................................................................................... 38
4.3.6.4 Selection and Display of the Scales (Feeder) ............................................................................ 39
4.3.6.5 Set the Homepage (Config) ....................................................................................................... 39
4.3.6.6 Configuring the Communication Path (Com) ............................................................................. 39
4.3.6.7 Calibrating the Touchscreen ...................................................................................................... 40
4.3.6.8 Login for Privileged Users (Login/Logout) .................................................................................. 40
4.3.6.9 Connecting to a Scales (Con.Scale) .......................................................................................... 41
4.3.6.10 Cleaning the Screen and Information ........................................................................................ 41
4.4 Calibration programs .......................................................................................................................... 41
4.4.1 Determining the duration of a belt circuit ................................................................................... 41
4.4.2 Tare the beltweigher .................................................................................................................. 42
4.4.3 Checking the continuous scale with a calibration weight ........................................................... 43
4.4.4 Continuous scale zero setting .................................................................................................... 44
4.4.5 Taring the bin weigher................................................................................................................ 45
4.4.6 Bin weight control ....................................................................................................................... 46
4.4.7 Optimizing Hopper Fill Level Regulation .................................................................................... 46
4.4.8 Automatic control measurement unit (KME) .............................................................................. 47
4.4.8.1 Types of control measurement .................................................................................................. 48
4.4.8.2 Operating the control measurement (KME) ............................................................................... 50
BV-H2407GB, 1238 DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual

- ii - Schenck Process Group
Table of Contents
5 Startup ................................................................
................................................................................................
................................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................53
5.1 Mechanical Prerequisites ................................................................................................................... 53
5.2 Assembling the Electrical Components .............................................................................................. 54
5.3 Electrical Connections ........................................................................................................................ 54
5.4 Entering Basic parameters ................................................................................................................. 54
5.5 Test that the Control is Functioning .................................................................................................... 54
5.6 Scale calibration ................................................................................................................................. 55
5.7 The Setting Regulation ....................................................................................................................... 55
5.7.1 Adjusting the external flow rate controller .................................................................................. 55
5.7.2 Adjusting the feeding controller .................................................................................................. 56
5.8 Setting belt run monitoring.................................................................................................................. 56
5.9 Activating belt influence compensation (BIC) ..................................................................................... 58
5.10 Activating measurement and feeding with reference to the discharge point (VAP) ........................... 58
5.11 Setting Control .................................................................................................................................... 59
5.11.1 Function Check .......................................................................................................................... 59
5.11.2 Checking the scale with calibration weights ............................................................................... 59
5.11.3 Belt Velocity Check .................................................................................................................... 59
5.12 Check with bulk solids ........................................................................................................................ 60
5.13 Calibrating bin weighing ..................................................................................................................... 61
6 Maintenance and Recalibration ................................................................

................................................................................................
...........................................................................
...........................................63
7 Parameters ................................................................
................................................................................................
................................................................................................
.........................................................................
.........................................65
7.1 Abbreviations ...................................................................................................................................... 66
7.2 Configuring the Interfaces .................................................................................................................. 66
7.3 Configuring Event Messages.............................................................................................................. 68
7.4 Parameter List .................................................................................................................................... 69
7.4.1 Parameter Overview .................................................................................................................. 69
7.4.2 Parameter Details ...................................................................................................................... 93
7.4.2.1 Parameter Block 01 - Hardware Modules .................................................................................. 93
7.4.2.2 Parameter Block 02 - Dialog Behaviour ..................................................................................... 96
7.4.2.3 Parameter Block 03 - Feeder Definition ................................................................................... 101
7.4.2.4 Parameter Block 04 - Control Sources .................................................................................... 103
7.4.2.5 Parameter Block 05 - Rated Data ............................................................................................ 106
7.4.2.6 Parameter Block 06 - Feeder control ....................................................................................... 109
7.4.2.7 Parameter Block 07 - Feeder Monitoring ................................................................................. 114
7.4.2.8 Parameter Block 08 - Filters..................................................................................................... 117
7.4.2.9 Parameter Block 09 - Limit Values ........................................................................................... 118
7.4.2.10 Parameter Block 10 - Calibration Data .................................................................................... 120
7.4.2.11 Parameter Block 11 - Rate controller ....................................................................................... 121
7.4.2.12 Parameter Block 12 - Analog Outputs ..................................................................................... 128
7.4.2.13 Parameter Block 13 - Digital Inputs ......................................................................................... 131
7.4.2.14 Parameter Block 14 - Digital Outputs ....................................................................................... 136
7.4.2.15 Parameter Block 15 - Batch Mode ........................................................................................... 139
7.4.2.16 Parameter Block 16 - Maintenance interval ............................................................................. 143
7.4.2.17 Parameter Block 17 - VAP ....................................................................................................... 144
7.4.2.18 Parameter Block 18 - Belt Monitoring ...................................................................................... 144
7.4.2.19 Parameter Block 19 - Communication EasyServe ................................................................... 148
7.4.2.20 Parameter Block 20 - Communication Fieldbus....................................................................... 148
7.4.2.21 Parameter Block 21 - Fixed mode configuration ...................................................................... 153
7.4.2.22 Parameter Block 22 - Ethernet ................................................................................................. 157
7.4.2.23 Parameter Block 23 - PLC Outputs .......................................................................................... 157

Schenck Process Group - iii -
Table of Contents
7.4.2.24 Parameter Block 24 - Interlocking ............................................................................................ 159

7.4.2.25 Parameter Block 25 - Belt Load Controller .............................................................................. 162
7.4.2.26 Parameter Block 26 - Bin Weigher ........................................................................................... 170
7.4.2.27 Parameter Block 27 - Bin Level Controller ............................................................................... 178
7.4.2.28 Parameter Block 28 - 2nd Weighbridge ................................................................................... 182
7.4.2.29 Parameter Block 29 - Check System ....................................................................................... 187
7.4.2.30 Parameter Block 30 - Moisture................................................................................................. 200
7.4.2.31 Parameter Block 31 - Dead Time ............................................................................................. 203
7.4.2.32 Parameter Block 32 - Linearization .......................................................................................... 205
7.4.2.33 Parameter Block 33 - Flow Gate .............................................................................................. 207
7.4.2.34 Parameter Block 34 - 2-Sensor Slip ......................................................................................... 208
7.4.2.35 Parameter Block 35 - Pressure Compensation........................................................................ 210
7.4.2.36 Parameter Block 36 - FCB analog outputs .............................................................................. 214
7.4.2.37 Parameter Block 37 - FCB digital outputs ................................................................................ 218
7.4.2.38 Parameter Block 38 - Data Logging ......................................................................................... 221
7.4.2.39 Parameter Block 39 - Configuration HMI Values ..................................................................... 223
7.4.2.40 Parameter Block 40 - Local Mode (Speed) .............................................................................. 225
7.4.2.41 Parameter Block 41 - Local Mode (Gate) ................................................................................ 234
8 Event Messages ................................................................

................................................................................................
...............................................................................................
............................................................... 237
8.1 Events Details ................................................................................................................................... 237
8.1.1 Event Group: Calibration .......................................................................................................... 237
8.1.2 Event Group: Check Measurement .......................................................................................... 239
8.1.3 Event Group: Controller ........................................................................................................... 242
8.1.4 Event Group: Electrical System ............................................................................................... 244
8.1.5 Event Group: Interlock ............................................................................................................. 246
8.1.6 Event Group: Material Flow...................................................................................................... 247
8.1.7 Event Group: MAX ................................................................................................................... 247
8.1.8 Event Group: Mechanic ............................................................................................................ 250
8.1.9 Event Group: MIN .................................................................................................................... 251
8.1.10 Event Group: Sequence Monitoring ......................................................................................... 253
8.1.11 Event Group: System Message ............................................................................................... 254
9 Appendix ................................................................
................................................................................................
................................................................................................
..........................................................................
.......................................... 257
9.1 Setpoint and switch-on sources........................................................................................................ 257
9.2 Measuring the flow rate (M) .............................................................................................................. 260
9.3 Flow rate controller ........................................................................................................................... 262
9.4 Batch Operation Control ................................................................................................................... 267
9.5 Belt slip identification ........................................................................................................................ 268
9.5.1 Belt Slippage with Belt Marking ............................................................................................... 268
9.5.2 2-sensor slip monitoring ........................................................................................................... 269
9.6 Local operation ................................................................................................................................. 270
9.6.1 Controlling with VLG ................................................................................................................ 270
9.6.2 Controlling with VMO ............................................................................................................... 271
9.6.2.1 Local operation logic for rotating drives and valves ................................................................. 273
9.6.2.2 The logic for position-controlled feed gates ............................................................................. 275
9.7 Belt load regulation of the velocity-controlled weighfeeder .............................................................. 276
9.8 Bin weigher: Scaling and Limit ......................................................................................................... 281
9.9 Continuous bin fill level control ......................................................................................................... 282
9.10 Details and flow chart control measurement (KME) ......................................................................... 284
9.11 Linearization ..................................................................................................................................... 285
9.12 Correction of the foreign substance portion (moisture) .................................................................... 285

- iv - Schenck Process Group
Table of Contents
9.13 Correction with a known quantity...................................................................................................... 286

9.14 Links in the Parameter Block 'Interlocking' ....................................................................................... 287
9.15 Weighing Platforms .......................................................................................................................... 289
9.15.1 Effective Weighing Platform Length ........................................................................................ 289
9.15.2 Calibration Weight .................................................................................................................... 291
9.15.3 Belt inclination ......................................................................................................................... 292
9.16 Pulse Output for External Totalizing Counters ................................................................................. 293
9.17 Using alternative signals (such as analog or fieldbus) for DMS inputs ............................................ 294
9.18 PLC Functionality (Optional)............................................................................................................. 295
9.18.1 Handling the Function Blocks................................................................................................... 296
9.18.2 Function Blocks for Binary Signals .......................................................................................... 297
9.18.3 Function Blocks for Analog Signals ......................................................................................... 298
9.19 Checking the Weight Measurement Instrumentation ....................................................................... 300
Index ................................................................
................................................................................................
................................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................ 301

Schenck Process Group -v-
About This Manual
1 About This Manual

The operating manual for weighfeeders is intended both for the operating personnel for the scale and for
service technicians. It describes the functionality of the VWF 20170-001 software.
The following software releases or later must be available to ensure that a DISOCONT Tersus sys-
tem will operate correctly with this software version:
▪
VHM 20170-006 → VHM operating panel
▪
VPC 20150-021 → Schenck Process EasyServe
▪
For the sake of simplicity, the DISOCONT Tersus system will also be called the weighing elec-
tronics, controller, scale or unit hereinafter.
– The BV-H2406 system manual contains information on its electronic structure.
– DISOCONT is a registered trademark of Schenck Process GmbH, Darmstadt.
▪
The Windows-based Schenck Process EasyServe program is a service tool for conveniently
handling continuous scales based on weighing electronics such as DISOCONT Tersus.
– For the sake of simplicity, this tool will also briefly be called EasyServe here.
– The BV-H2185 operating manual describes EasyServe's functionality.
This manual is available in different forms:

▪
A printed version
▪
An electronic document in the platform-independent ADOBE format (file ending: *.PDF)
▪
As online help in the Microsoft Windows HTMLHelp format (file ending: *.CHM)

Schenck Process Group -1-
Safety notes
2 Safety notes
To avoid personal injury and material damage, follow the safety regulations stated below.
Additionally you should also observe:
▪
Safety information given in order-specific documentation
▪
Safety information relating to mechanical components
▪
Instructions and safety instructions for parts manufactured by thrid-party suppliers or parts that are not
part of Schenck's scope of delivery.
When performing installation, commissioning and service work, observe all applicable local regulations.
Intended Use
The measuring system and connected mechanical components is intended solely for weighing tasks and
related control applications. It is not intended for any other use.
Risks
If properly installed and put into service the measuring system itself does not represent a hazard.
Hazards may arise when the system is used for control operations or for transporting weighed goods. Po-
tential sources of danger would then be add-on equipment that the material weighed is transported or me-
tered in. Residual risks may originate from the measuring system if unskilled operators improperly handle
the system.
This measuring system may be a component of a more complex system. The operating company is fully
responsible for overall plant safety.
Personnel
Preparation, assembly, commissioning, operation, maintenance and servicing may only be carried out by
qualified personnel.
All persons working on the system are required to observe the safety hints and know the parts of the tech-
nical documentation relevant to their work.
The operating company is responsible for instructing his operators to observe all regulations and instruc-
tions given.
Changing parameters
The parameters dictate how the measuring system functions. Only personnel familiar with the device's mode
of operation may alter these parameters (e.g. after training by Schenck Process). Parameters incorrectly set
may cause injuries or damage to the machine whenever a control system is connected. They can also ad-
versely affect weighing operation.
Password
Passwords safeguard the parameters against unauthorized alteration. The measuring system operating
company has to ensure safe password handling.

Safety notes
Acknowledging Event Messages

Error messages may be acknowledged only after cause of fault has been remedied.
Ensure that any connected peripheral devices are functioning correctly before acknowledging an event. Any
connected control systems in particular must be in safe state.
Service and Maintenance

Maintenance
▪
Observe any warning symbols on the scales.
▪
The measuring system must be shut down before work is performed on mechanical equipment or peri-
pheral devices (control systems in particular). Take appropriate action to ensure that the measuring sys-
tem cannot be inadvertently restarted.
▪
Before performing work on the electrical equipment, disconnect the power supply (pull the plug!).
▪
The devices may be operated only in the provided housings. There is danger of contacting live parts.
Moisture and Humidity

All of the parts of the scales, particularly electrical components, must be protected from moisture and humid-
ity when the housing is open such as during service work. Observe housing protection standards.
Design Modifications
Unauthorized modifications to the system and/or use of replacement parts not supplied by Schenck Process
voids Schenck Process's liability for any resulting damages. This especially applies to alterations which
could affect the operating safety of the system.
Replacing Components
Spare parts must meet the technical specifications indicated by Schenck Process. To ensure this require-
ment is met, only genuine Schenck Process spare parts should be used. When using other spare parts, the
warranty will be void.
2.1 Signal
Signal Words
2.1.1 Signal Words for Safety Warnings

Potential hazards will always exist when working with technical devices. Hazards will arise if the machine
▪
is incorrectly installed,
▪
is started up incorrectly,
▪
is operated by untrained personnel, or
▪
is repaired by unqualified personnel.

-4- Schenck Process Group
Safety notes
In this manual the following signal words will indicate hazards that may arise when using this machine:
DANGER
This signal word indicates a danger that can immediately cause the
most severe injuries up to and including death.
Follow all instructions to prevent this from occurring.
WARNING
This signal word indicates a danger that can cause serious injuries up
to and including death.
CAUTION
This signal word indicates a danger that can cause slight or medium
injuries.
2.1.2 Signal Words for Application Notes
Signal words for information on material damages and on the optimal use of the machine
STRICTLY OBSERVE
Signal word used to identify situations in which material or environ-
mental damage could occur.
HINT
Signal word used to identify information on using the product eco-
nomically and at an optimal level of efficiency.

Safety notes
2.2 Five Safety Rules of Electrical Engineering

Engineering
These fives safety rules must be followed in the order shown before work is begun on electrical systems.
Once the work is finished, they are to be applied in reverse order.
DANGER
Electric shock from live components.
There is a danger of life from an electric shock.
– Take all possible precautions to ensure safety before work is begun on
live components. Observe, among other things, the following:
1. Disconnect the components.
2. Secure them against inadvertent restart.
3. Ensure that the components have been de-energized.
4. Above 1 KV: earth and bypass the cables.
5. Cover or shield adjacent, live components.
2.3 Damaged / Defective Electrical Components
DANGER
Live damaged or defective components
There is a danger of life from an electric shock.
– Always have qualified personnel ensure that the components are nei-
ther damaged nor defective.
1. Qualified personnel must immediately replace or, if possible, repair
damaged or defective electrical components.

General Diagram
3 General Diagram
The basic functions of the DISOCONT Tersus in combination with a feeder or measuring equipment will be
explained in this chapter.
3.1 What is the

the DISOCONT Tersus?
DISOCONT Tersus is a versatile modular electronic system for weighing and feeding technology.
Its components are:
▪
the VCU control unit ('scales controller')
▪
the VHM local operating panel
▪
Input/output expansion modules
The DISOCONT Tersus has been designed for continuous measurement and control tasks or for disconti-
nuous batching.
All weighing-related functions and process functions for measuring and feeding bulk solids are performed by
the DISOCONT Tersus system.
The DISOCONT Tersus is customizable and very flexible in terms of its physical layout and interconnection.
DISOCONT Tersus can be used in the following areas with specific software for weighing and feeding job
applications:
▪
Steel
▪
Cement production
▪
Chemical industry
▪
Foodstuffs industry
▪
Power plants
It supports the following plant systems in connection with the right mechanical equipment:
▪
Beltweighers
▪
Weighfeeders
▪
Loss-in-weight feeders
▪
Filling plants
▪
Feeder with weighing discharge screw (MULTIFLEX)
▪
Mass flow rate measuring devices and mass flow rate feeders that operate on the basis of the Coriolis
® ®
principle (MULTICOR ) or the principle of inertia (MULTISTREAM )
DISOCONT, MULTICOR and MULTISTREAM are registered trademarks of Schenck Process

GmbH, Darmstadt, Germany.

General Diagram
3.2 Some Definitions

The following table shows a list of basic definitions.
Abbreviation Meaning Meaning Dimension Unit
I Actual flow rate Material quantity per unit of time Weight/Time kg/h, t/h
I0 Nominal Flow Rate Maximum gravimetric flow rate the scale is designed Weight/Time kg/h
for. Defined in the P03.01 parameter.
P Flow rate setpoint Preset flow rate against which the actual value is Weight/Time kg/h, t/h
controlled.
Z Flow Rate The material quantity conveyed calculated from the Weight kg, t
integral of the flow rate over the feed time.
v Belt velocity The velocity of the conveyor belt Velocity m/s
v0 Rated velocity The velocity of the conveyor belt at the flow rate Io
and rated belt load
Q Belt load The quantity of bulk solids on the conveyor belt per Weight/Length kg/m
meter of belt length
Qo Rated belt load The rated belt load is calculated from the nominal Weight/Length kg/m
flow rate Io/ rated velocity vo and it can be shown as a
service value.
QB Platform load The load on the weighbridge Weight kg
Y Controller actuating Conveyor element setpoint Amperage mA
variable
Xd Control deviation The difference between the setpoint and actual value % %
with reference to the rated value
n Speed The speed of the drive motor for the conveyor belt Rotations/unit 1/min
of time
Tab. 1 : Definition for formula symbols
You can find the abbreviations for input and output channels for use in parameterization
in the Abbreviations [➙ 66] chapter.
3.3 Measuring principle

A beltweigher or weighfeeder continuously weighs the quantity of material transported by a conveyor belt.
This figure shows the measuring principle.

General Diagram
Fig. 1: The measuring principle for the beltweigher and weighfeeder
v Material and belt velocity Sv The sensor for belt velocity; designed as a mea-
suring wheel or feeder on the belt drive
WB Weighbridge LC Force transducer and load cell
MR Measuring idler SB Belt run sensor
M The drive motor of the belt or a prefeeder on the BM Mark in the belt for scanning through the belt
belt scale with feed regulation travel sensor
Y The controller magnitude on the belt drive (only

the weighfeeder with the VWF software) or inte-
grating a prefeeder for batching
The bulk solids are conducted over a weighbridge located beneath the belt that is limited by two non-
weighed idlers. The material quantity on the weighbridge exercises a force on the load cell (LC) over one or
several measuring idlers (MR). The measuring idlers are linked to a frame structure such as with a parallel
leaf-spring system.
The load cell output voltage is proportional to the platform load. It is amplified and sent to the microproces-
sor of the weighing electronics through an analog/digital converter. The force progression on a single-idler
weighbridge is indicated by the triangle in the figure. Only a fraction of the force of the weight of the bulk
solids is introduced into the measuring idler MR.
The effect of the force of weight over the weighbridge is shown with the Effective Platform Length Leff para-
meter with belt scales. If the belt load Q in kg/m is even, the measuring force QB is calculated on the load
cell LC by:
QB = Q * Leff (1)
For the design shown here with one measuring idler and the measured length L of the weighbridge WB, the
effective bridge is calculated with:
Leff = L / 2

General Diagram
The calculation of the effective bridge length is shown in the appendix for scales with several
measuring idlers.
From equation (1), the system determines the actual belt load Q through the bulk solids on the belt from the
mass QB measured through the load cell via:
Q = QB / Leff
The second important measured value is belt velocity v, that is recorded by the velocity sensor Sv and con-
verted into a frequency f proportional to the velocity. The weighing electronics calculates the flow perfor-
mance I in kg/h according to the formula:
I = Q * v = QB / Leff * v
flow performance I = actual flow rate
3.4 Control operating modes

The following modes of operation are available to the measuring device.
▪
Gravimetric Mode (regulated)
The actual feed rate is adjusted to the setpoint. The maximum possible setpoint is the same as Nominal
Flow Rate (P03.01). An event message is generated if the input value is too large.
▪
Volumetric Mode (unregulated)
The conveyor element setting is proportional to the feed rate setpoint. Measurement of the actual feed
rate has no effect on the conveyor element adjustment. The feed rate approximately equals the speci-
fied setpoint under nominal conditions.
The setpoint is limited to three times the nominal feed rate. An event message will be generated if this
limit is exceeded.
▪
Volumetric Synchronous Mode (unregulated)
This mode of operation is a special form of volumetric operation. It ensures a seamless transition when
switching from gravimetric to volumetric operation.
3.5 Control strategies

strategies
This section describes the various control strategies supported by DISOCONT Tersus.
Note: An external power unit is needed in all cases for controlling each of the drives.
3.5.1 Weighfeeder with Controlled Belt Velocity

A conveyor belt draws bulk solids from a feed bin. An option is having a prefeeder convey the bulk solids
onto the belt. The system calculates a setpoint velocity suited to the load Q and setpoint flow rate P from the
measured load while the controller controls the velocity of the feed belt.

- 10 - Schenck Process Group
General Diagram
Fig. 2: Weighfeeder control principle
v Belt velocity Xd Control deviation
Q Belt load R Velocity controllers
P Flow rate setpoint M The drive motor of the feed belt including an external drive controller
I Actual flow rate Y Controller magnitude on the external drive controller
The actual flow rate I can be calculated as follows:

I=Q*v
The control deviation Xd can be calculated from:
Xd [%] = (I – P) / I0 * 100 %
With I0 = nominal flow rate (P03.01)
If the bulk solids are fed to the feed belt with a controlled prefeeder, the belt load can be additionally con-
trolled through the prefeeder.
Fig. 3: Weighfeeder with feed control as the control principle

Schenck Process Group - 11 -
General Diagram
R1 Flow rate controller P Flow rate setpoint
R2 Belt load controller I Actual flow rate
Xd Control deviation Y Controller magnitude on the external drive controller
v Belt velocity M The drive motor of the feed belt including an external drive controller
Qs The setpoint for the belt load Q Belt load
The weighfeeder guarantees feeding accuracy, i.e., the belt velocity evens out irregularities in the belt load
from fluctuations in feeding performance.
3.5.2 The beltweigher with feed control

The conveyor belt runs at a constant velocity. The bulk solids are brought onto the belt with a prefeeder that
has a controlled flow rate, where the belt load varies with the flow rate. The flow performance is ascertained
precisely through the belt scale and controlled by changing the prefeeder velocity.
Fig. 4: The belt scale with feed control as the control principle
I Actual flow rate v Belt velocity
P Flow rate setpoint Q Belt load
Xd Control deviation R Load controller
Y Controller magnitude M Prefeeder drive
If the prefeeder is designed as a position-controlled feed gate, the continuous controller is designed with a
three-point controller with the outputs of Open and Close. Then it will give feedback on its current position to
the controller.
Another weighbridge can be built into the mechanism with slow-moving or long belts for capturing the load
closer to the feeding point.
The feed control can be linked with the function of a velocity-controlled weighfeeder for bulk solids that are
inclined to flooding.

General Diagram
3.5.3 Beltweigher with

with a constant load
This idea behind this control strategy is to keep the belt load as constant possible in the area of the rated
load with a flow of bulk solids dictated from outside. This is necessary, for instance, with bulk solids at a low
level of bulk density to capture the flow of bulk solids at a high level of accuracy. To reach this goal, the belt
velocity is automatically set to match the specified and measured flow of bulk solids.
Fig. 5: Constant belt load control principle
I Actual mass flow v Belt velocity
I[kg/h] The measured actual mass flow Q Belt load
Xd Control deviation M Belt drive
R Load controller Y Belt velocity controller magnitude
3.6 Belt Influence Compensation BIC

(BIC = Belt Influence Compensation)
Even high-quality conveyor belts are never completely uniform. For instance, they become heavier and stif-
fer especially at the joints. This is the reason why it is normally only possible to guarantee a high level of
measuring accuracy over entire belt circuits. Short-time accuracy can be boosted by determining the tare
dependent upon the conveyor belt for each belt section of a complete circuit individually and subtracting it
from the load's measured value. The belt's influence can be best observed on an empty belt.
Fig. 6: Load curve over belt circuits
Q The measured load V The joint in the belt
n The number of total belt circuits
These recurring patterns can be observed even when the belt is loaded.
The belt is given a mark to identify its position that is captured using a stationary sensor. The system learns
the recurring load progression through the belt influence over several belt circuits even with a loaded belt

General Diagram
and automatically corrects its influence. Since the belt influence changes over the transit time (in particular
over idle times), it has to be captured on a regular basis. This is why correction is adaptive.
3.7 Measuring and Feeding at the Discharge Point (VAP)

The weighbridge is not located directly at the material discharge point to boost accuracy. This is why the
measurement for the flow rate of a simple beltweigher does not correspond to the momentary flow rate at
discharge with fluctuating belt loads.
The control system captures and controls the total precisely at the discharge point by delaying the load's
measuring signal by the time the bulk solids need from the measuring point to discharge (VAP) and then
multiplying it with the velocity. This can boost the control quality even more.
This figure uses the example of the weighfeeder to show the contact from BIC and VAP .
Fig. 7: The weighfeeder control principle with BIC and VAP
I Actual flow rate v Belt velocity
P Flow rate setpoint Q Belt load
Xd Control deviation M Belt drive
Y Belt velocity controller magnitude R Velocity controllers
BIC Belt influence compensation VAP Delay to the discharge point

(belt influence compensation)
3.8 Batching
In batch mode a preset quantity of material is discharged and the feeding is subsequently switched off.
Once the batch setpoint has been reached the batch operation is complete. A subsequent start command to
the feeder will begin a new charge.
Batch filling can be carried out in all modes and variants of operation.
The general procedure for batch operation is shown in the following figure:

General Diagram
Fig. 8: Feeding
The segments shown in the figure mean the following:

0: Start the batch with a preset batch setpoint in units of weight.
1: Interrupt batch operation by switching off the discharge element.
2: Resume the interrupted batch by switching on the feeder.
3: Automatic reduction of the flow rate towards the end of the batch.
4: End automatically once the predetermined batch quantity has been reached.
3.9 Additional Bin Weighers

Weighers
DISOCONT Tersus can also capture the weight of a bin (called additional containers for the sake of simplifi-
cation). This bin can also be used for controlling and correcting continuous measurement.
This additional bin weigher operates completely independently of the continuous scales. It is used to display
the hopper weight, register and monitor threshold levels and regulate the fill level.
It is often used to record the weight of the bin that is upstream of the continuous measuring or feeding unit in
the route.
The bin weigher is switched on by parameter P26.01 Bin Weigher Active = YES.

Operation
4 Operation
The DISOCONT Tersus and an attached weighfeeder can be operated in one of several ways:
▪
Operation under normal circumstances using one or more local VHM operating panels. The features of
the different panel versions can be found in system manual BV-H2406. The sides with the operating di-
alogs are also available via web interface for a browser .
▪
Operation using a higher-order plant control system where the control commands are either exchanged
conventionally by means of binary and analog signals or by means of a fieldbus such as PROFIBUS.
▪
Operation for service work by means of a wireless VHM operating panel.
▪
Operation for service work by EasyServe on a PC/notebook with a cable or wireless access.
▪
Local operation by means of an optional service operating level and the VLG or VMO operating units
specifically for work performed on the mechanism. The special characteristics of this operating panels
can be found in the system manual BV-H2406.
4.1 Behavior after Connecting the Power

Once power is switched on, the DISOCONT Tersus control unit VCU starts up with a self-test. The system
states are indicated by LEDs on the unit. The significance of the indicators can be found in system manual
BV-H2406.
An optional connected VHM operating panel will start up with a self-test of the display once power has been
connected. Subsequently, it establishes communication to the VCU it was connected to last before power
was switched off.
The version number of the device will then appear for a few seconds before being replaced by the normal
display.
Notes:
▪
The following are retained during a power failure:
– Parameter settings
– Setpoints
– The status of all internal counters
– Counting pulses not yet output to external counters
– Date and time
– All important process values
▪
A specific start command is always required to begin feeding.
4.2 Operating and Control Access

DISOCONT Tersus can be operated using the following approaches:
Operating source Operation under normal Service work User Interface

circumstances Type
VHM operating panel X X VHM touch

(permanently installed)
VHM operating panel X VHM touch
(mobile per cable or wireless)
Service operating panel for the X Foil keyboard and display
VMO drive

Operation
Operating source Operation under normal Service work User Interface

circumstances Type
Plant main computer via Fieldbus X (X) Plant main computer

Web browser via PC X VHM with PC keyboard
Service tool X EasyServe
Tab. 2 : Operating access
DANGER
Feeding can be started using the operating panel. This switches the
drives on, allowing bulk material to flow. Before turning it on, the op-
erator has to make sure that turning it on cannot cause any damage.
Interrupting communications when operating on a non-permanent line
(pluggable cable or radio) may cause dangerous situations. There-
fore, such methods of accessing control should be reserved for ser-
vice work only.
4.2.1 Connecting an operating panel (VHM) with a scale controller (VCU)

After a loss of power at the operating panel, it automatically attempts to reconnect with the scale it was con-
nected to before the power loss (after an adjustable waiting period). During this waiting period, the Feeder
operating page can be selected again to select a different scale.
If a connection has already been established, although you want to activate communication to a different
scale, you have to end the existing connection. You can do so after registering yourself as a privileged user
by pressing the Sel. Scale button.
An error message is displayed on the screen if a connection is lost. If the connection cannot be re-
established even after several attempts, the operating panel jumps into the configuration dialog.
The procedure for selecting a scales is dependent on the form of communication and is described in the
following chapters.
4.2.1.1 Connection via Ethernet Cable

Preconditions: The VHM operating panel must be connected to the ethernet network to which the VCU
control unit is also connected. The hardware requirements are described in the BV-H2406 system manual.
You have to select the Ethernet channel (Configuring the Communication Path (Com)) in the operating pan-
el configuration.
Once the first connection has been made, the operating panel searches in the network for VCU control units
and shows its findings on the Feeder operating page. A button belonging a scale that is displayed is used to
select the scale and establish the data connection.
4.2.1.2 Connection via Bluetooth

Conditions: A Bluetooth adapter must be connected both to the operating panel and the scales. The scales
must be within transmission range. The hardware requirements are described in the BV-H2406 system ma-
nual.

Operation
The Bluetooth channel has to be selected (Configuring the Communication Path (Com)) in the configuration
of the operator panel.
Once the communication path has been selected, the console will search for Bluetooth adapters within
range. Other Bluetooth adapters can be found and displayed along with controllers (VCUs). The outcome is
shown on the Feeder [➙ 39] operating page.
Note: A complete search for Bluetooth adapters can take several seconds. A progress indicator is
displayed during the search. There will also be Bluetooth adapters shown to which no con-
nection can be established, either because they are not DISOCONT Tersus controllers or
they are already otherwise connected.
You can select the scale and establish a data connection by pressing the key belonging to the scale dis-
played. It may take several seconds before a connection is established. The respective status will be shown
in the header of the operating panel while a connection is being established.
Note: It can only establish a connection to one scale (assuming the scale is not simultaneously
connected to another Bluetooth adapter). It might be necessary to close the other connection
first. The operating panel will continue to attempt to establish a connection if another connec-
tion already exists.
If Bluetooth is used, the scales to whose Bluetooth adapter a connection has been established is the only
scales with which communication can be made. The Ethernet destination address may not be changed in
the VHM.
4.2.1.3 Connection via RS485

Conditions: The operator panel and controller have to be in the same RS485 network. The hardware re-
quirements are described in the BV-H2406 system manual.
The RS485 channel has to be selected in the configuration of the operating panel (Configuring the Commu-
nication Path (Com)).
Once the communication path has been selected, the operator panel will switch to the Feeder [➙ 39] page.
This is where the address of VCU is set. The load digits of the Ethernet address (P21.07) of the scales con-
troller will be used again for addressing at the RS485 bus.
The system performs a check of the communication path once the address has been entered. If communi-
cation can be established under the address entered, this is indicated by a green marking beside the ad-
dress number. Otherwise this marking will be red.
You can establish the connection to the scale with the Con.Scale button.
Note: The operating panel is the master on the bus. This is why only one operating panel may be
connected on the bus at any one time.
4.2.2 Connecting EasyServe (PC) with the scales controller (VCU)
4.2.2.1 Connection via Ethernet

If the connection is to be established by cable the connection should be made using Ethernet.
Conditions: The EasyServe PC is connected with an Ethernet cable to the scales network.
Note: Either use a non-coded socket of the VCU for this connection or a special (yellow) cable
when using the red-coded socket.

Operation
The EasyServe address must be in the same Ethernet subnetwork as the scales' address. It might be poss-
ible to adapt the address in the scanner dialog of EasyServe. A scales can also be addressed using a router
if the network has already been configured. The scale address is input manually and not via scanner dialog.
The PC must then have an IP address in the directly connected subnetwork.
The easiest way to select is with the EasyServe Connection | Ethernet (Scanner) item on the menu. This
shows all of the scales available in the network. The scales' connection parameters can be adjusted here
and a connection to the scales can be established.
If the scales are connected to a different subnet, they are selected manually using Connection|Ethernet
(Manual)' and entering the scale's IP address.
4.2.2.2 Connection via WLAN

We recommend using WLAN to make a wireless connection to a scales.
Preconditions: The scales have been connected with a WLAN modem to the Ethernet. The WLAN modem
has been configuered as an access point and its ethernet address is in the same subnetwork as the scales.
The PC also has a WLAN modem, and the IP address of the PC is in the same network as the scales' IP
address.
In general the WLAN modem is configured using a browser before use. This configuration is described in
the modem's user manual.
The WLAN in the PC is activated and the WLAN access point selected. Once the connection to the WLAN
access point has been made, all of the functions can be accessed on the PC as they would if an ethernet
connection were made by cable.
4.2.2.3 Connection via Bluetooth

A connection is more complicated to establish via Bluetooth than via WLAN. The only scales that can be
accessed is the one to whose Bluetooth adapter the connection was established.
Conditions: Scales and PC are equipped with Bluetooth adapters.
Establishing a connection:
1 Start the Bluetooth adapter configuration program in the PC.

2 Select the desired scales from the list of adapters displayed.
Note: If the name of the scales was changed it will be necessary to restart the PC in order to dis-
play the changed name.
3 Begin establishing a connection with the Bluetooth adapter. Password: 7353
4 The PC user must enter a Personal Area Network (PAN) once the connection to the Bluetooth
adapter has been established.
5 The address of the Bluetooth scales is one number lower than the scales' IP-subnetwork set by
parameter. The PC address must be in the same subnetwork.
6 The scales can now be selected using the scanner or by means of a direct address input. Other
scales in the network cannot be addressed.
4.2.2.4 Connection via RS-

RS-232
RS232 is used to make a connection in special cases only, e.g. when no connection can be made via
Ethernet. It may be necessary to establish a connection via RS232 if there is a power failure to a device
while a software program is being loaded into it in order to re-load the software.
Conditions: The PC's serial interface (COM) must be connected by cable to VCU socket X97. For details
see system manual BV-H2406.
Connect using the EasyServe menu item 'Connection | Serial...'.

Operation
38400 baud, 8-O-1 is the only permissible communication format. Select the Com port available at the PC
and the scales' address. The address is stored in parameter P19.01 Own Address in the scales.
Note: A software update via RS232 interface can take as much as 20 minutes. Other functions run
slower than would be usual if the connection was made using Ethernet.
4.2.3 Connecting the web browser with the scales controller

controller (VCU)
Conditions:
▪
The PC is connected to the VCU via Ethernet.
▪
Java is installed on the PC and can be started.
▪
Temporary file storage may not be activated in Java as this can cause erroneous status messages to
occur.
Establishing a connection:
The URL of the operator interface homepage must be entered into the browser address line. This URL is
composed of the following:
http://<address>/hmi/<display factor>.html
Item: Meaning: Possible values:

<address> VCU IP address e.g. 192.168.240.1
<display factor> Display size on the screen start
start_2x
start_3x
start_4x
Example: http://192.168.240.1/hmi/start.html
NOTES:
▪
The user interface in the browser corresponds largely to the display on the VHM operating panel.
▪
The field used to select a different scales and the configuration dialogs for the VHM operating panel
itself are not available.
▪
Keyboard and mouse are used for operation so the entry keyboard is not shown on the screen.
4.2.4 The web server in the scales controller (VCU)

The scales controller is equipped with a web server that provides the scale with a homepage. This is only
available in English.
Conditions: The PC can establish an Ethernet connection to the VCU.
Establishing the connection: The IP address of the VCU must be entered into the browser address line.

Operation
Various data from the scales controller can be called up on the left-hand navigation bar.
Navigation entry Function
HMI Opens at a different size the same controller interface as is in the operating panel.
HMI_2x Also refer to: Connecting the web browser with the scales controller (VCU) [➙ 21]
HMI_3x
HMI_4x
Events Memory of the most recent events (such as alarms or warnings, etc.)
Parameter changes Memory of the most recent changes in parameters
Command log Logs a list of certain commands, e.g. start / stop
Totalizer hourly Table of hourly-saved totalizing integrators / counters. The values are also available
on the VHM operating panel.
The minute of saving the data is set after the full hour in P38.01.
Totalizer daily Table of daily-saved totalizing integrators / counters
The time of saving from 00:00 h is set in P38.02.
Totalizer Table of totalizing integrators / counters saved on the command
DataLogger 1 Table of the measured values recorded. The sampling interval can be set using
DataLogger 2 P38.03. The up to 10 process variables that can be recorded are selected using
P38.04 P38.13. It begins recording when activating in the Mode operating range.
Tab. 3 : Function calls on the scales controller homepage
Memory depth is approx. 1,000 entries. All entries are keyed in stating the entry time. The entries in the
tables are only up-dated when they are called up. The values can be exported into a PC file for analysis with
standard programs using select-copy-paste.

Operation
4.3 VHM operating panel

The DISOCONT Tersus system can be equipped with an optional VHM operating panel.
The operating panel is equipped with a touch-sensitive display (i.e., touch screen). The buttons shown
change dynamically depending on the state of the system. The keys are activated by touching the screen. A
touch pin or other object with a small contact area such as a finger or glove can be used.
The following figure shows the structure of the user interface (front view) if it is in communication with a VCU
control unit.
Fig. 9: DISOCONT Tersus VHM operating panel display
1 Name of device being controlled 5 Select details and operating keys
2 Field for event messages 6 Field for measured values and graphics
3 Select work field 7 Command and edit keys
4 On and off keys 8 Symbol indicating running operation
The [HOME] button is used to select the basic view.

Operation
Notes:
▪
VHM VCU The operating panel works in the Configuration Mode as long as it is NOT in
communication with a scale. Then the [Feeder] buttons are offered in the ‘Se-
lect the Workspace’ (3) range for selecting a scale and [Con. Scale] for estab-
lishing the connection to the scale selected.
Also refer to the Operating and Control Access Chapter.
▪
The communication to a scale has to be interrupted for adjustments to the
display such as brightness and adjusting the touch-sensitive screen. You can
call up the adjustment dialogs for the operating panel with the [Sel. Scale] but-
ton.
4.3.1 Display and Operation Fields
4.3.1.1 Name of the Device

The name of the scales to which the operating panel currently has a data connection is shown in the head-
er. The name is set as a parameter (P02.03) in the device.
4.3.1.2 Event messages

The system performs various tests. An event will be identified if there are any deviations from normal oper-
ating conditions. The way in which the device reacts to such an event can be set by parameter. The event
appears in the field for event messages.
For example:
IL06 (W1) Event: Not Ready for Start
The variables have the following significance:
IL06 Explicit, language-independent identifier for the event

W1 Event class
Event: Not Ready for Start Explanatory text
The following event classes can occur:

Operation
Class System status Display

A ALARM: Serious error. Text against a red background.
Drives had to be shut down. Blinking: not acknowledged
This message must be acknowledged before it can be cleared and
Static: acknowledged
the drives restarted.
W1 WARNING 1: Irregular operation. Text against a yellow background.
This could indicate a serious error. Blinking: not acknowledged
The event did not stop material conveying. Acknowledge the mes-
Static: acknowledged
sage to clear it.
W2 WARNING 2: Irregular operation.
This could indicate a serious error.
The event did not stop material conveying. The message will be
cleared automatically once the event is no longer pending.
4.3.1.3 Selecting the operating range

The selection on the right offers the following operating fields:
Field Function User
HOME Operation and display for normal operation System operating personnel
Trend Illustration of the transient behavior of process signals System operating personnel
Service personnel
Values Process and measured values System operating personnel
Service personnel
Setup Special display and operation for setup, diagnostics and ser- Service personnel
vice
Login Login for privileged access Service personnel
Help Indication of program versions; System operating personnel
Cleaning of monitor display Service personnel
Sel. Scale Connect to a different scales Service personnel
Some functions are not available to non-privileged users. Beyond this, access to some func-
tions can be switched off per parameter.
4.3.1.4 On/Off Operation

The feeder drive can be switched on and off with the keys in this field if the mode of operation and the pa-
rameterization permit it.
WARNING
A start signal will actuate the motors!
There is a risk of injury to people standing within range of the motors. Bulk
material can be transported and may overwhelm downstream components.
The stop signal is not an emergency stop, but rather will stop the facility
normally.

Operation
4.3.1.5 Detail Selection

Different screens in a work field can be selected by using the keys in the lower area. The key used often to
acknowledge event messages is available in most displays. Further pages can be called up with the arrow
keys. Key allocation varies between the fields. An overview of the function tree can be seen in section Op-
erating Fields and Function Calls.
Access to individual functions can be limited when setting up the system to privileged user groups.
4.3.1.6 Measured Values and Graphics

Depending on the page selected, current measured values and graphical representations of the mechanical
system and signals are displayed here. Input boxes, e.g. for a setpoint or parameter value, are shown
'recessed'.
4.3.1.7 Command and Edit Keys

Other buttons can be overlaid for special functions in area (7) above the lower detail selection (5). The keys
shown vary with the detail selection in the respective work field. The function of these keys is described in
the relative function sections.
4.3.1.8
4.3.1.8 Symbol for Running Operation
The symbol for a running feed in the upper-left corner indicates the state of the main drive. A rotating rec-
tangle will be displayed when device is switched on. This symbol appears on all display pages.
4.3.2 Authorization for Control Commands

There are many ways to restrict the entry of control commands to certain users only. The system supports
setting special conditions using a range of methods.
4.3.2.1 Modes of Operation: Normal Operation and Keyboard Operation

The scales are usually operated in normal operation during production. The entry points (sources) for
operation under normal conditions are determined by parameter. The scales can be turned on and setpoints
altered from these sources only.
Parameters Name and signal

P04.01 Feeder Start
P04.02 Feedrate Setpoint
P15.02 Batch Setpoint Source
Tab. 4 : Source parameters that have an effect in normal operation
Sources for operation under normal conditions can be set for entry at the scales operating panel during ser-
vice work. This mode is called keyboard mode. The VHM operating panel and the analog operating soft-
ware that can be started via a web browser from the scales control homepage are considered to be operat-
ing panels. In keyboard mode the service software tool 'EasyServe' can also be used to control the scales.

Operation
4.3.2.2 Restrictions for Operating Panel with Ethernet Connection and Connection Moni-
Moni-
toring
The system can be configured so that normal operation is accessible only to devices with IP addresses that
have been specified by parameters. The corresponding parameters can be found in the parameter group
'Dialog Behaviour' (P02.04 … P02.10).
Operation via 'EasyServe' is not affected by the parameter setting.
The connection to the operating devices with specified addresses can be monitored so that the scales can
be returned to a safe state in case of a malfunction.
4.3.2.3 Access to Special Functions

Access to special functions can be restricted by parameters. The following options can be selected by these
parameters grouped according to control command:
'active' Command not restricted. The command may always be called up at the scales
operating panel.
'not active' Command is never allowed. The relevant key is not shown at the operating
panel making it impossible to execute the command.
'Password' The command is accessible only after logging on with password 1. Password 1
is variable and can be changed using P02.12.
This password is principally intended for service access. The basic system set-
tings are always made using this password.
'2nd Password' The command is accessible only after logging on with password 2. Password 2
is variable and can be changed using P02.13.
The parameters for defining access authorizations are in the group of Dialog Behaviour (P02.14 ... P02.21)
parameters. If the user has not registered with sufficient privileges for the desired function, the operating
button appears as non-active (grey) with a star in the lower right-hand corner.
The operating company is responsible for assuring that the passwords are known to those personnel only
who are to receive authorization for the respective control command. The control functions are released
once the user has logged on with the Login key and has entered the password. The Logout key should be
used to log off the privileged user from the system once the work has been completed. The unit falls back by
itself into the non-privileged operating mode after the time set on the operating panel (refer to Setting the
Display [➙ 38]) .
However, the control commands can always be executed via EasyServe regardless of the
parameter setting.
4.3.3 Basic Operating Functions

This section will describe operation under normal conditions.
Access to certain operating functions can be restricted when setting up the system. They will then be no
longer accessible or accessible with a keyword only. This chapter will describe the complete and unre-
stricted functional range.

Operation
4.3.3.1 Switch Feeding On/Off

Condition
▪
No alarm may be pending.
▪
The all-clear must be given by discharging elements, in as far as any are connected. Event IL-01 Event:
Run Disabled will be sent if no all-clear is given.
▪
The on switch at the operating panel must be activated. This is the case in keyboard or in normal mode
if the source of the on pulse in P04.01 has been set to 'OP'.
Turning on feeding
▪
Press the ON key.
Display during running feed
▪
Running arrow in the graphical display.
▪
ON appears in the graphical display.
▪
A moving symbol appears in the upper left border.
Turning off feeding
▪
Press the OFF key.
Scales will be switched off. Feed rate measurement will cease after the time set in parameter P06.01 has
elapsed.
Display during stopped feed
OFF appears in the graphical display. Moving displays are turned off.
4.3.3.2 Set setpoint

Condition
▪
Keyboard mode selected, or
▪
Normal mode selected and P04.02 = 'OP'
The setpoint will be displayed in a data-entry frame if it can be altered.
How to Enter the Setpoint
1. Call up the HOME operating page.
2. Press the entry frame, the entry field will open.
3. Clear the old value with the [C] button and key in the value.
4. Complete entry by pressing OK or exit by pressing EXIT.
HINT
Limiting the entry
The setpoint is limited to the nominal flow rate in P03.01 in gravimetric op-
eration and to the threefold value of the nominal value in volumetric opera-
tion.
4.3.3.3 Relative Setpoint

With the relative setpoint Pr, an externally set setpoint Pe can be expressed as a percent. This function is
used to enter a portion of additives, with the command variable being measured.
Conditions
The P04.05 parameter = AI or OP
The effective setpoint for the control is calculated using the following formula:

Operation
P = Pe × Pr / 100 %
P = effective setpoint
Pe = External setpoint
Pr = Relative setpoint
It is entered the same way as an absolute setpoint (Set setpoint [➙ 28]).
HINT
Limiting the entry
The setpoint is limited to the nominal flow rate in P03.01 in gravimetric op-
eration and to the threefold value of the nominal value in volumetric opera-
tion.
4.3.3.4
4.3.3.4 Resetting (zero setting) the totalizing counter
The DISOCONT Tersus has three totalizing counters that sum up the measured bulk material quantity.
Counters 1 and 2 can be reset. Counter 3 cannot be reset. The counters do not have any independent over-
flow.
How to reset a totalizing counter
Press the Totals button, then press the button for zero setting the desired counter and confirm the com-
mand.
HINT
Other ways to reset the counters
The system can be configured to allow the counters to be reset by means
of an electrical signal. All counters will still be able to be reset via the field-
bus interface by the main computer. All reset commands work
independently of one another.
4.3.3.5 Acknowledging
Acknowledging Event Messages
All of the important functions are monitored. An event message is generated if a malfunction occurs. This
will be displayed in the message field. The event with the highest priority will be displayed if several events
should occur.
The order of priorities is: Alarm (A), Warning 1 (W1), Warning 2 (W2).
HINT
Displaying earlier events
To display older events, open the 'Values' screen and select 'Event Log'.
Earlier events can be called up using the navigation keys in the event field.
The list of events can also be viewed via web server and can be exported
for an external evaluation.

Operation
How to Acknowledge an Error Message
DANGER
Event messages indicate unusual and/or dangerous states.
For reasons of safety, the causes of any malfunctions must be corrected
before an event message is acknowledged.
To acknowledge an event message press the 'Ack Event' key, available on many screens e.g. in 'HOME'.
Once acknowledged, any blinking messages will be displayed continuously. When the cause of the malfunc-
tion has been corrected the event will be cleared from the message line but can be displayed again using
'EreignisLog'.
A troubleshooting list can be found in section Event Messages.
4.3.4 Special Operating

Operating Functions
This section will describe the functions used for normal operation in special cases. If not stated otherwise,
the text will assume that the work field HOME has been selected (Selecting the operating range [➙ 25]).
4.3.4.1 Volumetric / (Volumetric Synchronous) / Gravimetric Modes of Regulator Opera-

Opera-
tion
The feed rate regulator can be operated in different modes of operation.
Gravimetric operation:
The actual feed rate value in units of weight per time is adjusted to the preset setpoint.
The maximum possible setpoint is the same as the nominal feed rate (P03.01). The message SC1 'Event:
Setpoint Limited' is generated if greater entries are made.
Volumetric operation:
Material discharge is adjusted proportional to the setpoint; the weight of the hopper has no effect on the
regulator output. This mode of operation can be required if the weight measurement is subjected to a lot of
disturbance and if the loss in weight per unit of time is not a reliable measure of the discharge capacity.
Under nominal conditions the feed rate approximately corresponds to the preset setpoint.
The setpoint is limited to the threefold nominal feed rate (P03.01). The message SC1 'Event: Setpoint Li-
mited' is generated if greater entries are made. The actual feed rate value in units of weight per time is
measured, but has no effect on the control.
Volumetric synchronous operation:
This mode of operation is the same as volumetric operation but ensures a smooth transition from gravime-
tric operation by taking into consideration the mean regulator output value calculated during gravimetric
operation.
Setting regulator mode
Press the 'Mode' key followed by 'Rate Control'. Press the key with the desired selection.
Display
The mode of operation is indicated in the overview page graphical representation by the identifiers 'GRAV',
'VOL' and 'VOL S'.
4.3.4.2 Keyboard Mode ON/OFF

You can use the Keyboard mode function place the preselected operating sources for switching on/off, for
specifying the setpoint and the source for the batch setpoint onto the keyboard of the VHM operating panel.
The previous sources will take effect if keyboard mode is deactivated. Since operating via Easy-

Operation
Serve corresponds to operating with the keyboard on the operating unit, this switch also has an impact on
operating via EasyServe.
Note: When switching to keyboard from an external source (e.g. serial fieldbus), the ON/OFF status of the
scales, the setpoint and the batch setpoint are maintained. The external signals are effective when switching
in the opposite direction.
How to set up keyboard mode
Pressing the Mode buttons, changing to the second display page via arrow key and Keyboard mode there.
Display
The ON, OFF' buttons and the setpoint input space are visible in the keyboard mode. These fields are only
visible in normal mode if the operating sources have been set to the operating panel (OP).
4.3.4.3 Trend
The trend is a graphical depiction on the VHM operating panel of the course of process values over time.
HINT
It is easier with EasyServe
EasyServe allows you to adjust trend depictions much more comfortably
and to export measured data. The trend in the VHM is intended to offer
permanent and simple trend depiction.
The trend depiction, stored values from previous weighings and the configuration of the trend will be deleted
if the operating panel suffers a power failure or if it connects to a different scales.
Button Function
<< Open older values into the display window, large increments
< Open older values into the display window, small increments
> Open more recent values into the display window, small increments
>> Open more recent values into the display window, large increments
Settings Enter the configuration dialog (see below)
Z- Increase time period shown
Z+ Decrease time period shown
Tab. 5 : Control keys
Setting the Trend Display

The configuration window appears after 'Settings' is pressed.

Operation
Fig. 10: Lines configuration
The process values selected for display are shown in the left table (1). The first time it is called up the list
will be empty.
In order to configure the display of a value, click on the value in table 1 to select it. This will show the value's
reference number (ID), its thresholds and the color of the line. Touching fields (3) to (5) will open the corres-
ponding adjustment dialog box.
Button Function
Remove Delete the values selected in (1) and (2).
Back Close the configuration window and return to the trend display. Altered settings will not
be activated.
Update Activate the configuration shown for the trend depiction.
Add Open the dialog to select the value to be displayed.
Tab. 6 : Keys in the lines configuration

Operation
Fig. 11: Selection dialog for process values
Click on a value in list (5) to select it. The properties of the trend line are transferred to the right-hand col-
umn, the reference number (ID) shown in field (4).
The value is transferred with the keys 'Add' or 'New' into list 1 of the values to be displayed.
Process value ID Process variable Dimension
1872 Measured actual flow rate kg/h

1884 Belt velocity m/s
1880 Belt load kg/m
1890 Hopper fill level kg
1894 Effective setpoint kg/h
1904 Control deviation % of rated capacity
Tab. 7 : Meaning of the identifier in the rapid selection table (5)
The characteristic value (ID) of any given process value can be entered in ID field (4). Possible values can
be found in the fieldbus data description. The 'Back' key closes the window in which values are selected and
returns to the value configuration menu.
4.3.4.4 Cleaning and Testing the Display

The touchscreen is deactivated for a set period of time to allow the display to be cleaned. No acidic or
strongly abrasive cleaning agents may be used. During cleaning, a clock will count down from 20 seconds to
zero. The screen will remain white during this time with the exception of the progress indicator. This allows
defective pixels to be spotted. The touchscreen will be automatically reactivated once the time has elapsed.
How to initiate cleaning mode
Press the 'Help' key followed by 'Clean:'.

Operation
4.3.4.5 Display the Most Recent Events ('Errors')

The event with the highest priority will permanently be displayed in the corresponding display line. Press the
'Values' key followed by 'Event Log' to display older events or events of lower priority. Other events can then
be scrolled into the display with the arrow keys.
Note: The list of events is also available in the web browser, from where it can be comfortably displayed or
downloaded and evaluated. The list cannot be erased. The memory retains at least the previous 500 entries
(in as far as so many entries have already been made).
4.3.4.6 Display Stored Counter Readings

The readings of the totalizing counters can be stored cyclically. The stored values are available as a at the
operating panel and in list form in the web browser.
Press the Values button and then Total Log button display them on the operating panel. Individual entries
can then be scrolled into the display with the arrow keys.
Note: The list cannot be erased. The memory retains at least the previous 500 entries (in as far as so many
entries have already been made).
4.3.4.7 Display the Most Recent Parameter Alterations.

Press the Values button and then the Param Log button to show changes in parameters. Previous altera-
tions can then be scrolled into the display with the arrow keys.
Note: The list of parameter alterations is also available in the web browser, from where it can be comforta-
bly displayed or downloaded and evaluated. The list cannot be erased. The memory retains at least the
previous 500 entries (in as far as so many entries have already been made).
4.3.4.8 Bin Weigher: Display and Operation

The measured values of the additional bin weigher are displayed in a separate screen. It is only possible to
display this when the bin weigher is activated via P26.01 Bin Weigher Active.
To open the display:
Press the Surge Bin button.
You can not only see the current bin weight, but also the limits set per parameter. The parameters can be
adapted right on the screen if you register with sufficient privileges.
Parameters No. Meaning
Bin Level MAX P26.18 Upper threshold of the permissible fill level. Generates an event if exceeded.
Control Level MAX P26.13 Fill level at which the filling will be stopped.
Control Level MIN P26.12 Filling is started if the fill level falls below this threshold.
Bin Level MIN P26.15 Lower threshold of the permissible fill level. Generates an event if level falls
below this level.
Tab. 8 : Bin weigher parameters

Operation
Button Effect
Auto The filling is regulated automatically by means of the threshold values 'Control Level MIN'
and 'Control Level MAX' set.
Manual The filling of the hopper is controlled by the operator using the keys 'Start' and 'Stop'. For
reasons of safety filling is automatically stopped if the limit 'Control Level MAX' is ex-
ceeded.
Start Begin filling the hopper.
Stop End filling the hopper.
Tab. 9 : Operating keys for controlling hopper fill level
Refer to Adjustment Functions for information on adjusting the bin weigher.
4.3.5 Service Functions

The functions described here are as a rule used only for system setup, troubleshooting or to alter the control
properties.
Some functions are accessible only to privileged users who have logged onto the controller (also refer to:
Operating Fields and Function Calls).
4.3.5.1 Display Parameter Alterations

Changes made to parameters are archived in the system. Press the 'Values' key followed by 'Param Log' to
display the stored values. Previous values can then be scrolled into the display with the arrow keys.
4.3.5.2 Reading and Setting Parameters

The control program was structured such that no programing knowledge is necessary to adapt the system to
local conditions. Parameters define the properties. The meaning of the parameters can be found in the de-
tailed parameter description in section 'Parameters'.
Call up: Setup button and then Parameter button
Parameters that require frequent changes due to bulk material changes are summarized in Selection.
You can access all parameters via All.
The parameters are structured in blocks to give a better overview. parameters are composed as follows:
Pxx.yy <Text>, where: xx: Block number

yy: Number of the parameter in the block
<Text> Explanatory name of the parameter (language-dependent)
Depending on the situation, individual parameters or groups of parameters may be faded

out to highlight the parameters important to an application. Hidden parameters can only be
shown via EasyServe and activated there for the display on the VHM operating panel whe-
rever necessary. The fading out may result in breaks in the numbering. Some parameters
can be write protected. The write protection can also be configured using EasyServe.
NOTE: The following description applies to a visible and write unprotected parameter accessed by a user
with sufficient user privileges.
The parameter group is displayed and selected in the upper part of display area 6 (see VHM operating pan-
el [➙ 23]). Use the arrow keys to scroll through the groups. Individual parameters in a group can be se-
lected in the lower half of display area 6.
A parameter can be selected directly with the keyboard symbol.

Operation
The value of the parameter is shown in display area 7 (see VHM operating panel [➙ 23]) of the command
and edit keys.
The Edit button calls up the dialog for changing the selected parameters. The parameter's identifier will ap-
pear in the focus of the upper part of display area 6 and its current value in the lower part. Depending on the
type of parameter the arrow keys can be used either to assign a new value to the parameter or a value can
be entered for it. A changed value is written into the parameter via Store resident. An alternative is discard-
ing the change with the Exit or Back button. In the latter case the parameter value will remain unchanged.
4.3.5.3 Setting the Clock

DISOCONT Tersus has a shock-mounted real-time clock. If system is powered off, the clock continues run-
ning for approximately one week provided that the system has been operating for at least 30 hours. The
clock buffer is maintenance-free.
The time is recorded in the process value logs.
How to set the clock:
Press the Setup button and then Set Time.
The current values for date and time appear in display space 6 (refer to VHM operating panel [➙ 23]).
Touch the entry field to open an entry dialog. Either touch the screen or use the arrow keys to move the
cursor in the entry field. Finish the procedure and change the time with [OK]. The dialog is exited via Cancel
without changing the clock.
4.3.5.4 Reset to Factory Settings

DISOCONT Tersus has three independent sets of parameters:
Parameter set Usage Load procedure at the operating panel.
Active parameter set Set controller behaviour Individual parameter values can be altered (see
Reading and Setting Parameters [➙ 35]).
Backup set Pre-prepared parameter set for By pressing 'Setup', right arrow and then 'Custom'
certain applications or settings you can begin a complete rewrite of the active para-
after commissioning meter set.
Factory settings Unalterable set of parameters for By pressing 'Setup', right arrow and then 'Factory'
the basic configuration you can begin a complete rewrite of the active para-
meter set.
Tab. 10 : Parameter sets: Usage and activation
WARNING
Irretrievable loss of adjusted parameters
Loading the backup parameter set or the factory settings will overwrite all of
the parameters in the active parameter set. The overwrite cannot be re-
versed. We recommend you to use EasyServe to save a copy of the cur-
rent parameter set to the PC drive before overwriting.
4.3.5.5 Simulation Mode

For commissioning, the DISOCONT Tersus can simulate important process values for training and test pur-
poses without starting aggregates and without requiring all sensors to be connected. Load and speed values
are simulated internally.

Operation
WARNING
Output signals are set in simulation mode. This allows externally
connected motors to start. The system will show that material is flow-
ing.
The starting motors may represent a hazard. The on signal can activate
systems upstream of the feeder whether the feeder is prepared to receive
the bulk material or not.
Selecting simulation mode:

Press the keys 'Setup, right arrow and then 'Simulation'.
4.3.5.6 Operating the calibration functions

DISOCONT Tersus offers a range of calibration functions to facilitate commissioning and changing bulk
material. All functions are operated according to the same principles. The Adjustment Functions Chapter
summarizes the individual functions, what is required for them and their results.
To call up: Press the 'Setup' key followed by 'Calibration' and 'Programs “
Use the arrow keys to select and display the name of the program in the upper part of display area 6 (see
VHM operating panel [➙ 23]). Operating information will also appear here.
Further information and program results are shown in the lower part of the display area.
The keys in area 7 of the display are used for operation (see VHM operating panel [➙ 23]).
Button Function
Start Run the selected program

Apply Transfer the results to the parameter and end the program
Cancel Discard the results and abort the program. Programs can be aborted at any time.
Tab. 11 : Keys for the calibration programs
4.3.6 Configuring the VHM Operating Panel

The operating panel configuration is autonomous of the scales configuration. The operating panel has a
proprietary set of parameters stored in the operating panel itself only. These parameters can be accessed
by means of a special dialog. User prompts in the configuration dialog are always in English, regardless of
the language set for the scales.
4.3.6.1 Accessing the Configuration

Once power to the system has been switched on, the operating panel will show 'VHM-SPG' in the headline
of the display. Open the operating panel configuration dialog by pressing any key other than [Con.Scales].
▪
Alternatively: If the operating panel is already displaying a scales' operating pages, the configuration
dialog can be opened with the 'Sel. Scale' key without requiring the supply voltage to be switched off
and on (Operating Fields and Function Calls).
The adjustment ranges are called up with the keys in area 3 [➙ 24] of the display. Some functions are
accessible only to privileged users.

Operation
Button Function Password

protected
VHM addr. Set the VHM IP address Yes

Display Set the display parameters Yes
Feeder Select the scales to which a connection is to be established
Config Detailed adjustment of the scales' web server homepage Yes
Com Set the path for communication with the scales Yes
Calibration Adjust touchscreen entry
Login Login for privileged users
Con.Scales Connect to a scales
Help Display software version
Disable touchscreen to clean display
Tab. 12 : Keys in the VHM configuration dialog
4.3.6.2 Setting the Address (VHM addr.)

Every device in the communication network must have a unique address. The VHM address is set in the
configuration dialog with the key 'VHM addr.'. The key is accessible only to a user with privileged access
[➙ 40].
Field Meaning Factory settings
IP Unique IP address in the scales controller subnetwork 192.168.240.21

(VCU).
The last group of digits in the IP address is also the unit's
address when communicating through the local bus.
Subnet Subnetwork template 255.255.255.0
Gateway IP address of the gateway to other networks 0.0.0.0
Tab. 13 : Fields for setting the address
4.3.6.3 Setting the Display

The 'Display' key opens the dialog for adjusting the display settings. The key is accessible only to a user
with privileged access [➙ 40].
Button Parameter Function Factory settings
Inactivity Inactivity ti- Length of time from the most recent activity until the bright- 20 min
timeout meout ness of the screen is automatically reduced. The screen will
return to normal brightness once the screen is touched. This
contact will not be interpreted as communication with the
scales.
Logout timeout Length of time from the most recent entry before a privileged 600 min
user is automatically logged out of the system security rea-
sons.
Working Display brightness during operation. At full brightness the display has a life expectancy of approximately
brightness 5 years. This expectancy can be increased to over 10 years by dimming the brightness a little.
Sleeping Brightness after a longer period with no activity.
brightness Note: If the display touchscreen is not to be used and the display is intended to be permanently fully
legible, the sleeping brightness can be set to the same level as the operating brightness.
Save Save the changes made. Changes are discarded without prompting if they were not saved beforehand.
Tab. 14 : Parameters for the display

Operation
4.3.6.4 Selection and Display of the Scales (Feeder)

(Feeder)
The display shows the scales available in the network. Scales are selected by means of its corresponding
key.
Button Function
Buttons beside Select the scales

an entry
Configure Configure the scales by entering:
Scales name
IP address
Subnetwork mask
Gateway
Note: This functions allows the IP address of a VCU to be set without using EasyServe. The
addresses of the VHM and the VCU are generally in the same subnetwork.
The 'Back' key will discard the changes.
The 'Save' key will save the changes.
Tab. 15 : Keys in the list of scales
4.3.6.5 Set the Homepage (Config)

As with a web browser, the homepage of the scales' user interface must also be specified. The key is ac-
cessible only to a user with privileged access [➙ 40].
Parameter / Key Function Factory settings
URL of homepage Address of the scales' web server homepage. A web http://192.168.240.1/hmi/start.html
browser on a PC can open the scales' user interface
at this address.
Under normal circumstances the scales are selected
on the 'Feeder' page. The start address is entered
automatically.
Communication will be automatically established to
the last address entered here once power resumes
after a power failure.
Start timeout Length of time between command to connect to a 7s
scales and the start of connection. This period can
be used to access the operating panel configuration
[➙ 37].
Save Save the settings. The entries are discarded if they
are not saved before the page is left.
Tab. 16 : Setting startup routine
4.3.6.6 Configuring
Configuring the Communication Path (Com)
Select the medium of communication here. The key is accessible only to a user with privileged access
[➙ 40].

Operation
Selection Function Remarks Factory settings
Ethernet Communication via Ethernet interface and The complete IP address of the x
the RJ45 plug. scales will be used when selected.
Bluetooth Communication via Bluetooth will be auto- All Bluetooth adapters within range
matically activated if a Bluetooth adapter is are listed in the 'Feeder' selection.
connected (wireless interface for portable Each scales must be equipped with its
devices). own adapter. Scales connected to
each other via Ethernet can commu-
nicate via Bluetooth only to the scales
to whose adapter the operating panel
has been connected.
A subordinate IP connection is estab-
lished in a separate subnetwork.
Therefore the IP subnetwork address
displayed in the VHM differs from the
scales' subnetwork address stored in
the parameter.
RS485 Communication via serial interface The last part of the scales' IP address
(1 ... 254) will be used when selected.
The IP address must therefore also
be set when using an interface of this
kind.
Tab. 17 : Alternatives
The select scales page will automatically open if the communication path is changed. The scales stores its
addresses in a parameter.
Details on possible alternative cablings of operating panel and scales are described in the system manual
BV-H2406.
4.3.6.7 Calibrating the Touchscreen

The touch sensitive screen is calibrated in relation to the display using this function. Calibration is required if
a key is unintentionally depressed when a neighboring key is touched or if a function can only be activated
by pressing the area next to the key on the screen.
Once the 'Start' button has been pressed, you will be prompted to touch points on the screen marked with a
cross. The calibration will be automatically stored once this has been successfully performed. The proce-
dure is automatically repeated if faults are identified during the adjustment.
The adjustment is always called up during the start procedure once the software is loaded into the VHM.
Note:
A touch pin or other object with a small contact area such as a finger or glove can be used. The adjustment
should be made with an object that is as similar as possible to the one that will be used in subsequent nor-
mal operation.
4.3.6.8 Login for Privileged Users (Login/Logout)

Some of the operating panel settings are protected against unauthorized access. Access is available only to
users with access privileges.
The keyword is: 7353
The keyword cannot be changed and is independent of the scales' keyword settings.

Operation
4.3.6.9 Connecting to a Scales (Con.Scale)

The operating panel will begin working normally once communication has been established to a scales. The
operating panel will wait [➙ 39] for a period after the 'Con.Scale' key is pressed and then try via the confi-
gured path [➙ 39] to connect to the scales that was selected on the 'Feeder' [➙ 39] page. The attempt will
be repeated several times. If the scales cannot be reached at that address the program will branch to the
'Feeder' scales selection.
The connection attempt can be interrupted by pressing another key and the configuration dialog for the op-
erating panel can be called up again. The routine is also called up if the system is restarted after a power
failure.
4.3.6.10 Cleaning the Screen and Information

The key 'Help' opens a window with information on the software version and with basic scales controller
settings 'Feeder' (VCU) and operating panel settings 'VHM'. These data and if possible the Easy-
Serve parameter file should be kept at hand if making an inquiry to Schenck Process.
The serial number of the controller VCU also appears in the EasyServe scanner. It can be used to identify
the VCU in the network if erroneous, non-unique IP addresses have been assigned.
'FCB Variant:' is the designation for the loaded variant of the function block links [➙ 295]. 'FCB Variant:'
'Empty' refers to the state with no expanded functions, which is the state described in this manual.
The 'Clean:' key switches the operating panel into cleaning mode for a short time. A counter will appear on
the display and count down the time remaining until the panel returns to normal. Touch entry is deactivated,
allowing the screen to be touched for cleaning without inadvertently giving a command.
4.4 Calibration programs

DISOCONT Tersus simplifies start-up with the aid of calibration functions. They store their findings in para-
meters, thus adapting the control to the application. All parameters that arise from the design of the scales
and the electrical connections must be set before the calibration functions are called up.
As a rule the calibration functions are accessible only to privileged users. They first have to register in the
system (Operating Fields and Function Calls). The calibration functions can be called up both on the VHM
operating panel (Operating the calibration functions [➙ 37]) and via EasyServe. They can also be operated
via the fieldbus connection, in as far as one has been activated (P20.01).
4.4.1 Determining the duration of a belt circuit

The LB: Pulses/Belt calibration program serves the purpose of ascertaining the number of impulses of the
speed sensor on the belt's drive motor for the duration of one belt circuit. The duration ascertained deter-
mines the transit time of the following calibration programs:
>0< Zero Set
TW: Tare
CW: Span Calibration
This is why LB: Pulses/Belt has to be called up as the first program at initial calibration. Furthermore, it
should be called up in the following cases:
▪
A new belt was installed.
▪
The belt tension was substantially changed.
▪
The P05.01 Pulses per length or P03.02 Nominal Speed parameters were modified.
When a belt sensor is installed (refer to the P18.01 Belt Sensor Active parameters), the duration is automat-
ically determined after the belt mark runs past the sensor twice. If a belt sensor is not used or if the belt is
designed without a mark , the transit time should be measured and entered in P10.03 Belt Circuit Time.

Operation
NOTE: Even if there is a belt sensor, the time for one belt circuit should be keyed in to ensure that
the display of mean belt velocity supplies a correct value at the end of the calibration pro-
gram.
The details and course of the calibration program:
Condition No bulk solids on the belt

Belt drive with constant velocity switched on
To call up select and start the LB: Pulses/Belt calibration program
Program runtime Two belt marks running through or their duration in P10.03 Belt Circuit Time
Display while running The remaining period in the program if no belt sensor is installed
The number of impulses run in
Display when finished The number of impulses
Mean belt velocity
Parameters changed when results are P10.07 Belt Circuit No.
accepted
Potential events and messages
Tab. 18 : The details and course
4.4.2 Tare the beltweigher

The TW: Tare calibration program ascertains the tare weight on the load cell over one belt circuit and stores
the results in a parameter. After taring, the mean of the belt load over one belt circuit is equal to zero. Any
corrections put into P10.06 Tare Correction are not taken into account during taring.
The results are indicated in percent of the Qo rated belt load:
Qo = P03.01/ P03.02
Condition ▪ Volumetric operation is preselected

▪ No bulk solids on the belt
▪ Any prefeeder involved has to be shut off (the prefeeder OFF function)
▪ The scale is turned on
▪ Batching operation may not be active
To call up select and start the TW: Tare calibration program
Program runtime One or several total belt circuits
The program is finished when the number of impulses from the impulse transmitter given in
P10.07 Belt Circuit No. has arrived.
Display while running The program's remaining period in percent of P10.07 Belt Circuit No.
Tare in percent of Qo rated belt load

Operation
Display when finished Deviation in tare of the value set in P10.05

Tare in percent of Qo rated belt load
Parameters changed P10.05 Basic Tare
when results are accepted P10.06 is set to zero
If there is a second weighbridge: P28.15 Tare (2nd Bridge)
Potential events and Start !:
messages Scales are off. The belt has to be running for taring.
Aborted !:
The program was canceled without any changes in parameters.
Volumetric !:
The scale is in gravimetric mode, while the program can only run in volumetric mode.
Batch Active !:
The program cannot run in batching operation. Batching operation is finished.
NOTE: Taring by belt sections (BIC) is set to zero. If a second weighbridge is installed, it also cal-
culates and sets the tare for this bridge wherever necessary.
4.4.3 Checking the continuous

continuous scale with a calibration weight
The CW: Span Calibration calibration program ascertains the measured quantity of bulk solids correspond-
ing to the belt load caused by the calibration weight and the belt progress. The program is only used for
control purposes, not for calibrating.
The calibration weight should be 30 % ... 100 % of the Qo rated load on the weighbridge.
Qo = P05.04 * P03.01 / P03.02
The calibration weight should be placed right on the axis of the effect the bulk solids have, i.e. in the middle
of the weighing station.
NOTE: The effective calibration weight is equal to the value to be ascertained on a separate static
scale on weighing modules with parallel leaf-spring guides. In other cases, you can find the
effective calibration weight in the data sheet. The inclination of the conveyor belt has no
effect on the effective calibration weight.

▪ The effective calibration weight has to be placed as per the P10.04
▪ Taring [➙ 42] or zero setting [➙ 44] was carried out
To call up select and start the CW: Span Calibration calibration program
Display while running The program's remaining period in percent of P10.07 Belt Circuit No.
The ratio of the targeted weight and measured weight value (on an ideal scale = 1.0000)

Operation
Display when finished The display of the simulated quantity of bulk solids
The ratio of E from the targeted weight and measured weight value (on an ideal scale =
1.0000).
Parameters changed None
when results are accepted
Potential events and Aborted !:
messages The program was canceled without any changes in parameters.
Volumetric !:
Batch Active !:
It can be manually corrected depending upon the results and boundary conditions:
Results (ratio) E Error Task
E = 0.99 ... 1.01 <1% The scales are in good working order and no further actions are necessary.
E = 0.95 ... 1.05 <5% Key in the value E for the P10.02 parameter if the findings of a material inspection
have not yet been taken into account with the P10.02 parameter.
E < 0.95 or >5% Deviations of several percent indicate that technical data was incorrectly entered (for
E > 1.05 instance, a belt inclination or lever arms are not precisely known) or indicate me-
chanical faults (such as alignment or tension).
Tab. 21 : Handling the results of control
NOTE: P10.02 is not taken into account in the control or it is set to 1. This is why the control pro-
gram displays the same error quotient E after the correction.
Potential reasons for the measured value deviating greatly from the actual value
▪
Mechanical tension in the weighbridge
▪
Shunt forces due to bulk solid particles between the weighed and solid component
▪
Imprecise alignment
▪
Disturbances to the load cell cable
NOTE: We recommend further tests with different weights if you suspect one of these causes to be
the fault. Non-linear deviations indicate the aforementioned reasons while linear deviations
indicate incorrect data.
4.4.4 Continuous scale zero setting

The >0< Zero Set calibration program ascertains the remaining load with an empty belt after subtracting the
tare in P10.05. This is why it shows the deviation from earlier taring. Most faults of a scale reveal them-
selves in a deviation to tare after an operating period. The results are indicated in percent of the Qo rated
belt load:
Qo = P03.01/ P03.02

Operation

To call up select and start the >0< Zero Set calibration program
Display while running The remaining period of the programs in percent of P10.07 Belt Circuit No.
Deviation in tare in percent of the rated belt load Qo
Display when finished Deviation taking the tare correction already included in P10.06 in percent of Qo
Deviation in tare from the value in P10.05 in percent of the rated belt load Qo
Parameters changed P10.06
messages The program was canceled without any changes in parameters.
Volumetric !:
Batch Active !:
Value too big:
The deviation ascertained is too large. which means that the software cannot correct it.
The mechanical and electrical system of the scale should be checked.
NOTE: The zero setting function can also be started via digital input (refer to P13.23). It is started
with a positive flank on the signal and it automatically carries over the results when it is
within the allowed boundary (5 % of the rated belt load Qo). Otherwise, the results are
automatically rejected.
The successful completion of the zero setting program can be monitored with the digital output (P14.16).
The digital output is made inactive when starting the zero setting program. After completing the control, the
contact is set active again if the results are within the allowed boundaries.
4.4.5 Taring the bin weigher

The function is only available if the bin weigher is activated through P26.01.
The TB: Tare calibration program records the load on the weighing equipment for the empty bin. In opera-
tion with bulk solids, this value is subtracted from the measured bin weight. When the bin is empty, the dis-
play of the weight value fluctuates around zero after taring.
Condition The bin should be empty.

The bin filling may not be activated.
To call up select and start the TB: Tare calibration program
Program runtime 10 s
display when running 'TB: active': the program's remaining time
The current tare load in percent of P26.04

Operation
Display when finished Deviation in percent of the rated load cell load as per P26.04
Tare in percent of the rated load cell load as per P26.04
Parameters changed New value of tare in P26.25
Potential events and 'Aborted ! :

messages The program was terminated. The parameters remain unchanged.
4.4.6 Bin weight control

The function is only available if the bin weigher is activated through P26.01.
The CB: Weight Check calibration program is used for checking and adjusting the weighing equipment with
the aid of a known calibration weight. The mass of the calibration weight used should be keyed into P26.25
before program start.
This program can identify shunt forces, i.e. links between the weighed and static components that absorb
forces that cannot be captured with the load cell.
Condition The bin may not be filled or emptied.

The mass of the calibration weight was entered into P26.25.
To call up select and start the CB: Weight Check calibration program
Program runtime
display when running The first thing is calculating the bin's current weight.
The display of the remaining period and current weight.
Then the Checkweight Up/Down prompt and value of the calibration weight appear.
Now apply or remove the calibration weight and press the <<Next>> button.
The display of the remaining period and the difference to the first weight value. The value
shown is negative if the calibration weight has been removed.
The second weight value is now taken and checked for plausibility.
Display when finished Set/Act shows the quotient from the change in mass entered in P26.25 and the measured
change in mass.
Parameters changed Enter in P26.24
when results are accepted P26.24new = P26.24old * 'Set/Act'

messages The program was finished. although the parameters remain unchanged.
4.4.7 Optimizing Hopper Fill Level Regulation

This function is only available when weight calculation has been activated for the bin via P26.01 and the
level regulator has been activated in P27.01.
The BIN: Controller Optimization bin regulator optimization program automatically calculates the KP and TN
control parameters (P27.08 and P27.09) of the bin level regulator from the conveying element constant of
the filling or emptying element in P27.06 and the dead time (transit time) from the conveying element to the
bin in P27.07.

Operation
Condition The conveying element constant of the filling or emptying element entered into P27.06.
The dead time (transit time) from the conveying element to the bin into P27.07
To call up select and start the BIN: Controller Optimization calibration program
Program runtime 10 s
display when running CO: P-Component = recently calculated parameters P27.08
I-Component TN = recently calculated parameters P27.09
Parameters changed Recently calculated values are entered into P27.08 and P27.09. The parameters are au-
when results are accepted tomatically accepted without taking further action.
messages The program was finished. although the parameters remain unchanged.
Feeder Constant:
The P27.06 parameter has an incorrect value (P27.06 = 0.0 (kg/h)/mA). The program is
canceled.
NOTE: The calculated values of the parameters in P27.08 and P27.09 can be further adapted ma-
nually. The optimization program does not have any impact on the rest of the parameters of
the bin level controller (such as D portion, bypass and lift, etc.).
4.4.8 Automatic control measurement unit (KME)

Measuring units for mass flows are always subject to fault impacts that change over time. To correct them,
the quantity Mk calculated by continuous measurement over the testing period T0 is compared with the
quantity Mr actually conveyed during this period. Calculating the actual quantity with a remote static scale
makes the procedure very time-consuming. In addition, the flow of bulk solids needed for continuous pro-
duction is interrupted in the process for control.
However, this test can be carried out automatically with the control measurement unit so that continuous
measurement can be automatically corrected.
The requirement for the functioning of this process is that measuring the actual quantity is encumbered with
a substantially smaller fault than continuous measurement. The errors in determining the actual quantity
consist of error E1 (when determining an initial weight value) and error E2 (when determining the second
weight value). In the worst-case scenario, the total error ET (when determining the actual quantity) may be
calculated as:
|ET| = |E1| + |E2|
The relative error er (when determining the actual test mass Mr) can be estimated at:
er = |ET| / Mr
This error er should not be any more than 1/5 of the admissible error of continuous measurement. This
means that a minimum control quantity can be calculated if error ET is known. The random share of errors
E1 and E2 can be eliminated by carrying out the control several times while only partially correcting the fault.
The error of the continuous scale may contain constant shares, i.e. the tare error and errors dependant
upon the flow rate (the range errors). When correcting the continuous scale, the user has to decide what
type of error it is. It is necessary to distinguish the individual types of errors when operating at different flow
rates. Correct classification is less important if continuous measurement is carried out at approximately
equal flow rates. After all, it is not possible to give a general recommendation for classifying errors due to
the different bulk solids and local conditions.
DISOCONT Tersus is adapted to the technical design in a plant via P29.01 Type of Check System (select-
ing the control strategy).

Operation
You can find the parameters for adjusting the control measurement unit in the Check System block of para-
meters. There are further explanations on the process of control in the appendix.
4.4.8.1 Types of control measurement
4.4.8.1.1 Single Unit Control Type

The bulk solids fed by the continuous feeder are drawn from a bin installed in front of the feeder in the flow
of bulk solids. The transit time for the bulk solids is short between the bin and feeder.
Fig. 12: Single Unit KME Model
Depending upon the design, the bin weight also takes in the weight of the mass flow meter and the mass
within the unit.
4.4.8.1.2 Separated Units Control Type

The bulk solids fed by the continuous feeder are drawn from a bin installed in front of the feeder in the flow
of bulk solids. The transit time for the bulk solids between the bin and feeder is long because additional
transport lines are interposed.

Operation
Fig. 13: Separated Units Control Type
Normally, the bin weight no longer takes in the bulk solids on the transport distance.
4.4.8.1.3 Filling System Control Type

The continually measured flow of bulk solids might be redirected through a shunt from the process into the
control bin where it is collected. The time for transporting the bulk solids between the continuous measuring
unit and bin can be long.
Fig. 14: Filling System KME Type

Operation
4.4.8.1.4 External Control Type

The control measurement is carried out through a separate unit if the bulk solids are withdrawn from one bin
by various different ways and collected by means of several continuous measuring units. We urgently rec-
ommend using the DISOCONT Master for this since the process of correction calls for a tight exchange of
data with the continuous scale.
The separate unit measures the bin weight and distributes the errors calculated over the continuous mea-
surements. The correction parameters of the continuous scales are correspondingly adjusted.
Fig. 15: External KME Type
4.4.8.2 Operating the control measurement (KME)

The control measurement (KME) is a test that is carried out to calculate the error of the continuous scale
based upon the change in the weight of the bulk solids in a bin and automatically correct it wherever de-
sired.
Preconditions:
▪
The P29.01 Type of Check System parameter have to be unequal to NO.
▪
The P29.08 Check Start Tare parameter has to be on OP to be able to start from the operating panel or
EasyServe.
Proceed to start tare correction from the VHM operating panel:
Call up the KME page starting from the main page (HOME).
Testing and additive correction of the zero point are called up with the Check Start Tare button and testing
and multiplicative correction of the measuring unit can be called up by Check Start Span.
After start, control goes through the phases shown in Details and flow chart control measurement (KME)
[➙ 284]. These phases are shown in the operating panel.
The following process quantities are displayed during the measurement until starting the next measurement:

Operation
The quantity shown Unit Description

Contin. Result Z kg The quantity of bulk solids ascertained by the continuous scale
Check Result F/Z - The quotient of the change of bin weight and the quantity ascertained by the
continuous scale
Relative Tare % The correction ascertained in tare with reference to rated load
Correction
Relative Span % The correction ascertained in calibration of span = the deviation in both mea-
Correction surements with reference to the measured value (even after completing the
control)
Check Belt Length m Only with belt-supported systems: the progress in the conveyor belt during
control
Check Meas. Time s Only with non-belt-supported systems: the duration of the measurement
Check Quantity kg Preselected quantity of bulk solids for the control (P29.13). The parameter
can be changed here directly with the privilege of changing parameters .
Check Circuits - Only with belt-supported systems: preselected belt progress for the control
(parameters)
BIN: Fill Weight kg or t Current bin weight
Note:
If P29.02 Auto Correction = YES, the continuous scale is automatically corrected if the results of control are
within the boundaries defined via P29.32 to P29.35.
If automatic correction was not selected or if the results of control are outside of the specified boundaries,
the Apply function can be used to correct the continuous scale. The Cancel function ends control without
changing continuous scale adjustment. The result is maintained to the next control.
If tare is corrected, the correction is carried out through P10.06 Tare Correction and the results of a zone
correction is calculated into P10.02 Range Correction. The correction is documented in the log files.
You can find more detailed information in the Types of control measurement [➙ 48] section and a flow chart
in the appendix.

Startup
5 Startup
5.1 Mechanical Prerequisites

The mechanical equipment is mounted according the instructions in the installation manual. All of the mea-
suring idlers and three idlers in front of and behind the weighing station are part of the scale's range of influ-
ence. The scale's range of influence is shown in the following figure:
Fig. 16: Weighbridge
F Measuring force R Entire range of influence
WS The width of the weighing station
During assembly, make especially sure that the alignment and impact tolerance of the measuring idlers and
carrying idlers agree in the scale's range of influence. Imprecise alignment would cause a zero point error
depending upon the belt tension. This is why precise alignment is necessary for a precision scale. Non-
spheric idler running can cause errors.
Alignment
The following figure shows the points with a triangle where the weigh idler and the relevant carrying idlers
have to be aligned.
Fig. 17: Belt scale alignment points: A for troughed belts, B for flat belts
The idlers in the scale's range of influence have to be lifted 3 ... 5 mm in relation to the other idlers. They
have to be aligned among one another to a height difference of less than 0.4 mm. They should be aligned at
several points depending upon the idler station equipment as per the figure.
Impact tolerance
The out-of-round error for the idlers (impact tolerance) may be as much as 0.4 mm in the scale's range of
influence. In addition, the idler stations have to be secured against displacement once aligned. Higher-
quality idlers are used especially on weighfeeders in the scale's range of influence.

Startup
Maintenance
All idlers have to be easy to operate. It might be good to replace defective idlers with original quality idlers. If
idlers are remounted or overhauled they should be positioned at their previous locations. This is why the
idlers and idler stations should be marked before maintenance.
After maintenance, alignment has to be checked and the scale retared.
5.2 Assembling the Electrical Components

The subassemblies of a DISOCONT Tersus system come pre-assembled on delivery, e.g. attached to the
scales or installed in a control cabinet.
NOTE: If you have purchased components, please read the DISOCONT Tersus BV-H2406 system
manual where you will find information on the installation dimensions and architecture of
the DISOCONT Tersus system.
5.3 Electrical Connections

The electrical connection for the DISOCONT Tersus is shown - depending on the scope of supply - in the
model circuit diagram or in the system-specific circuit diagrams.
Further information on the electrical properties and interfaces of the subassemblies can be found in the
DISOCONT Tersus system manual BV-H2406.
5.4 Entering Basic parameters

A data sheet is a part of the scale's scope of supply containing the most important data and parameters
belonging to it. Other parameters (for instance, the belt inclination against the horizon) have to be deter-
mined locally and keyed into the appropriate parameters. Most parameters have default settings and only
have to be changed for operation in special cases.
Machine data Parameters Name
The total of the rated load cell loads P05.03 LC Rated Capacity
The transmission parameter for the load cells P05.02 LC Characteristic Value
The lever ratio of force application into load cells wherever P05.05 Lever Ratio
available
Nominal flow rate Io P03.01 Nominal Flow Rate
The characteristic value of the velocity sensor P05.01 Pulses per length
Effective Weighing Platform Length P05.04 Effective Platform Length
The conveyor belt inclination provided it is inclined against the P05.06 Angle
horizon
Belt circuit time P10.03 Belt Circuit Time
Rated Velocity P03.02 Nominal Speed
Tab. 26 : Basic parameters
Refer to the Parameters [➙ 65] Chapter for the setting parameters.
5.5 Test that the Control is Functioning

Control of the mechanical components, the drives and the interconnection with the system controller can
best be checked with no bulk material in simulation [➙ 36] mode.

Startup
5.6 Scale calibration

Before starting calibration, it should be checked to see whether all transit restraints have been removed or
released in the area of the weighbridge.
For calibration, call up at least the two programs Determining the duration of a belt circuit [➙ 41] and Tare
the beltweigher [➙ 42] in precisely this order. Generally, the scale is sufficiently well adjusted after accept-
ing the findings of calibration.
Many of the potential faults make themselves apparent in major deviations from the results of consecutive
taring.
If so, calibration should be checked in the following fashion:
Checking the scale with calibration weights [➙ 59]
Belt Velocity Check [➙ 59]
5.7 The Setting Regulation

The external flow rate controller (generally a frequency converter) and the internal conveyor flow rate con-
troller have to be set to start up regulation.
5.7.1 Adjusting the external flow rate controller

You can find out how to connect and adjust the external controller (frequency converter) in
the separate controller manual. Settings may vary depending upon the model.
The controller parameters should be entered in accordance with the motor's rated data. The motor is gener-
ally operated on the 50 Hz supply network at an approximate rated speed of 1,450/min and at a frequency
of as much as 110 Hz, meaning a speed of as much as 3,000/min. The maximum permissible speed may be
lower for motors used for applications in the explosive zone. You can find precise data in the motor manual.
Wherever provided for in this application, the temperature sensor in the motor has to be connected to the
measurement processing system.
Since the motors are operated in feed units in a wide adjustment range, it is especially important to focus on
its behaviour at low speeds. The setting suggested by the controller is often not optimum due to the motor's
reduced internal cooling. This is why the motor's temperature should be observed at a lower speed of ap-
proximately 20/min over a longer operating period. It might be necessary to reduce the voltage given by the
controller for low speeds. On the other hand, it is not advisable to reduce it too much since there might oth-
erwise be start-up problems when operating with bulk solids.
Slip compensation is generally not necessary in frequency converters since the feed controller provides
sufficient superset speed regulation. However, if it is activated, settings at a level of compensation lower
than provided for in the converter's standard produce a more stable run.
The ramp to the drive run up is set to the fastest run-up while the ramp for motor run-down is set to approx-
imately 2 s.
The feeder is engineered to ensure that the belt's rated velocity is set clearly below the motor's maximum
speed to maintain sufficient reserve for correcting deviations in rated conditions, especially in case of a low
belt load. This is why the motor speed will be approximately 70 % of maximum speed at rated velocity. Logi-
cally, the controller magnitude on the controller will also be approximately 70 % of its maximum value in this
working point. This setting is generally made by keying in the maximum frequency on the controller.
We recommend not applying any rise in the controller magnitude. Therefore, a setting of 0 ... 20 mA (instead
of 4 ... 20 mA) should be preferred with current input.

Startup
NOTE: The behaviour of the external controller can generally be checked in a controller operating
mode with a fixed speed specification without the involvement of the electronic feeding
mechanism.
5.7.2 Adjusting the feeding controller

When the external controller (frequency converter) is set and checked, the internal feed controller is com-
pared with the external wiring.
Adjusting the rise in controller magnitude

The minimum controller magnitude in the DISOCONT Tersus is adjusted to the external controller via
P11.13 Controller Magnitude Offset. This is why the feeder is turned on at zero controller magnitude in vo-
lumetric operation and without bulk solids. Coming from high values, P11.13 is set just so that the drive
does not rotate any more. P11.11 Lower Limit is set slightly below this value.
Now the setting is already sufficient in most feeders when using the default setting of the other controller
parameters. Wherever necessary, it can be streamlined with the parameters in the Rate controller group.
Setting the controller magnitude for rated conditions

When the universal controller is used (P11.01 = UNIVERS), it is also necessary to set other parameters in
accordance with the application. The appendix contains details on adjusting in this special case. It is first of
all necessary to calibrate the scale for these settings. Refer to Scale calibration [➙ 55].
In particular, the bypass for the controller magnitude is set via P11.21 Bypass in volumetric operation so that
the set flow rate is approximately adjusted. We recommend operating the feeder at a flow rate setpoint rang-
ing between 50 % and 100 % of the nominal flow rate.
5.8 Setting belt run monitoring

DISOCONT Tersus allows monitoring belt run to the left and right as well as monitoring belt slip. These
functions are only available if a belt is used with an integrated mark. A sensor has to be integrated in the
belt for scanning this mark in the mechanism that should be connected according to the circuit diagrams.
The parameters affecting monitoring are in the group of Belt Monitoring parameters. The following figure
shows its principle.

Startup
Fig. 18: Belt run measurement and belt slip measurement
N Normal operation
L The belt skew to the left R The belt skew to the right
x The belt length covered T The belt mark and the duration of the belt mark at
a medium belt position
V The sensor for capturing the mark in the belt Sig The course of the signal on the sensor
W The width of the belt mark at right angles to Le The length of the belt mark in the direction of belt
the direction of belt travel travel
T_rev The duration of a belt circuit T-t1 Reduced duration from belt run to the left
T+t2 Extended duration from belt run to the left T_rev+t3 Extended duration of a belt circuit due to belt slip
SLP Belt slip between the velocity measurement

and belt
The procedure for activating monitoring

NOTE: The belt should be aligned for manual adjustment in the centre of the pulleys.

Startup
Activity Relevant parameters
Setting the sensor width as per the data sheet P18.05

Setting the sensor length as per the data sheet P18.04
Checking the input channel for the sensor signal as per the circuit diagram P18.02
Activating the measurement P18.01
Setting offset to zero P18.06
Turning on the belt drive
Tab. 27 : Activating belt run monitoring
DISOCONT Tersus calculates the belt position from at least two full belt circuits and shows them on the
operating panel and in EasyServe as a Belt Drift service value. The measured drift is given in cm from the
mid-position of the belt mark relative to the sensor.
It can be roughly calibrated mechanically by displacing the sensor. Then, it can be precisely calibrated via
P18.06.
Afterwards, the event classes should be adjusted or checked for the events of belt drift and belt skew in the
P18.08 and P18.10 parameters.
CAUTION: Belt skew can cause permanent damage to the belt.
5.9 Activating belt influence compensation (BIC)

Automatic belt influence compensation (BIC) monitors and corrects the belt influence by taring per belt sec-
tions. Compensation uses the mark in the belt and belt travel sensor. Therefore, before activating BIC, belt
run monitoring [➙ 56] should be set and activated, which is why compensation can only be used on belts
with a built-in mark.
Belt influence compensation calculates the influence the conveyor belt has on recording the weight of the
bulk solids over several belt circuits and it compensates for this influence. This learning process requires
approximately 10 complete belt circuits with an empty belt or regular feeding.
Compensation can be activated via P18.03 after adjusting travel monitoring in the Belt Monitoring group of
parameters.
5.10 Activating measurement and feeding with reference to the discharge

point (VAP)
Since the weight of the bulk solids is determined before the discharge point, the product of loading and the
current velocity does not equal the flow rate at the discharge of the feeder scale. This is why DISOCONT
Tersus has a memory that delays the measuring signal until the measured bulk solids arrive at the dis-
charge. The delayed value is used for regulating the belt velocity and calculating the flow rate and total.
In order to activate, the ratio of the route from the center of the weighbridge to the bulk solids discharge
should be entered into P17.02 in percent at the ratio of the entire belt length. Then, this function can be acti-
vated via P17.01.

Startup
5.11 Setting Control
5.11.1 Function Check

Step Activity
1 Turning on the feeder

2 Analyze any event messages that may appear and rectify the fault.
3 Call up the service values on the VHM or EasyServe operating panel:
Tachometer 1 The output frequency of the impulse transmitter has to be less than 2,900 Hz. The value
should approximately correspond to the data given in the data sheet in the rated operat-
ing point (rated performance and rated load). The sensor in the velocity sensor should
be checked (Belt Velocity Check [➙ 59]) if the frequency fluctuates substantially at a
constant belt velocity (controller magnitude).
Loadcell This value is a measure of the load on the load cell.
The non-standardized output value of the load cell amplifier may not be greater than
3.5 mV/V even if the weighbridge has a rated belt load. However, it has to change if the
weighbridge is loaded (for instance, with the calibration weight). If the value is too large,
the load cell is overloaded. If the value is negative, the load cell is incorrectly connected.
Utilization LC Loading the load cell in percent with reference to the total rated load cell loads. Howev-
er, the value has to change if the weighbridge is loaded (for instance, with the calibration
weight). If the value is too large, the load cell is overloaded. If the value is negative, the
load cell is incorrectly connected. The value should not be greater than 100 % at rated
bridge loads.
Tab. 28 : The control procedure
NOTE: If Loadcell or Utilization LC is unusual, the load cell input can be checked [➙ 300] with a
test plug.
5.11.2 Checking the scale with calibration weights

It might make sense to check it with calibration weights to make out the following faults:
▪
A fault in the cabling or mechanical equipment
▪
Unreliable data for the mechanical equipment such as the lever ratio or belt inclination
Preconditions:
▪
Precisely identified and available calibration weight
▪
The calibration weight ranges between 30 % and 100 % of the rated load
Refer to Checking the continuous scale with a calibration weight [➙ 43] for carrying out controlling.
5.11.3 Belt Velocity Check

The velocity sensor's frequency generator can be driven in a number of different ways:
▪
with a frictional wheel on the lower carrying run of the conveyor belt, in particular with belt scales
▪
with the shaft of the drive motor, in particular with weighfeeders

Startup
In the former case, the value of the P05.01 Pulses per length parameter entered is dependant upon the
precise diameter of the frictional wheel; in the second case, the value is dependant upon the gear and loop-
ing factor of the conveyor belt on the drive pulley. So the velocity measurement accuracy should be
checked.
The procedure when checking belt velocity

1. Operate the belt at constant velocity and with weighfeeders in volumetric operation with a solid setpoint.
2. Use the stopwatch and tape measure to establish the velocity Vg of the conveyor belt. To increase accu-
racy, it is advisable to make several measurements and calculate the mean.
3. Read the velocity Va on DISOCONT Tersus (wherever feasible over the same period of time).
4. Calculate and enter a new characteristic value if there are deviations |Vg/Va| > 0.001:
P05.01 (new) = P05.01 (old) * Va/Vg
NOTE: It is also possible to apply this process if the characteristic value is not known from the data
sheet. In this case, it is advisable to start off by obtaining a rough setting based upon the
default setting and then do fine adjustment following the principle described above.
Major deviations between Vg and Va indicate a faulty velocity measurement. In that case, check the velocity
sensor.
NOTE: The feeder's function can be checked with the display in EasyServe or the LED in the VCU
20100. In addition, you can use an ammeter to check the current i in the circuit of the sen-
sor. This should produce the following measured values:
Zahn recorded the sensor: i = 0.1 ... 1.65 mA
Zahn did not record the sensor: i = 1.65 ... 8 mA
The mechanism should be slowly rotated by hand.
5.12 Check with bulk solids

Each test or calibration with calibration weights can only approximate the actual operating conditions. A
highly accurate continuous measurement can only be achieved by making several measurements with bulk
material and a subsequent correction. It is corrected with Range Correction P10.02. The following figure
shows an example of the arrangement for checking belt-based continuous throughput metering.
Fig. 19: Arrangement for verification with bulk material
The following items must be observed:

1. The route from the continuous measuring point to the collecting point for the material has to be clean.
2. If there are any diverters they may not convey any material.
3. If there are any feed screws or air slides between the continuous measuring point and the collecting
point, material should be conveyed for approximately ½ hour before making a check. This will allow the
usual material build-ups to form on the conveying elements.
4. Dedusting should be set to a minimum.

Startup
5. The bins or vehicles in which the material is transported onto a (legal-for-trade) commercial scale must
be cleaned and re-weighed (tared) before each filling. The commercial scales must be sufficiently accu-
rate to measure the MW quantity.
The new value P10.02new is calculated as follows from the prior value P10.02old from the MA counter pro-
gression of continuous measurement and the MW mass ascertained on the control scale:
P10.02new = P10.02old * MW / MA
For example:
Old value of P10.02 = 1
A material quantity of MW = 4.9 t is conveyed over a period of 15 minutes. The MA counter progression
read off the device is 5.0 t.
P10.02new = 1 * 4.9/5.0 = 0.98
The calculated value should be entered into P10.02.
5.13 Calibrating bin weighing

weighing
The prerequisite for precision measurement of the quantity of bulk solids in a bin is installing the bin free of
shunt forces. The weight of the bin may only be supported on the load cells. The connections should be led
to the bin horizontally and with supple compensators.
Compression forces can cause substantial measuring errors when determining the mass of bulk solids if the
compressive forces attack vertically on the bin. In particular, this danger exists on the input and output of the
bin. The compression forces should be compensated for if it is not possible to avoid variable pressures at
these points. It can be compensated for mechanically or electronically when recording pressure.
The parameters for the bin's load cells should be keyed into P26.02, P26.03 and P26.04. The data apply
correspondingly if a second weighed bin is supposed to be adjusted.
The tare program [➙ 45] should be called up if the bin is empty. The fill level's display should vary by zero
after taking on the findings. As a check, it is advisable to get the bin vibrating for a brief period of time and
then check the measured weight value. The deviation from zero is a measure of the likely measuring error.
The bin weigher is now calibrated when using calibrated load cells.
▪
NOTES If checking zero point stability has given rise to major errors, there are generally also errors
: between the actual and displayed weight for bulk solids.
▪
The proportionality between the actual and displayed weight can be checked with the adjust-
ment program CB: Weight Check and corrected [➙ 46].
▪
The rated value for the bin fill level should be set into P26.09 for theoretical considerations,
the data sheet or an optic check with a full bin.
▪
If the bin fill level is regulated by turning a prefeeder on and off, the P26.12 and P26.13 pa-
rameters should be adjusted for filling control.
▪
Regulation should be streamlined [➙ 46] after keying in the parameters if the fill level is
created with a prefeeder continually controlled in its flow performance.

Maintenance and Recalibration
6 Maintenance and Recalibration

The electronic equipment of the DISOCONT Tersus system is maintenance free. It does not contain any
wear parts under the specified ambient conditions (refer to the BV-H2406 system manual). The MTBF
(Mean Time Between Failures) is longer than 10 years. This section describes possible measures that can
be taken to guarantee accuracy of the measuring system, including for the mechanical components.
Cause Action Remarks
Periodically, e.g. every 3 Turn off bulk solids conveying Most errors in the measuring unit can be identified in
months and tare the measuring unit. changes in tare.
A substantial change in the tare indicates friction in
the measuring unit. It might make sense to check the
unit for unacceptable foreign particles and material
build-up of bulk solids on the belt and idlers in the
area of the weighbridge.
Inspecting the belt The conveyor belt should be checked for damage
and center run.
Check the belt tension and correct it wherever ne-
cessary (refer to the operating instructions for the
mechanical equipment).
If available: check the bin The bin should be set vibrating for a brief period of
weight acquisition. time. The weight values shown before and after
these vibrations provide a measure of shunt forces.
This can also be checked with an empty bin. The
results of taring provide a measure of the bulk solids
remaining in the bin when emptying.
Change of bulk material With weighfeeders: You may need to adjust the rated output and possi-
Adjust the external output bly the fill limits for a bin.
controller
Periodically as per the operating Do the maintenance work The interval may depend on the bulk solids.
instructions of the mechanical listed in the manual.
measuring equipment and other
mechanical parts of the unit
Tab. 29 : Suggested measures

Parameters
7 Parameters
The DISOCONT Tersus is adapted to each application via parameters. No special programing knowledge is
therefore necessary.
Fig. 20: Parameter sets
Parameter set Purpose Activation Preparation and Alteration

Active parameter set Complete parameter set Always active Using EasyServe, the soft-
Regulation of measuring ware the VHM operating
and control functions console or a web server
default settings Complete parameter set Copy into the active para- Cannot be changed
Non-alterable basic set- meter set using EasyServe,
ting the software the VHM oper-
ating console [➙ 36] or a
web server
Backup set Complete parameter set Copy into the active para- Only using EasyServe in
Pre-setting for a group of meter set using EasyServe, expert mode
applications or a setting the software the VHM oper-
stored during commis- ating console [➙ 36] or a
sioning web server
Tab. 30 : Using parameter sets in the DISOCONT Tersus
Note: parameters not required for an application can be faded out or declared 'read only' using EasyServe
in expert mode. EasyServe compiles a list of visible parameters that form an integral part of the system do-
cumentation. They, together with this manual, make up the relevant documentation of the control system for
an application. The parameter list in the operating manual contains all of the parameters, regardless of their
actual use in an application.
In addition to the parameter set stored in the scales, we recommend that after commissioning you keep a
copy of the parameter set in a mass storage medium using EasyServe.
The parameters are arranged into blocks to for clarity. A parameter is uniquely identified by its block and
number within that block in the respective scales software version:
P01.03: block of parameters 1 → Parameter 3

Parameters
Note: Each parameter also has a unique number (ID) with which it can be addressed over the serial inter-
face. This number can be seen as a tooltip in EasyServe when passing over the parameter and can be out-
put in the parameter printout.
Gaps can appear between block numbers and parameters within the blocks.
In rare cases, the number of a parameter may change.
7.1 Abbreviations
Source Description
FB Fieldbus
OP Operating panel
DI Digital Input
DO Digital Output
AI Analog Inputs
AO Analog Outputs
LS Logical signal for using internally available signals
Event Event. The reaction to an event can be configured.
W1 Warning 1 (requires acknowledgement)
W2 Warning 2 (does not require acknowledgement)
ALARM Alarm (requires acknowledgement)
IGNORE Ignore: do not show any event message but switch the corresponding contact outputs
LC Load cell
I Flow rate
v Belt velocity
VCU VCU 20100 system unit of DISOCONT Tersus. Refer to the BV-H2406 manual for details.
VHM DISOCONT Tersus operating panel. Refer to the BV-H2406 manual for details.
VMO Machine operating console for service work. Refer to the BV-H2488 manual for details.
Tab. 31 : Abbreviations frequently used in parameters
7.2 Configuring the Interfaces

The internal software signals and signals sent externally through the interfaces are linked by means of pa-
rameters. The parameters governing the link are assigned to the logic signals and describe the origin or the
target of a signal.
The linking takes place in steps across several sections.

Parameters
Step Task
1. Select the source, such as DI, DO, ..., ...

n/a means not assigned; i.e., the function does not have any direct interaction with its surround-
ings.
2. Selection of the control unit, such as VCUx or VMOx, ...
It only shows the control units preselected in the Hardware Modules block of parameters.
As many 3 VCU and 2 VMO can be assigned to one scale. Address switches are used to diffe-
rentiate between the units. Details on setting the address can be found in the system manual BV-
H2406.
3. Select the channel number on the control unit, e.g. DI 1 ...
4. Select for the active signal the external signal level LOW or HIGH.
Tab. 32 : Step-by-step specification of signal links
The source parameter defines whether a more precise signal path setting is also necessary. The linking
parameters only offer technically meaningful interfaces.
Source Unit Channel Level Purpose
DI VCU1-VCU3 DI1-DI7 High, Low Binary input signals

VMO1-VMO2
FB
DO VCU1-VCU3 DO1-DO8 High, Low Binary output signals
VMO1-VMO2 DO1-DO5
AI VCU1-VCU3 AI1-AI2 Analog interface
VMO1-VMO2 AI1-AI3
AO VCU1-VCU3 AO1-AO4 Analog interface
VMO1-VMO2 AO1-AO3
LC VCU1-VCU3 LC1-LC2 Load cell interface
LS VCU1-VCU3 DO1-DO8 High, Low Internal by-pass of an output for local
VMO1-VMO2 DO1-DO5 operation
n/a The internal signal is not assigned to any interface. Input signals adopt automatically a
state that does not interfere with the
program flow.
FB Fieldbus, no additional details required Controlled by signals or fieldbus
OP VHM operating panel, no additional details required Controlled by operating panel entries
v Speed, no additional details required Link with an internal signal
Tab. 33 : Signal sources and their descriptions
Source Type of internal signal

Unit Interface assembly for external signal exchange
Channel Designation of the channel in the unit
Level Identifier of the value of the external signal if the internal logical signal accepts the True value. You
can switch here between active high and active low signal levels, i.e. the value of the external sig-
nal can be inverted.
Tab. 34 : Meaning of the columns

Parameters
Setting Binary input NAMUR input Binary output
Low Voltage = 0 V across the Current at the input > 3 mA High resistance, relay contact open
input terminals (sensor not covered)
High Voltage > 18 VDC across Current at the input < 1 mA Low resistance, relay contact closed
the input terminals (sensor covered)
Tab. 35 : The meaning of the Level parameter segment for an internal True signal
Name Unit Source Channel Level

DI: External Event 1 DI VCU1 DI1 Low
Tab. 36 : Example of the assignment of a binary channel to a physical input channel
The DI: External Event 1 signal is connected at input DI1 of VCU1. If the input is open (low), this is inter-
preted as logically True (or 1).
7.3 Configuring Event Messages

The system monitors a range of both of its own operation and the peripherals. The reaction to a recognized
deviation, that is to say an event, is set by parameter. The parameters are used to assign to each event a
class that will determine this reaction.
Event class Description Impact on Feeding Acknowledgement required Color on the VHM
Alarm ALARM Stopping feed operation, Yes Red

The scale will be turned off,
Cannot be switched on
Warning 1 W1 Feeder will continue to run Yes Orange
Warning 2 W2 Feeder will continue to run No Yellow
Only display as long as the event is
active
Ignore IG Feeder will continue to run - -
Tab. 37 : Event classes
NOTE: An external binary output channel is set that may have been assigned to the event regard-
less of the event class.
A recently pending alarm- or warning 1-class event will be shown on the operating panel blinking and in
color. The blinking stops when acknowledged. Acknowledged event messages are cleared from the display
for currently pending events when the event is no longer pending. Each event is stored with a time-stamp in
the internal memory [➙ 34] for later analysis.

Parameters
7.4 Parameter List
7.4.1 Parameter Overview

VWF20170-001 1322
01 - Hardware Modules
Number: Name Default Customer Sys ID
P01.01 [➙ 93] Analog Channel A10 NO 5746
P01.02 [➙ 93] Analog Channel A11 NO 5747
P01.03 [➙ 93] VCU20100-Unit 2 NO 4211
P01.04 [➙ 93] VCU2: Analog Channel A10 NO 5771
P01.06 [➙ 93] Event: Communication A 4216

VCU20100-Unit 2
P01.07 [➙ 93] VCU20100-Unit 3 NO 4212

VCU20100-Unit 3
P01.11 [➙ 93] VHM RS485 Address 1 4221
P01.12 [➙ 93] VMO20100-Unit 1 NO 4222

VMO20100-Unit 1
P01.14 [➙ 93] VMO20100-Unit 2 NO 5834

VMO20100-Unit 2
02 - Dialog Behaviour
P02.01 [➙ 96] Language * DEUTSCH 4224
P02.02 [➙ 96] Units * Metric 4225
P02.03 [➙ 96] Scale Name * DISOCONT Tersus VWF 6238
P02.04 [➙ 96] Access Rights Limitation HMI * NO 4801
P02.05 [➙ 96] Remote IP Address HMI 1 * 192.168.240.21 4798
P02.06 [➙ 96] Event: Communication HMI 1 * IG 4218

Parameters
P02.11 [➙ 96] Event: Communication VHM seri- IG 4804

al *
P02.12 [➙ 96] Password * 10000 4292
P02.13 [➙ 96] 2. Password * 14389 4321
P02.14 [➙ 96] Reset Counter 1 * active 4286
P02.15 [➙ 96] Reset Counter 2 * active 4287
P02.16 [➙ 96] Batch control * active 4283
P02.17 [➙ 96] Switch Grav./Vol. command * active 4595
P02.18 [➙ 96] Switch Keyboard-/Normal Mode * active 4282
P02.19 [➙ 96] Filling control bin weigher * active 4598
P02.20 [➙ 96] Data Log ON/OFF * Password 4309
P02.21 [➙ 96] Exit Scale * active 4600
03 - Feeder Definition
P03.01 [➙ 101] Nominal Flow Rate * 10000 kg/h 4226
P03.02 [➙ 101] Nominal Speed * 0.1 m/s 4227
P03.03 [➙ 101] Flow Rate Units * ------ kg/h 4229
P03.04 [➙ 101] Counter 1 Unit * ------- kg 4230
P03.05 [➙ 101] Pulse Length Total * 0.05 s 4231
P03.06 [➙ 101] Counter 2 Unit * ----.-- t 4232
P03.07 [➙ 101] Counter 3 Unit * -----.- t 4233
P03.08 [➙ 101] DO: Pulse Counter * n/a 4239
P03.09 [➙ 101] Totalizer Increment * 0 kg 4254
04 - Control Sources
P04.01 [➙ 103] Feeder Start * FB 4241
P04.02 [➙ 103] Feedrate Setpoint * FB 4242
P04.03 [➙ 103] Source Run Enable * n/a 4245
P04.04 [➙ 103] Event: Run Disabled * W2 4246
P04.05 [➙ 103] Source Relative Setpoint * n/a 6233
P04.06 [➙ 103] Relativer Setpoint Range * 20 mA 6240

Parameters
P04.07 [➙ 103] Relative Setpoint Offset * 4 mA 6241
P04.08 [➙ 103] Difference Flow Rate * n/a 4248
P04.09 [➙ 103] Difference Flow Rate Range * 20 mA 4249
P04.10 [➙ 103] Difference Flow Rate Offset * 4 mA 4250
P04.11 [➙ 103] Difference Function * NO 4251
05 - Rated Data
P05.01 [➙ 106] Pulses per length * 10000 I/m 4256
P05.02 [➙ 106] LC Characteristic Value * 2 mV/V 4257
P05.03 [➙ 106] LC Rated Capacity * 60 kg 4258
P05.04 [➙ 106] Effective Platform Length * 0.5 m 4259
P05.05 [➙ 106] Lever Ratio * 1 4260
P05.06 [➙ 106] Angle * 0 Grad 4261
P05.07 [➙ 106] Speed Measurement * DI 4262
P05.08 [➙ 106] Source Load Cell * LC 4263
P05.09 [➙ 106] Source Load Cell 2 * n/a 4269
P05.10 [➙ 106] Load Cell 1 analog Input Offset * 4 mA 5837
P05.11 [➙ 106] Load Cell 1 analog Input Range * 20 mA 5838
P05.12 [➙ 106] Load Cell 2 analog Input Offset * 4 mA 5839
P05.13 [➙ 106] Load Cell 2 analog Input Range * 20 mA 5840
06 - Feeder control
P06.01 [➙ 109] Afterflow Totalizer 3s 4274
P06.02 [➙ 109] Zero Drop-Out Active NO 4679
P06.03 [➙ 109] Zero Drop-Out Limit 1%Q 4680
P06.04 [➙ 109] Start-Up Mode Circuits 4276
P06.05 [➙ 109] DO: CleanOut Timer n/a 4277
P06.06 [➙ 109] CleanOut ON Time 0.25 h 4278
P06.07 [➙ 109] CleanOut OFF Time 6h 4279
P06.08 [➙ 109] DI: Chain Motion Monitor n/a 4404
P06.09 [➙ 109] Chain Motion Delay 20 s 4405
P06.10 [➙ 109] Event: Chain Motion Monitor A 4406

Parameters
P06.11 [➙ 109] Auto Zero Active NO 4675
P06.12 [➙ 109] Zeroing Limit 5%Q 4677
P06.13 [➙ 109] Event: Tare Correction W1 4678
P06.14 [➙ 109] Limit Value Difference 0.5 % Q 4729
P06.15 [➙ 109] Mean Limit Value 1%Q 4676
P06.16 [➙ 109] Volum on LC failure NO 4270
P06.17 [➙ 109] Event: Volum. caused by LC-error IG 4271
07 - Feeder Monitoring
P07.01 [➙ 114] Event: Stand-By W2 4289
P07.02 [➙ 114] Stand-By Limit Value 2 % Io 4290
P07.03 [➙ 114] Event: Tachometer Input A 4291
P07.04 [➙ 114] Event: Error LC Input A 4293
P07.05 [➙ 114] Event: LC Input < MIN A 4294
P07.06 [➙ 114] Event: LC Input > MAX A 4295
P07.07 [➙ 114] Event: Setpoint Limited W1 4296
P07.08 [➙ 114] Event: Power Failure A 4297
P07.09 [➙ 114] Event: Memory A 4302
P07.10 [➙ 114] Source Emergency Setpoint n/a 4930
P07.11 [➙ 114] Emergency Setpoint 0 kg/h 4931
P07.12 [➙ 114] Event: Analog Input < Offset A 5418
08 - Filters
P08.01 [➙ 117] Filter: Actual Flow Rate 3s 4328
P08.02 [➙ 117] Filter: Actual Flow Rate analog 3s 4329
P08.03 [➙ 117] Filter: Belt Load 3s 4331
P08.04 [➙ 117] Filter: Belt Speed 3s 4332
09 - Limit Values
P09.01 [➙ 118] Limit: Actual Flow Rate MIN 5 % Io 4337
P09.02 [➙ 118] Event: Actual Flow Rate MIN W1 4338
P09.03 [➙ 118] Limit: Actual Flow Rate MAX 120 % Io 4339

Parameters
P09.04 [➙ 118] Event: Actual Flow Rate MAX W1 4340
P09.05 [➙ 118] Limit: Load MIN 60 % Q 4341
P09.06 [➙ 118] Event: Load MIN W1 4342
P09.07 [➙ 118] Limit: Load MAX 120 % Q 4343
P09.08 [➙ 118] Event: Load MAX W1 4344
P09.09 [➙ 118] Limit: Speed MIN 5%V 4345
P09.10 [➙ 118] Event: Speed MIN W1 4346
P09.11 [➙ 118] Limit: Speed MAX 120 % V 4347
P09.12 [➙ 118] Event: Speed MAX W1 4348
10 - Calibration Data
P10.01 [➙ 120] LC Filter 0.25 s 4334
P10.02 [➙ 120] Range Correction 1 4352
P10.03 [➙ 120] Belt Circuit Time 30 s 4353
P10.04 [➙ 120] Calibration Weight 10 kg 4354
P10.05 [➙ 120] Basic Tare 0 kg/m 4355
P10.06 [➙ 120] Tare Correction 0 kg/m 4356
P10.07 [➙ 120] Belt Circuit No. 1000000 I/B 4357
11 - Rate controller
P11.01 [➙ 121] Optimize Controller STANDARD 4368
P11.02 [➙ 121] P-Component KP 0.04 mA/% 4369
P11.03 [➙ 121] I-Component TN 1s 4370
P11.04 [➙ 121] Filter: Deviation 3s 4333
P11.05 [➙ 121] Time Deviation 20 s 4298
P11.06 [➙ 121] Threshold Deviation 5% 4299
P11.07 [➙ 121] Factor Deviation 1 4320
P11.08 [➙ 121] Deviation abs. max. 100 % 6255
P11.09 [➙ 121] Event: Deviation W1 4300
P11.10 [➙ 121] Event: Controller Limited W1 4301
P11.11 [➙ 121] Lower Limit 0 mA 4371
P11.12 [➙ 121] Upper Limit 20 mA 4372

Parameters
P11.13 [➙ 121] Controller Magnitude Offset 0 mA 4373
P11.14 [➙ 121] Position at STOP 0 4374
P11.15 [➙ 121] Volumetric Start-Up 0 Circuits 4272
P11.16 [➙ 121] Volumetric Clearance 0 Circuits 4273
P11.17 [➙ 121] Setpoint Offset 4 mA 4244
P11.18 [➙ 121] Setpoint Range 20 mA 4243
P11.19 [➙ 121] Store NO 4376
P11.20 [➙ 121] Volumetric Mode Qconst 4377
P11.21 [➙ 121] Bypass 0 mA 4375
P11.22 [➙ 121] Setpoint Filter 1st Ord 0s 4378
P11.23 [➙ 121] Setpoint Filter 2nd Ord 0s 4379
P11.24 [➙ 121] Set/Act Sources I 4381
P11.25 [➙ 121] Adaptation 1 NO 4382
12 - Analog Outputs
P12.01 [➙ 128] AO: Setpoint n/a 4385
P12.02 [➙ 128] Setpoint Offset 4 mA 4386
P12.03 [➙ 128] Setpoint Range 20 mA 4387
P12.04 [➙ 128] AO: Actual Flow Rate n/a 4388
P12.05 [➙ 128] Flow Rate Offset 4 mA 4389
P12.06 [➙ 128] Flow Rate Range 20 mA 4390
P12.07 [➙ 128] AO: Belt Load n/a 4391
P12.08 [➙ 128] Belt Load Offset 4 mA 4392
P12.09 [➙ 128] Belt Load Range 20 mA 4393
P12.10 [➙ 128] AO: Speed n/a 4394
P12.11 [➙ 128] Speed Offset 4 mA 4395
P12.12 [➙ 128] Speed Range 20 mA 4396
P12.13 [➙ 128] AO: Deviation n/a 4397

Parameters
P12.14 [➙ 128] Deviation Offset 4 mA 4398
P12.15 [➙ 128] Deviation Range 20 mA 4399
P12.16 [➙ 128] AO: Motor Speed Control AO 4400
13 - Digital Inputs
P13.01 [➙ 131] Event: External Event 1 A 4417
P13.02 [➙ 131] DI: External Event 1 DI 4418
P13.03 [➙ 131] Event: External Event 2 A 4430
P13.04 [➙ 131] DI: External Event 2 n/a 4431
P13.05 [➙ 131] Event: External Event 3 IG 4730
P13.07 [➙ 131] Event: External Event 4 IG 4732
P13.09 [➙ 131] DI: Acknowledge Events n/a 4419
P13.10 [➙ 131] DI: Local Mode n/a 4420
P13.11 [➙ 131] DI: Volumetric Mode n/a 4421
P13.12 [➙ 131] DI: Volumetric synchron n/a 4941
P13.13 [➙ 131] Event: NAMUR Error VCU1-DI6 A 4409
P13.14 [➙ 131] Event: NAMUR Error VCU1-DI7 A 4410
P13.15 [➙ 131] Event: NAMUR Error VCU2-DI6 IG 4411
P13.19 [➙ 131] DI: Reset Totalizer 1 n/a 5414
P13.20 [➙ 131] DI: Reset Totalizer 2 n/a 5415
P13.21 [➙ 131] Belt Limit Switch n/a 4422
P13.22 [➙ 131] Event: Limit Switch IG 4423

Parameters
P13.23 [➙ 131] DI: Zero Set n/a 4407
P13.24 [➙ 131] Event: NAMUR Error VMO1-DI7 IG 5895
P13.25 [➙ 131] Event: NAMUR Error VMO2-DI7 IG 5896
14 - Digital Outputs
P14.01 [➙ 136] DO: Scale Start DO 4433
P14.02 [➙ 136] DO: Feeder Started n/a 4434
P14.03 [➙ 136] DO: Start Prefeeder DO 4435
P14.04 [➙ 136] DO: ALARM n/a 4436
P14.05 [➙ 136] DO: Deviation n/a 4437
P14.06 [➙ 136] DO: Actual Flow Rate MIN n/a 4438
P14.07 [➙ 136] DO: Actual Flow Rate MAX n/a 4439
P14.08 [➙ 136] DO: Load MIN n/a 4440
P14.09 [➙ 136] DO: Load MAX n/a 4441
P14.10 [➙ 136] DO: Speed MIN n/a 4442
P14.11 [➙ 136] DO: Speed MAX n/a 4443
P14.12 [➙ 136] DO: Volumetric Mode n/a 4444
P14.13 [➙ 136] DO: Local Mode n/a 4445
P14.14 [➙ 136] DO: WARNING n/a 4759
P14.15 [➙ 136] DO: Keyboard Mode n/a 4462
P14.16 [➙ 136] DO: Zero Set OK n/a 4463
15 - Batch Mode
P15.01 [➙ 139] Batch Mode NO 4448
P15.02 [➙ 139] Batch Setpoint Source OP 4449
P15.03 [➙ 139] Adaptation Time 3s 4450
P15.04 [➙ 139] Correction Amount 0 kg 4451
P15.05 [➙ 139] Adaptation Factor 0.5 4452
P15.06 [➙ 139] Batch Automatic Record NO 4453
P15.07 [➙ 139] DI: Batch Terminate n/a 4454
P15.08 [➙ 139] DO: Batch Running n/a 4455
P15.09 [➙ 139] DO: Dribble Feed n/a 4456

Parameters
P15.10 [➙ 139] DO: Full Feed n/a 4457
P15.11 [➙ 139] Analog Setpoint Relat. 1000 kg 4936
P15.12 [➙ 139] Batch Setpoint Range 20 mA 4937
P15.13 [➙ 139] Batch Setpoint Offset 4 mA 4938
P15.14 [➙ 139] Batch Tolerance 100000 kg 4458
P15.15 [➙ 139] Event: Out of Tolerance W2 4459
P15.16 [➙ 139] Pre-cut-off Amount 0 kg 4408
P15.17 [➙ 139] DO: Pre-cut-off n/a 4461
P15.18 [➙ 139] Batch Setpoint Limit 1000000 kg 4781
P15.19 [➙ 139] Event: Batch setpoint Limit W1 4782
P15.20 [➙ 139] Batch behaviour after power down Cancel 4601
16 - Maintenance interval
P16.01 [➙ 143] Maintenance Electric 3000 h 4465
P16.02 [➙ 143] Event: Maint. Electric IG 4466
P16.03 [➙ 143] Maintenance Feeder Run 3000 h 4467
P16.04 [➙ 143] Event: Maint.Feeder Run IG 4468
17 - VAP
P17.01 [➙ 144] VAP Active NO 4480
P17.02 [➙ 144] Platform Dis.Length 0 % LB 4482
18 - Belt Monitoring
P18.01 [➙ 144] Belt Sensor Active NO 4496
P18.02 [➙ 144] DI: Source Belt Sensor DI 4497
P18.03 [➙ 144] BIC Active NO 4498
P18.04 [➙ 144] Sensor Length 8.2 cm 4500
P18.05 [➙ 144] Sensor Width 12 cm 4501
P18.06 [➙ 144] Sensor Offset 0 cm 4502
P18.07 [➙ 144] Belt Drift 3 cm 4503
P18.08 [➙ 144] Event: Belt Drift W1 4504
P18.09 [➙ 144] Belt Skew 4 cm 4505

Parameters
P18.10 [➙ 144] Event: Belt Skew A 4506
P18.11 [➙ 144] Slip Value 2 % LB 4507
P18.12 [➙ 144] Event: Slip W1 4508
P18.13 [➙ 144] DO: Belt Drift n/a 4509
P18.14 [➙ 144] DO: Belt Skew n/a 4510
P18.15 [➙ 144] DO: Belt Slip n/a 4511
P18.16 [➙ 144] DI: BIC freeze n/a 4499
19 - Communication EasyServe
P19.01 [➙ 148] Own Address 1 4520
P19.02 [➙ 148] Baud Rate 38400 4521
P19.03 [➙ 148] Format Data 8-N-1 6189
20 - Communication Fieldbus
P20.01 [➙ 148] Protocol Type NO 4528
P20.02 [➙ 148] Timeout Host 5s 4529
P20.03 [➙ 148] Event: Cyclic Communication A 4530
P20.04 [➙ 148] Event: Acyclic Communication A 5680
P20.05 [➙ 148] Check in Keyboard Mode YES 6234
P20.06 [➙ 148] Compatibility DISOCONT Master NO 6287
P20.07 [➙ 148] Word Sequence I:std/L:std 6246
P20.08 [➙ 148] Byte Sequence High - Low 6245
P20.09 [➙ 148] Configuration FIXED_8_16 4661
P20.10 [➙ 148] Address 1 4531
P20.11 [➙ 148] Resolution 4096 4533
P20.12 [➙ 148] Baud rate 19200 4535
P20.13 [➙ 148] Data Format 8-O-1 4656
P20.14 [➙ 148] Physics RS232 6186
P20.15 [➙ 148] Address 16 4539
P20.16 [➙ 148] FLOAT-Format IEEE 4540
P20.17 [➙ 148] Address 63 4541
P20.18 [➙ 148] Baud rate 125K 4542

Parameters
P20.19 [➙ 148] Parameter NO 4658
P20.20 [➙ 148] Preset Count 2 4734
P20.21 [➙ 148] READ_ID Count 6 4659
P20.22 [➙ 148] Access Rights Limitation FB NO 4786
P20.23 [➙ 148] Remote IP Address FB 192.168.240.250 4787
21 - Fixed mode configuration

P21.01 [➙ 153] ID Preset Value 1 320 6247
P21.02 [➙ 153] ID Preset Value 2 352 6248
P21.03 [➙ 153] ID Preset Value 3 384 6249
P21.04 [➙ 153] ID Preset Value 4 592 6250
P21.05 [➙ 153] ID Preset Value 5 594 6251
P21.06 [➙ 153] ID Preset Value 6 610 6252
P21.07 [➙ 153] ID Preset Value 7 0 6253
P21.08 [➙ 153] ID Preset Value 8 0 6254
P21.09 [➙ 153] ID Read Value 1 752 6256
P21.10 [➙ 153] ID Read Value 2 784 6257
P21.11 [➙ 153] ID Read Value 3 1552 6258
P21.12 [➙ 153] ID Read Value 4 1872 6259
P21.13 [➙ 153] ID Read Value 5 1874 6260
P21.14 [➙ 153] ID Read Value 6 1880 6261
P21.15 [➙ 153] ID Read Value 7 1890 6262
P21.16 [➙ 153] ID Read Value 8 1894 6263
P21.17 [➙ 153] ID Read Value 9 816 6264
P21.18 [➙ 153] ID Read Value 10 1876 6265
P21.19 [➙ 153] ID Read Value 11 1884 6266
P21.20 [➙ 153] ID Read Value 12 1960 6267
P21.21 [➙ 153] ID Read Value 13 1896 6268

Parameters
P21.22 [➙ 153] ID Read Value 14 1898 6269
P21.23 [➙ 153] ID Read Value 15 1902 6270
P21.24 [➙ 153] ID Read Value 16 1904 6271
22 - Ethernet
P22.01 [➙ 157] IP Address 192.168.240.1 6235
P22.02 [➙ 157] Net Mask 255.255.255.0 6236
P22.03 [➙ 157] Gateway 0.0.0.0 6237
23 - PLC Outputs
P23.01 [➙ 157] DO: PLC 1 n/a 4662
P23.02 [➙ 157] DO: PLC 2 n/a 4663
P23.03 [➙ 157] DO: PLC 3 n/a 4664
P23.04 [➙ 157] DO: PLC 4 n/a 4665
P23.05 [➙ 157] DO: PLC 5 n/a 4666
P23.06 [➙ 157] DO: PLC 6 n/a 4667
P23.07 [➙ 157] DO: PLC 7 n/a 4668
P23.08 [➙ 157] DO: PLC 8 n/a 4669
P23.09 [➙ 157] AO: PLC 1 n/a 4670
P23.10 [➙ 157] AO: PLC 2 n/a 4671
24 - Interlocking
P24.01 [➙ 159] DI: Event Mechanics 1 n/a 4760
P24.06 [➙ 159] DI: Event Electricity 1 n/a 4765
P24.09 [➙ 159] DO: Event Mechanics n/a 4768
P24.10 [➙ 159] Event: Mechanics W1 4769

Parameters
P24.11 [➙ 159] DO: Event Electricity n/a 4770
P24.12 [➙ 159] Event: Electricity W1 4771
P24.13 [➙ 159] DO: Event Mechatronics 1 n/a 4772
P24.14 [➙ 159] DO: Event Mechatronics 2 n/a 4773
P24.15 [➙ 159] Event: Mechatronics W1 4774
P24.16 [➙ 159] DO: Ready n/a 4775
P24.17 [➙ 159] Event: Not Ready W1 4776
P24.18 [➙ 159] DO: Ready for Start n/a 4777
P24.19 [➙ 159] Event: Not Ready for Start W1 4778
25 - Belt Load Controller

P25.01 [➙ 162] Belt Load Controller NO 4544
P25.02 [➙ 162] Controller Magnitude Adaption 10 mA 4545
P25.03 [➙ 162] Blind Distance 5m 4546
P25.04 [➙ 162] Offset 0 mA 4547
P25.05 [➙ 162] Lower Limit 0 mA 4548
P25.06 [➙ 162] Upper Limit 20 mA 4549
P25.07 [➙ 162] Position at STOP 0 4550
P25.08 [➙ 162] Store NO 4551
P25.09 [➙ 162] Controller Magnitude Prefeeder n/a 4552
P25.10 [➙ 162] Pulse Length 1s 4553
P25.11 [➙ 162] S: P-Component 0.5 s/mA 4687
P25.12 [➙ 162] S: I-Component 3s 4688
P25.13 [➙ 162] S: Threshold Response 0% 4689
P25.14 [➙ 162] S: DO Open Flow Gate n/a 4702
P25.15 [➙ 162] S: DO Close Flow Gate n/a 4703
P25.16 [➙ 162] QA Setpoint Source n/a 5509
P25.17 [➙ 162] QA Setpoint Range 20 mA 5510
P25.18 [➙ 162] QA Setpoint Offset 0 mA 5511
P25.19 [➙ 162] QA-Vmin 0% 4554
P25.20 [➙ 162] QA-Qmin 0% 4555
P25.21 [➙ 162] QA-Ypuls 0 mA 4556

Parameters
P25.22 [➙ 162] QA-Ymin 0 mA 4557
P25.23 [➙ 162] QA Coeffizient Calculation NO 5503
P25.24 [➙ 162] Yz Dead Time 0.5 s 5504
P25.25 [➙ 162] QA Filter Coefficient 5m 5505
P25.26 [➙ 162] QA v-Adaption 80 % 5507
P25.27 [➙ 162] QA Upper Limit relative 1000 % Y 4559
P25.28 [➙ 162] Blind Distance 2. Weighbridge 2m 4558
P25.29 [➙ 162] QA Adaption 2. Weighbridge 5m 5508
26 - Bin Weigher
P26.01 [➙ 170] Bin Weigher Active NO 4704
P26.02 [➙ 170] LC: Load Measurement n/a 4705
P26.03 [➙ 170] LC Characteristic Value 2 mV/V 4706
P26.04 [➙ 170] LC Rated Capacity 1000 kg 4707
P26.05 [➙ 170] LC Filter 0.25 s 4708
P26.06 [➙ 170] Bipolar Measurement NO 4712
P26.07 [➙ 170] Event: Error LC Input (Bin) W1 4709
P26.08 [➙ 170] Event: LC Input > MAX W1 4710
P26.09 [➙ 170] Nominal Bin Load 100 % LC 4711
P26.10 [➙ 170] Display Format ---.--- t 4672
P26.11 [➙ 170] Display Filter 3s 4713
P26.12 [➙ 170] Control Level MIN 60 % 4714
P26.13 [➙ 170] Control Level MAX 70 % 4715
P26.14 [➙ 170] DO: Bin Filling n/a 4716
P26.15 [➙ 170] Bin Level MIN 5% 4717
P26.16 [➙ 170] Event: Bin Level MIN W1 4718
P26.17 [➙ 170] DO: Bin Level MIN n/a 4719
P26.18 [➙ 170] Bin Level MAX 120 % 4720
P26.19 [➙ 170] Event: Bin Level MAX W1 4721
P26.20 [➙ 170] DO: Bin Level MAX n/a 4722
P26.21 [➙ 170] AO: Bin Load n/a 4723
P26.22 [➙ 170] AO: Offset 4 mA 4724

Parameters
P26.23 [➙ 170] AO: Range 20 mA 4725
P26.24 [➙ 170] Range Correction 1 4726
P26.25 [➙ 170] Tare (Bin) 0 kg 4727
P26.26 [➙ 170] Calibration Weight 10 kg 4728
P26.27 [➙ 170] Controller in OFF-Mode YES 4755
P26.28 [➙ 170] DI: Bin Load Sensor n/a 5401
P26.29 [➙ 170] Event: Bin Load MAX Sensor W1 5402
P26.30 [➙ 170] Bin Level analog Input Offset 4 mA 4825
P26.31 [➙ 170] Bin Level analog Input Range 20 mA 4826
27 - Bin Level Controller

P27.01 [➙ 178] Bin Controller ON NO 4735
P27.02 [➙ 178] Filling Type YES 4736
P27.03 [➙ 178] AO: Controller Magnitude Bin n/a 4738

Level
P27.04 [➙ 178] DO: Feeder ON n/a 4758
P27.05 [➙ 178] Setpoint Bin Level 0 kg 4757
P27.06 [➙ 178] Feeder Constant 0 (kg/h)/mA 4741
P27.07 [➙ 178] Dead Time TT 3s 4742
P27.08 [➙ 178] P-Component KP 0 mA/kg 4739
P27.09 [➙ 178] I-Component TN 0s 4740
P27.10 [➙ 178] D Portion TV 0s 4747
P27.11 [➙ 178] D Filter TD 0s 4748
P27.12 [➙ 178] Bypass 10 mA 4743
P27.13 [➙ 178] Bypass D Portion 0s 4749
P27.15 [➙ 178] Lower Limit 0 mA 4745
P27.16 [➙ 178] Upper Limit 20 mA 4746
P27.17 [➙ 178] Dead Band Deviation 0 kg 4750
P27.18 [➙ 178] Dead Band Factor 0 4751
P27.19 [➙ 178] Setpoint Filter 0.5 s 4752

Parameters
P27.20 [➙ 178] Flow Rate Filter 0.5 s 4753
P27.21 [➙ 178] DI: Init. Controller n/a 4754
P27.22 [➙ 178] Bin Setpoint source PARAMETER 5476
28 - 2nd Weighbridge
P28.01 [➙ 182] 2nd Weighbridge active NO 4905
P28.02 [➙ 182] 2nd Weighbridge n/a 4906
P28.03 [➙ 182] LC Characteristic Value 2 mV/V 4907
P28.04 [➙ 182] LC Rated Capacity 200 kg 4908
P28.05 [➙ 182] Effective Platform Length 0.18 m 4909
P28.06 [➙ 182] LC Filter 0.25 s 4910
P28.07 [➙ 182] Event: Error LC Input (2nd Bridge) W1 4911
P28.08 [➙ 182] 2nd Bridge MIN 5% 4912
P28.09 [➙ 182] Event: 2nd Bridge MIN W2 4913
P28.10 [➙ 182] DO: 2nd Bridge MIN n/a 4914
P28.11 [➙ 182] 2nd Bridge MAX 150 % 4915
P28.12 [➙ 182] Event: 2nd Bridge MAX W2 4916
P28.13 [➙ 182] DO: 2nd Bridge MAX n/a 4917
P28.14 [➙ 182] Range Correction (2nd Bridge) 1 4918
P28.15 [➙ 182] Tare (2nd Bridge) 0 kg/m 4919
P28.16 [➙ 182] Controller active NO 4920
P28.17 [➙ 182] P-Component KP 0.5 4921
P28.18 [➙ 182] I-Component TN 10 s 4922
P28.19 [➙ 182] Analog Output 2nd Bridge n/a 5383
P28.20 [➙ 182] 2nd Bridge Offset 4 mA 5384
P28.21 [➙ 182] 2nd Bridge Range 20 mA 5385
P28.22 [➙ 182] 2nd Bridge analog Input Offset 4 mA 5833
P28.23 [➙ 182] 2nd Bridge analog Input Range 20 mA 5836
29 - Check System
P29.01 [➙ 187] Type of Check System NO 4861
P29.02 [➙ 187] Auto Correction NO 4903

Parameters
P29.03 [➙ 187] Cyclic Auto Start NO 4862
P29.04 [➙ 187] Cycle Time 0.5 h 4863
P29.05 [➙ 187] Release Check System n/a 4864
P29.06 [➙ 187] Event: No Check Release W2 4884
P29.07 [➙ 187] Check Start Span OP 4865
P29.08 [➙ 187] Check Start Tare OP 4866
P29.09 [➙ 187] Accept Correction OP 4867
P29.10 [➙ 187] Finish Check Measurement OP 4868
P29.11 [➙ 187] Set: Quantity or Rotations Quantity 4869
P29.12 [➙ 187] Check Circuits 0 4870
P29.13 [➙ 187] Check Quantity 0 kg 4871
P29.14 [➙ 187] Storage Quantity 500 kg 4872
P29.15 [➙ 187] Minimum Check Quantity 0 kg 4873
P29.16 [➙ 187] Event: Minimum Check Quantity W1 4874
P29.17 [➙ 187] Minimum Fill Weight 0 kg 4875
P29.18 [➙ 187] Event: Minimum Fill Weight W1 4876
P29.19 [➙ 187] Maximum Fill Weight 1000 kg 4877
P29.20 [➙ 187] Event: Maximum Fill Weight W1 4878
P29.21 [➙ 187] Damping Time 3s 4879
P29.22 [➙ 187] Blind Distance 0% 4880
P29.23 [➙ 187] DO: Control Started n/a 4881
P29.24 [➙ 187] Feeder Stopped n/a 4882
P29.25 [➙ 187] Event: Feeder Not Stopped W1 4883
P29.26 [➙ 187] Event: Prepare Check Measure- W2 4885

ment
P29.27 [➙ 187] DO: Check Measurement Active n/a 4887
P29.28 [➙ 187] Event: Expect Acceptance W2 4888
P29.29 [➙ 187] DO:Expect Acceptance n/a 4889
P29.30 [➙ 187] Absolute Range 10 % 4890
P29.31 [➙ 187] Relative Range 3% 4891
P29.32 [➙ 187] Event: Absolute Tare Correction W1 4892

Error
P29.33 [➙ 187] Event: Relative Tare Correction W1 4893
Error

Parameters
P29.34 [➙ 187] Event: Absolute Span Correction W1 4894

Error
P29.35 [➙ 187] Event: Relative Span Correction W1 4895
Error
P29.36 [➙ 187] Correction Evaluation 1 4896
P29.37 [➙ 187] Correction Speed 0s 4897
P29.38 [➙ 187] AO: Check Measurement Result n/a 4898
P29.39 [➙ 187] DO: Check Gate n/a 4899
P29.40 [➙ 187] Check Gate Feedback n/a 4900
P29.41 [➙ 187] Check Gate Time 0s 4901
P29.42 [➙ 187] Event: Check Gate Error W1 4902
P29.43 [➙ 187] Limit Max. Bin Error 0% 4946
P29.44 [➙ 187] Event: Bin Error W1 4947
P29.45 [➙ 187] DO: Correction Error n/a 4904
30 - Moisture
P30.01 [➙ 200] Moisture Active NO 5386
P30.02 [➙ 200] Moisture Select n/a 5399
P30.03 [➙ 200] AI: Moisture Measurement n/a 5387
P30.04 [➙ 200] Nominal Moisture 20 % 5388
P30.05 [➙ 200] Moisture Offset 4 mA 5389
P30.06 [➙ 200] Moisture Range 20 mA 5390
P30.07 [➙ 200] DO: Moisture active n/a 5400
P30.08 [➙ 200] Moisture MAX 10 % 5391
P30.09 [➙ 200] DO: Moisture MAX n/a 5392
P30.10 [➙ 200] Event: Moisture MAX W1 5393
P30.11 [➙ 200] AO: Flow Rate corrected n/a 5394
P30.12 [➙ 200] AO: Flow Rate Offset 4 mA 5395
P30.13 [➙ 200] AO: Flow Rate Range 20 mA 5396
P30.14 [➙ 200] Pulse Counter corrected NO 5397
31 - Dead Time
P31.01 [➙ 203] Dead Time Active NO 5403
P31.02 [➙ 203] Dead Time 0s 5404

Parameters
P31.03 [➙ 203] Setpoint Select n/a 5405
P31.04 [➙ 203] Setpoint Clock ON n/a 5406
P31.05 [➙ 203] ON/OFF Select n/a 5407
P31.06 [➙ 203] ON/OFF Clock ON n/a 5408
P31.07 [➙ 203] Time Elements Preassign n/a 5409
P31.08 [➙ 203] Initialise Time Elements n/a 5410
P31.09 [➙ 203] DO: Dead Time Active n/a 5411
P31.10 [➙ 203] DO: Setpoint Active n/a 5412
P31.11 [➙ 203] DO: ON/OFF Active n/a 5413
32 - Linearization
P32.01 [➙ 205] Linearization ON * NO 4577
P32.02 [➙ 205] Linearization S1 * 25 % Q 4681
P32.03 [➙ 205] Linearization I1 * 25 % Q 4579
P32.10 [➙ 205] Event: Linearization Error * W2 4586
33 - Flow Gate
P33.01 [➙ 207] AI: Position Flow Gate n/a 4691
P33.02 [➙ 207] AI: Offset 4 mA 4692
P33.03 [➙ 207] AI: Range 20 mA 4693
P33.04 [➙ 207] AO: Position Flow Gate n/a 4694
P33.05 [➙ 207] AO: Offset 4 mA 4695
P33.06 [➙ 207] AO: Range 20 mA 4696
P33.07 [➙ 207] Event: MIN Flow Gate W2 4697

Parameters
P33.08 [➙ 207] Position MIN Flow Gate n/a 4698
P33.09 [➙ 207] Event: MAX Flow Gate W2 4699
P33.10 [➙ 207] Position MAX Flow Gate n/a 4700
34 - 2-Sensor Slip
P34.01 [➙ 208] 2-Sensor Slip active NO 5433
P34.02 [➙ 208] Source Sensor 1 Speed 5434
P34.03 [➙ 208] DI: Sensor 1 n/a 5435
P34.04 [➙ 208] Characteristic Value Sensor 1 100 I/m 5436
P34.05 [➙ 208] DI: Sensor 2 n/a 5437
P34.06 [➙ 208] Characteristic Value Sensor 2 100 I/m 5438
P34.07 [➙ 208] Slip Value 2 2 % LB 5439
P34.08 [➙ 208] Event: Slip 2 W1 5440
P34.09 [➙ 208] DO: Slip 2 n/a 5443
35 - Pressure Compensation
P35.01 [➙ 210] Compensation Active NO 5479
P35.02 [➙ 210] Compensation Source n/a 5480
P35.03 [➙ 210] Pressure Characteristic Value 2 mV/V 5481
P35.04 [➙ 210] Pressure Rated Cap. 0.5 Bar 5482
P35.05 [➙ 210] Filter Pressure Value DMS 0.25 s 5483
P35.06 [➙ 210] Event: DMS-Input A 5484
P35.07 [➙ 210] Event: DMS-Input > MAX A 5485
P35.08 [➙ 210] Event: DMS-Input < MIN W1 5486
P35.09 [➙ 210] Zero 0 Bar 5487
P35.10 [➙ 210] Norming 0 kg/Bar 5488
P35.11 [➙ 210] Pressure-MIN 0% 5489
P35.12 [➙ 210] Event: Pressure-MIN W2 5490
P35.13 [➙ 210] DO: Pressure-MIN n/a 5491
P35.14 [➙ 210] Pressure-MAX 105 % 5492
P35.15 [➙ 210] Event: Pressure-MAX W2 5493
P35.16 [➙ 210] DO: Pressure-MAX n/a 5494

Parameters
P35.17 [➙ 210] DI: Switch On Compensation n/a 5495
P35.18 [➙ 210] Compensation analog Input Offset 4 mA 5583
P35.19 [➙ 210] Compensation analog Input Ran- 20 mA 5584

ge
36 - FCB analog outputs

P36.01 [➙ 214] FCB_AO 01 n/a 20481
P36.02 [➙ 214] Offset FCB_AO 1 4 mA 6272
P36.03 [➙ 214] Range FCB_AO 1 20 mA 6273
P36.04 [➙ 214] Reference FCB_AO 1 1000 6274
P36.05 [➙ 214] FCB_AO 02 n/a 20482
P36.06 [➙ 214] Offset FCB_AO 2 4 mA 6275
P36.07 [➙ 214] Range FCB_AO 2 20 mA 6276
P36.09 [➙ 214] FCB_AO 03 n/a 20483
P36.10 [➙ 214] Offset FCB_AO 3 4 mA 6278
P36.11 [➙ 214] Range FCB_AO 3 20 mA 6279
P36.13 [➙ 214] FCB_AO 04 n/a 20484
P36.14 [➙ 214] Offset FCB_AO 4 4 mA 6281
P36.15 [➙ 214] Range FCB_AO 4 20 mA 6282
P36.17 [➙ 214] FCB_AO 05 n/a 20485
P36.18 [➙ 214] Offset FCB_AO 5 4 mA 6284
P36.19 [➙ 214] Range FCB_AO 5 20 mA 6285
P36.21 [➙ 214] FCB Variant Empty 5902
P36.22 [➙ 214] Event: FCB-Error A 5903
37 - FCB digital outputs

P37.01 [➙ 218] FCB_DO 01 n/a 20529
P37.02 [➙ 218] FCB_DO 02 n/a 20530
P37.03 [➙ 218] FCB_DO 03 n/a 20531

Parameters
P37.04 [➙ 218] FCB_DO 04 n/a 20532
P37.05 [➙ 218] FCB_DO 05 n/a 20533
P37.06 [➙ 218] FCB_DO 06 n/a 20534
P37.07 [➙ 218] FCB_DO 07 n/a 20535
P37.08 [➙ 218] FCB_DO 08 n/a 20536
P37.09 [➙ 218] FCB_DO 09 n/a 20537
P37.10 [➙ 218] FCB_DO 10 n/a 20538
P37.11 [➙ 218] FCB_DO 11 n/a 20539
P37.12 [➙ 218] FCB_DO 12 n/a 20540
P37.13 [➙ 218] FCB_DO 13 n/a 20541
P37.14 [➙ 218] FCB_DO 14 n/a 20542
P37.15 [➙ 218] FCB_DO 15 n/a 20543
P37.16 [➙ 218] FCB_DO 16 n/a 20544
P37.17 [➙ 218] FCB_DO 17 n/a 20545
P37.18 [➙ 218] FCB_DO 18 n/a 20546
P37.19 [➙ 218] FCB_DO 19 n/a 20547
P37.20 [➙ 218] FCB_DO 20 n/a 20548
38 - Data Logging
P38.01 [➙ 221] Hourly Total Time 0 min 5743
P38.02 [➙ 221] Daily Total Time 0 min 5744
P38.03 [➙ 221] Logger cycle time 1 min 6288
P38.04 [➙ 221] Data Log Value 1 752 6289
P38.05 [➙ 221] Data Log Value 2 755 6290
P38.06 [➙ 221] Data Log Value 3 1894 6291
P38.07 [➙ 221] Data Log Value 4 1872 6292
P38.08 [➙ 221] Data Log Value 5 1904 6293
P38.09 [➙ 221] Data Log Value 6 1880 6294
P38.10 [➙ 221] Data Log Value 7 1874 6295

Parameters
P38.11 [➙ 221] Data Log Value 8 1890 6296
P38.12 [➙ 221] Data Log Value 9 0 6297
P38.13 [➙ 221] Data Log Value 10 0 6298
39 - Configuration HMI Values

P39.01 [➙ 223] HMI Value 01 1996 6299
P39.02 [➙ 223] HMI Value 02 1944 6300
P39.03 [➙ 223] HMI Value 03 1942 6301
P39.04 [➙ 223] HMI Value 04 1960 6302
P39.05 [➙ 223] HMI Value 05 1904 6303
P39.06 [➙ 223] HMI Value 06 1952 6304
P39.07 [➙ 223] HMI Value 07 1950 6305
P39.08 [➙ 223] HMI Value 08 2158 6306
P39.09 [➙ 223] HMI Value 09 0 6307
P39.10 [➙ 223] HMI Value 10 0 6308
40 - Local Mode (Speed)

P40.01 [➙ 225] Motor Select (Block 1) VMO1 Motor1 5841
P40.02 [➙ 225] ON in Remote (Block 1) n/a 5842
P40.03 [➙ 225] Controller Magnitude (Block 1) n/a 5843

(Block 1)
P40.05 [➙ 225] JOG enable (Block 1) NO 5844
P40.06 [➙ 225] Release local Start (Block 1) n/a 5845
P40.07 [➙ 225] DI: External Error 1 (Block 1) n/a 5846
P40.10 [➙ 225] DI: ON Motor (2nd) (Block 1) n/a 5849
P40.11 [➙ 225] Motor Select (Block 2) VMO1 Motor2 5850

(Block 2)

Parameters
P40.21 [➙ 225] Motor Select (Block 3) not active 5859

(Block 3)

(Block 4)

(Block 5)

Parameters
41 - Local Mode (Gate)

P41.01 [➙ 234] Motor Select VMO1 Motor5 5886
P41.02 [➙ 234] OPEN in Remote n/a 5887
P41.03 [➙ 234] DI: Limit Switch OPEN n/a 5888
P41.04 [➙ 234] CLOSE in Remote n/a 5889
P41.05 [➙ 234] DI: Limit Switch CLOSE n/a 5890
P41.06 [➙ 234] Release local Start n/a 5891
P41.07 [➙ 234] DI: External Error 1 n/a 5892
7.4.2 Parameter Details
7.4.2.1 Parameter Block 01 - Hardware Modules

A DISOCONT Tersus system can comprise up to a maximum of 3 VCU control units, several VHM (OP)
operating panels and up to 2 motor controllers (VMO). A PC running the EasyServe program can be con-
nected for service purposes.
With the exception of EasyServe and the operating elements (VHM, OP) all of the units involved must be
signed on with the parameters in group P01.xx. Units that are not signed on cannot be used and their inputs
and outputs will not be made available by either EasyServe or the operating elements.
Furthermore, up to 2 analog input or output components (VAI or VAO) can be installed.
Caution:
For reasons of safety, it is imperative that the relevant communication error messages should register an
alarm (A) when originating from units that are actively involved in the control loop.
P01.01 Analog Channel A10 Default: NO

Alternative: NO
AI1 (Analog In 1)
AO2 (Analog Out 2)
Defines the analog channel set at position A10 of the main VCU (= VCU1). The position is
labeled to ease identification.
AIx: analog input VAI installed
AOx: analog output installed
x: number of the channel has when the physical interfaces are allocated logical signals.

Parameters
P01.02 Analog Channel A11 Default: NO

Alternative: NO
AI2 (Analog In 2)
AO3 (Analog Out 3)
Defines the analog channel set at position A11 of the main VCU (= VCU1). The position is
labeled to ease identification.
P01.03 VCU20100-Unit 2 Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
Installation of the VCU 20100 input/output expansion with the local bus address 2 and VIO
software.
P01.04 VCU2: Analog Channel A10 Default: NO

Alternative: NO
AI1 (Analog In 1)
AO2 (Analog Out 2)
Defines the analog channel with local address 2 applied to position A10 on the main VCU.
The position is labeled to ease identification.

Alternative: NO
AI2 (Analog In 2)
AO3 (Analog Out 3)
Defines the analog channel with local address 2 applied to position A11 on the main VCU.
The position is labeled to ease identification.
P01.06 Event: Communication VCU20100- Default: A

Unit 2
Event Group: SY Number: 02
This event is identified when communication with the VCU input/output expansion with VIO
software and local bus address 2 is disrupted. The cables and the address setting should
be checked if an error occurs.

Parameters
P01.07 VCU20100-Unit 3 Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
Installation of the VCU 20100 input/output expansion with the local bus address 3 and VIO
software.

Alternative: NO
AI1 (Analog In 1)
AO2 (Analog Out 2)
Defines the analog channel applied to position A10 on the VCU with local address 3. The
position is labeled to ease identification.
AOx: analog output VAO installed

Alternative: NO
AI2 (Analog In 2)
AO3 (Analog Out 3)
Defines the analog channel applied to position A11 on the VCU with local address 3. The
position is labeled to ease identification.
AOx: analog output VAO installed
P01.10 Event: Communication VCU20100- Default: A

Unit 3
This event is identified when communication with the VCU input/output expansion with VIO
software and local bus address 3 is disrupted. The cables and the address setting should
be checked if an error occurs.
P01.11 VHM RS485 Address Default: 1

Min: 1 Max: 16
The parameter defines the address under which the VHM operating element can reach the
scale via RS485 coupling.

Parameters
P01.12 VMO20100-Unit 1 Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
The first unit VMO 201xx is connected to the local bus. The address 11 must be set by
parameter for this unit.
P01.13 Event: Communication VMO20100- Default: A

Unit 1
This event is identified when communication with the first local operating terminal VMO
201xx with local bus address 11 is disrupted. Check the cables and the address setting if
an error occurs.
P01.14 VMO20100-Unit 2 Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
Second VMO 201xx unit is connected to the local bus. The address 12 must be set by pa-
rameter for this unit.
P01.15 Event: Communication VMO20100- Default: A

Unit 2
This event is identified when communication with the second local operating terminal VMO
201xx with local bus address 12 is disrupted. Check the cables and the address setting if
an error occurs.
7.4.2.2 Parameter Block 02 - Dialog Behaviour

The parameters of this group define system behavior towards the operator and set access authorization.
P02.01 Language Default: DEUTSCH

Alternative: DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
OTHER
Device dialog language. User-defined texts can be used if OTHER is selected. Texts can
be written and loaded using EasyServe.

Parameters
P02.02 Units Default: Metric

Alternative: Metric
English
Switches display and parameter entry units from metric (SI units) to non-metric systems
(English). All values entered will be converted automatically.
P02.03 Scale Name Default: DISOCONT Tersus

VWF
Letters and characters can be used. The name appears in the upper row of the operating
console and when searching through networks for controllers.
Remark: The characters ";" and "=" are not accepted. During the saving procedure these
characters will automatically be deleted.
P02.04 Access Rights Limitation HMI Default: NO

Alternative: NO
REMOTE IP
The rights for controlling the scales from the operating console VHM or the user interface of
a browser (HMI) connected via Ethernet can be restricted. The restricted rights apply to the
start and stop commands and the setpoint entry.
Alternatives:
NO: control commands are permitted from all operating locations
REMOTE IP: control commands are possible only from the operating console with the IP
address listed in the following parameters.
Also refer to:

P02.05 Remote IP Address HMI 1
...
P02.10 Event: Communication HMI 3
P02.05 Remote IP Address HMI 1 Default: 192.168.240.21
Address of the first operating panel from which control commands should be given.
The value 127.0.0.1 must be entered into at least one parameter of P02.05, P02.07 or
P02.09 if a VHM is used for controlling via RS485.
Also refer to:

P02.04 Access Rights Limitation HMI

Parameters
P02.06 Event: Communication HMI 1 Default: IG

Error in the communication with the first DISOCONT operator panel.
Communication has been interrupted for longer than 10 s.
To rectify: check the cable connections and the address setting.
Address of the second operating panel from which control commands are to be given.
Also refer to:


Error in communication with the second DISOCONT operating console.
The address of the third operating panels that control commands are supposed to be given
from.
Also refer to:


Parameters

Error in the communication with the third DISOCONT operator panel.
P02.11 Event: Communication VHM serial Default: IG

This event is detected when the connection via the serial RS485 interface to a VHM operat-
ing panel is interrupted.
Causes of this event:

Scales receives no message from the operating console during a tolerance period
Steps:
- check cable connection
- check that operating console is correctly functioning
- check the operating console settings
- check the addresses of the scales at the RS485 data bus (P01.11 VHM RS485 Address)
P02.12 Password Default: 10000

Min: 1000 Max: 9999
Password 1 for access protection of certain functions on the operator panel as per the fol-
lowing parameters. Usually the 1st password is used for the service personnel and the 2nd
password for operating personnel with particular privileges. The password keyed in is
shown encoded for protection. The password can be reset using EasyServe if it should be
forgotten.
The password set at the factory: 7353
P02.13 2. Password Default: 14389

Min: 1000 Max: 9999
Password 2 for access protection for certain functions on the operator panel as per the
following parameters. Usually the 1st password is used for the service personnel and the
2nd password for operating personnel with particular privileges. The password entered is
shown encoded on the screen. The password can be reset using EasyServe if it should be
forgotten.
The password set at the factory: 2889

Parameters
P02.14 Reset Counter 1 Default: active

Alternative: active
not active
Password
2.Password
Defines the access protection for using the operating console.
P02.15 Reset Counter 2 Default: active

Alternative: active
not active
Password
2.Password
P02.16 Batch control Default: active

Alternative: active
not active
Password
2.Password
P02.17 Switch Grav./Vol. command Default: active

Alternative: active
not active
Password
2.Password
P02.18 Switch Keyboard-/Normal Mode Default: active

Alternative: active
not active
Password
2.Password
P02.19 Filling control bin weigher Default: active

Alternative: active
not active
Password
2.Password

Parameters
P02.20 Data Log ON/OFF Default: Password

Alternative: active
not active
Password
2.Password
Enables functions Start Data Logging , Stop Data Logging and Clear Data Log File.
Parameters see block Data Logging.
P02.21 Exit Scale Default: active

Alternative: active
not active
Password
2.Password
Defines the access protection for the function at the operator panel.
7.4.2.3 Parameter Block 03 - Feeder Definition

The parameters of this group configure basic functionality.
P03.01 Nominal Flow Rate Default: 10000 kg/h

Min: 0 kg/h Max: 220000000 kg/h
The nominal feed rate is a characteristic value of the scale that acts as a reference value
for threshold values and service displays.
P03.02 Nominal Speed Default: 0.1 m/s

Min: 0.001 m/s Max: 50 m/s
The rated speed is the reference value for threshold value monitoring that defines nominal
belt loading together with the nominal flow rate.
This value should be precise to a couple of percent.

Parameters
P03.03 Flow Rate Units Default: ------ kg/h

Alternative: ------ kg/h
----.- kg/h
---.-- kg/h
--.--- kg/h
------ t/h
----.- t/h
---.-- t/h
--.--- t/h
------ kg/s
----.- kg/s
---.-- kg/s
--.--- kg/s
----- kg/min
-----.- kg/min
----.-- kg/min
---.--- kg/min
Display format for setpoint and actual feed rate values.
P03.04 Counter 1 Unit Default: ------- kg

Alternative: ------- kg
-----.- kg
----.-- kg
---.--- kg
------- t
-----.- t
----.-- t
---.--- t
Display format for counter 1.
P03.05 Pulse Length Total Default: 0.05 s

Min: 0 s Max: 10 s
Duration of an external totalizing counter output pulses.
The weighting of a pulse (WI) is defined by P03.09 Totalizer Increment.
If the pulses duration is shorter than 10 ms the impulse output is disabled. All impulses not
issued yet are cleared.
The output frequency f is approximately Nominal Flow Rate:

f [Hz] = P03.01 / 3600 * P03.09
≤
The output frequency must be 10 Hz if an external counter is connected.

Parameters
P03.06 Counter 2 Unit Default: ----.-- t

-----.- kg
----.-- kg
---.--- kg
------- t
-----.- t
----.-- t
---.--- t
Display format for counter 2
P03.07 Counter 3 Unit Default: -----.- t

-----.- kg
----.-- kg
---.--- kg
------- t
-----.- t
----.-- t
---.--- t
Display format for counter 3.
P03.08 DO: Pulse Counter Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
DO: Selecting the physical output for triggering an external pulse counter for the measured
quantity. Bear in mind the limitations on speed and life cycle when selecting a relay output
and set the weight equivalent for an pulses in P03.09 Totalizer Increment. The duration of
the pulses is set by P03.05 Pulse Length Total.
P03.09 Totalizer Increment Default: 0 kg

Min: 0 kg Max: 100000 kg
Weight equivalent of an impulse at the output for the external counter as per P03.08 DO:
Pulse Counter.
The DO: Pulse Counter is blocked when setting the valence 0.
7.4.2.4 Parameter Block 04 - Control Sources

The parameters of this group assign internal signals to the physical outputs.

Parameters
P04.01 Feeder Start Default: FB

Alternative: FB
OP
DI
Specifies the device that will turn on the scales.
The digital input is flank-controlled, i.e., the ON signal must be removed and then reapplied
if the scale becomes inoperative because of something like an alarm.
P04.02 Feedrate Setpoint Default: FB

Alternative: FB
OP
AI
Determines which signal input gives the feed rate setpoint.
If analog input is selected: refer to norming the input

P11.17 Setpoint Offset
P11.18 Setpoint Range
P04.03 Source Run Enable Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
FB
Determines the signal input that gives the scales release signal. This input is generally
used for interlocking with downstream transport equipment.
The setting 'n/a' means that no release is required.
P04.04 Event: Run Disabled Default: W2

Event Group: IL Number: 01
No release signal from the source determined by P04.03 Source Run Enable.
If this event is pending then the downstream transport equipment is most likely not switched
on.

Parameters
P04.05 Source Relative Setpoint Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
OP
AI
A preset feed rate setpoint (compare P04.02 Feedrate Setpoint) can be percentaged by the
VHM operating console or by an analog input. This function is used if the system is to feed
a percentage of an additional material to the original component.
For example:
P04.02 = AI
P04.05 = OP
The effective setpoint is the percentage component, entered into the operating console, of
the absolute setpoint set through the analog input.
If the setpoint is given as per P04.02 by the operating console (P04.02 = OP) or the scales
are in keyboard mode P04.05 will have no effect, i.e. the setpoint entered at the operating
console works as entered.
P04.06 Relativer Setpoint Range Default: 20 mA

Min: 0 mA Max: 1000 mA
Effective only when P04.05 Source Relative Setpoint = AI.
Current at the analog input for entry 100%.
P04.07 Relative Setpoint Offset Default: 4 mA

Min: -200 mA Max: 200 mA
Effective only when P04.05 Source Relative Setpoint = AI.
Current at the analog input for an input of 0%.
P04.08 Difference Flow Rate Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
FB
AI
Definition of the input channel for a signal that should be subtracted from the measured
flow rate. This function is used when the weigh belt records a material quantity that is both
well-known and still to be measured.
Dependant upon P04.11 Difference Function, further signal processing uses the difference
from the actually measured flow rate and the already known flow rate, meaning the still
unknown flow rate. Therefore, the totalizing counters only add together the additional quan-
tity of bulk solids. The flow rate regulator might receive the additional quantity of bulk solids
as the actual input quantity so that it can be controlled through the prefeeder.

Parameters
P04.09 Difference Flow Rate Range Default: 20 mA

Effective only when P04.08 Difference Flow Rate = AI.
Current at the analog input for 100 % entry of the nominal feed rate in P03.01 Nominal Flow
Rate
P04.10 Difference Flow Rate Offset Default: 4 mA

Effective only when P04.08 Difference Flow Rate = AI.
Current at the analog input for an input of 0 %.
P04.11 Difference Function Default: NO

Alternative: NO
Control
Display
Control + Display
≠
Effective only when P04.08 Difference Flow Rate n/a.
Definition of the effect of the actual differential flow rate:

NO: The input signal for the actual differential flow rate does not have any effect.
Control: The actual flow rate fed to the flow rate regulator = the measured flow rate − the
actual differential flow rate.
Display: The flow rate display = the measured flow rate − the actual differential flow rate.
Control + display: Both the display and the flow rate regulator use the measured flow rate −
the actual differential flow rate.
Also refer to: P04.08 Difference Flow Rate
7.4.2.5 Parameter Block 05 - Rated Data

The parameters of this group describe important characteristic values of the scales' mechanics.
P05.01 Pulses per length Default: 10000 I/m

Min: 1 I/m Max: 1000000 I/m
The number of impulses from the speed transmitter per meter of belt length. This parameter
is essential to scale accuracy.
Note: If there is no active tachometer, you should not change the parameter because this
would change the running period of the calibration programs.
P05.02 LC Characteristic Value Default: 2 mV/V

Min: 0.01 mV/V Max: 10 mV/V
Characteristic value (transmission factor) of the (main) load cell.

Parameters
P05.03 LC Rated Capacity Default: 60 kg

Min: 0.5 kg Max: 220000000 kg
The total of the load cell rated loads for recording the weight.
P05.04 Effective Platform Length Default: 0.5 m

Min: 0.1 m Max: 50 m
Effective (active) length of the weighing platform. In systems with a weighing roller that
rotates in the direction of belt travel, the active length is half of the distance between the
non-weighing rollers on either side of the weighing roller.
P05.05 Lever Ratio Default: 1

Min: 0.01 Max: 2
Lever transmission between the force application at the weighing section and the force on
the load cell. For scales that use levers for the application of force to the load cell, this sets
the ratio between the weight and the force acting on the load cell.
P05.06 Angle Default: 0 Grad

Min: 0 Grad Max: 60 Grad
The inclination of the longitudinal axis to the horizontal axis of the scales with the load cell
installed vertical to the belt.
P05.07 Speed Measurement Default: DI VCU1.DI6 High

Alternative: DI
n/a
Definition of the channel for reading in the signals of the frequency tachometer on the belt
drive

Parameters
P05.08 Source Load Cell Default: LC VCU1.LC1

Alternative: LC
AI
FB
n/a
The definition of the (main) load cell input for recording the load on the belt.. We recom-
mend choosing an input on VCU1.
The signals from up to two measuring points can be logged separately for extended diag-
nostic (compare P05.09 Source Load Cell 2).
Also refer to:

P05.02
P05.03
If AI is selected, refer also to:

P05.10toP05.11
P05.09 Source Load Cell 2 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
LC
AI
FB
The definition of the 2nd load cell input for recording the belt load. We recommend choos-
ing an input on VCU1. The total load is calculated from the total of the signals from the
main and 2nd load cell. The fact that both weights are recorded separately allows diagnos-
tics of the weight calculation.
Also refer to P05.08 Source Load Cell
Note: Both load cells must have the same rated load and sensitivity!
P05.10 Load Cell 1 analog Input Offset Default: 4 mA

Only relevant if P05.08 Source Load Cell = AI.
The input flow for an internal value of the load of 0 %.
Also refer to:

The appendix chapter in the manual → Using alternative signals (such as analog and field-
bus) for DMS inputs
P05.08 Source Load Cell
P05.11 Load Cell 1 analog Input Range

Parameters
P05.11 Load Cell 1 analog Input Range Default: 20 mA

Only relevant if P05.08 Source Load Cell = AI.
The flow for the value set in P05.03 LC Rated Capacity.
Also refer to:

'Appendix' chapter in the manual → Using alternative signals (such as analog and fieldbus)
for DMS inputs'
P05.08 Source Load Cell
P05.12 Load Cell 2 analog Input Offset Default: 4 mA

P05.13 Load Cell 2 analog Input Range Default: 20 mA

7.4.2.6 Parameter Block 06 - Feeder control

The parameters of this group describe the control functions of the basic functionality.
P06.01 Afterflow Totalizer Default: 3 s

Min: 0 s Max: 2000 s
For this time after shutting off, the scale continues to record the resulting quantity conveyed
through the afterflow of bulk solids when the drives run out.
P06.02 Zero Drop-Out Active Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
The zero drop out function sets the display of the flow rate to zero when the load drops
below the threshold value in P06.02 Zero Drop-Out Active. This prevents the totalizing
counter from running on if measuring continues for a longer period while no bulk material
flows. This suppresses small, unavoidable tare errors.
YES: activate the Zero Drop Out system.

NO: Zero Drop Out has no effect. The small operating range is displayed at the measured
value.

Parameters
P06.03 Zero Drop-Out Limit Default: 1 % Q

Min: 0 % Q Max: 10 % Q
Recording the total is suppressed with measurements within this limit around the zero point
to ensure that the counter remains constant when the belt is idle.
No feature appears on the display.
Reference: Nominal Belt Load (service value)
P06.04 Start-Up Mode Default: Circuits

Alternative: Q MIN
Circuits
FAST
The mode for volumetric start-up operation without bulk solids on the belt:
Q-MIN: Start-up mode is finished when the load has exceeded the threshold value P09.05
Limit: Load MIN, however no later than after any belt progress defined by P11.15 Volume-
tric Start-Up.
Circuits: Start-up mode continues until the belt has run the portion defined by P11.15 Volu-
metric Start-Up on the complete belt circuit (belt progress).
FAST: In this mode, the drive is operated at rated speed until at least one of the following
conditions is met:
a) load > P09.05 Limit: Load MIN
b) belt progress > P11.15 Volumetric Start-Up
c) measured flow rate > flow rate setpoint
Once start-up mode has been completed, feeding switches to gravimetric operation if volu-
metric mode has not been explicitly selected.
P06.05 DO: CleanOut Timer Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The cleaning equipment below the weighfeeder, often a simple scraper, can be controlled.
Generally, continuous operation is not necessary for this equipment so that it only has to be
switched on briefly. The operation of this equipment can be monitored.
This parameter defines the output channel for the trigger signal for the cleaning equipment.
Also refer to:

P06.06 CleanOut ON Time
P06.07 CleanOut OFF Time
P06.08 DI: Chain Motion Monitor

Parameters
P06.06 CleanOut ON Time Default: 0.25 h

Min: 0.01 h Max: 1000 h
The duration of switching on cleaning equipment with clocked operation.
Also refer to:

P06.05 DO: CleanOut Timer
P06.07 CleanOut OFF Time
P06.07 CleanOut OFF Time Default: 6 h

Min: 0 h Max: 1001 h
A pause between each time the cleaning equipment is switched on with clocked operation.
Also refer to:

P06.06 CleanOut ON Time
P06.08 DI: Chain Motion Monitor Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
The input channel for the signal for monitoring the running of the cleaning equipment. A
pulse generator is mounted for monitoring on the drive or a roller that is driven by the scra-
per. As long as the cleaning equipment is switched on, it monitors whether a feedback im-
pulse has arrived within the tolerance period.
Also refer to:

P06.09 Chain Motion Delay
P06.10 Event: Chain Motion Monitor
P06.09 Chain Motion Delay Default: 20 s

The tolerance period within which an impulse is expected from the cleaning drive monitor.
Also refer to:

P06.08 DI: Chain Motion Monitor
P06.10 Event: Chain Motion Monitor

Parameters
P06.10 Event: Chain Motion Monitor Default: A

Event Group: WM Number: 06
This event is identified when the cleaning equipment was switched on below the feeder
scale, although there are not any feedback impulses over a time longer than the tolerance
period.
Possible cause:
- the cleaning equipment is blocked
- the supply voltage is lacking for the equipment
- there is a defect on the impulse sensor
Steps to be taken:
Check the cleaning equipment mechanically and electrically
P06.11 Auto Zero Active Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
Preselection of the automatic zeroing system that corrects the zero point after each belt
circuit with an empty belt.
The conditions for identifying that the belt is empty:

P06.14 Limit Value Difference
P06.15 Mean Limit Value
Also refer to:

P06.12 Zeroing Limit
P06.13 Event: Tare Correction
P06.12 Zeroing Limit Default: 5 % Q

Min: 0 % Q Max: 100 % Q
Only relevant if P06.11 Auto Zero Active = YES
The maximum permissible amount of the sum of all zeroing operations of automatic ze-
roing.
Reference: nominal load (service value)
Also refer to:

P06.13 Event: Tare Correction

Parameters
P06.13 Event: Tare Correction Default: W1

Event Group: CA Number: 06
This event is identified if the change in tare identified by the automatic zeroing system ex-
ceeds the threshold value in P06.12 Zeroing Limit.
Possible causes:
- low quantities of bulk material on the belt
- error in the weighing mechanics
Actions:
- visual inspection of the belt and the weighing system.
- run the base tare adjustment program
- check weight measuring using test weights
P06.14 Limit Value Difference Default: 0.5 % Q

Min: 0 % Q Max: 10 % Q
First precondition for the automatic zeroing system. Defines the uniformity of the mean belt
load between two successive belt circuits. The belt is only assumed to be empty once the
weight deviation is lower than this threshold value across two circuits.
Reference value: nominal belt loading (service value)
Also refer to:

P06.11 Auto Zero Active
P06.15 Mean Limit Value
P06.15 Mean Limit Value Default: 1 % Q

Min: 0 % Q Max: 10 % Q
Second precondition for the automatic zeroing system. This defines the max. permissible
mean of belt loading value over two consecutive belt circuits where it is assumed that the
belt is empty.
Reference: Nominal belt load (service value)
Also refer to:

P06.11 Auto Zero Active
P06.14 Limit Value Difference

Parameters
P06.16 Volum on LC failure Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
This parameter defines whether feeding is supposed to switch into volumetric operation if
their is a defect in the main weighing channels.
YES: Feeding functions volumetrically if there is a load cell defect

NO: Feeding continues to function gravimetrically (and possibly with an incorrect actual
feed rate) if there is a load cell defect.
This is only relevant if two weighing channels are used for recording the belt load at the
main weighbridge.
Also refer to:

P05.07 Speed Measurement
P05.09 Source Load Cell 2
P06.17 Event: Volum. caused by LC-error Default: IG

Event Group: CO Number: 05
This event is identified when the scale has switched to volumetric operation because of a
defect in measured value acquisition. This defect is only identified when two weighing
channels are used for main measured value acquisition and the measured values of both
channels depart from one another by more than 13 %.
Possible causes:
- blocked material in the weighing range
- non-symmetrical belt loading
Only relevant if P06.16 Volum on LC failure = YES
7.4.2.7 Parameter Block 07 - Feeder Monitoring

This parameter group can be used to cause various feeder operating conditions either to produce an alarm
(A) and trip the feeder or to produce a warning (W1 or W2).
P07.01 Event: Stand-By Default: W2

Event Group: SC Number: 02
Scales are in standby operation, i.e. the controller magnitude to the feed drive is smaller
than the threshold value set in P07.02 Stand-By Limit Value. The feeder drive is switched
off. The 'running' state will still be displayed outwards.
This function protects the motor from overheating at very low speeds or when idling.
Actions:
Key in the larger setpoint and check P07.02 Stand-By Limit Value.

Parameters
P07.02 Stand-By Limit Value Default: 2 % Io

Min: 0 % Io Max: 100 % Io
If the controller magnitude is below the threshold value, the feed drive switched off to pro-
tect the motor from overheating.
Also refer to: P07.01 Event: Stand-By
P07.03 Event: Tachometer Input Default: A

The signals at the feeder drive's impulse speedometer input are outside of the specified
range.
Possible causes:
- there is a fault in the speed impulse sensor cable (check the shielding and the wiring)
- the sensor has been incorrectly calibrated
P07.04 Event: Error LC Input Default: A

The load cell cable is improperly connected, not connected or has been interrupted. The
load cell may be faulty.
Measures:
- check the cabling and the load cell
- check the load cell
Note:
The power supply must be switched off and on again if the scales cannot be switched on
even after the error has been rectified.
P07.05 Event: LC Input < MIN Default: A

Event Group: LO Number: 01
The load cell load is less than 3 % of the sum of the load cell nominal loads.
Possible causes:
- force shunts or pressure ratios can reduce significantly the load on the load cell
- incorrect cabling
- faulty load cell

Parameters
P07.06 Event: LC Input > MAX Default: A

Event Group: HI Number: 01
The load acting on the load cell is greater than 110 % of the sum of the nominal loads of
the load cells.
Measuring range end:

125 % for load cells with 2.85 mV/V
175 % for load cells with 2 mV/V
Possible causes:
- Shunt forces or compression ratios bring about incorrect load cell loading
- incorrect cabling
- faulty load cell
P07.07 Event: Setpoint Limited Default: W1

Cause of the event:

Depending on the respective mode of operation:
a) The setpoint is limited to P03.01 Nominal Flow Rate in gravimetric operation.
b) The setpoint is limited to three times the value of P03.01 Nominal Flow Rate in volume-
tric operation.
P07.08 Event: Power Failure Default: A

Event Group: WE Number: 01
This event is identified once the power supply is restored.
The scales will not switch on automatically, regardless of the event class. The event must
first be acknowledged and the command to start given again before the scales will restart.
P07.09 Event: Memory Default: A

The program and parameters memory are checked cyclically. An error has occurred during
that. The scales will no longer function correctly.
Steps to take:
- load the factory settings
- Normally the hardware has to be replaced.

Parameters
P07.10 Source Emergency Setpoint Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
FB
If the emergency setpoint is activated, setpoints greater than the emergency setpoint
(P07.11 Emergency Setpoint) are limited to its value.
The message SC01 is triggered (P07.07 Event: Setpoint Limited). A setpoint entered by
keyboard is automatically limited to the emergency setpoint.
P07.11 Emergency Setpoint Default: 0 kg/h

Min: 0 kg/h Max: 220000000 kg/h
If the emergency setpoint is activated (input P07.10 Source Emergency Setpoint), setpoints
greater than the emergency setpoint (P07.11) are limited to its value.
The message SC01 is triggered (P07.07 Event: Setpoint Limited). A setpoint entered by
keyboard is automatically limited to the emergency setpoint.
P07.12 Event: Analog Input < Offset Default: A

One of the analog inputs has a smaller signal than the zero-point offset that was set.
A tolerance of 0.4 mA has been set to avoid constant setting and clearing of the input sig-
nal, in case this input signal should happen to be unsettled.
7.4.2.8 Parameter Block 08 - Filters

The parameters of this group define the time constants of the filters for measurement and display.
All filters are of the 1st order (exponentially), i.e. approximately 2/3 of the final value is reached after the
time set if there is an abrupt change in the signal.
Long times result in a smooth, slowly-updating display.
P08.01 Filter: Actual Flow Rate Default: 3 s

Min: 0 s Max: 600 s
Filter time constant for the display and for outputs of the actual flow rate at the operating
panel, EasyServe and fieldbus. Has no effect on the feeder regulation.
P08.02 Filter: Actual Flow Rate analog Default: 3 s

Min: 0 s Max: 600 s
Filter time constant for the actual flow rate analog output. The filter can have an impact on
the control characteristics with an externally closed control circuit through the analog value.

Parameters
P08.03 Filter: Belt Load Default: 3 s

Min: 0 s Max: 600 s
Filter time constant for displaying the belt load. Has no effect on the feeder regulation.
P08.04 Filter: Belt Speed Default: 3 s

Min: 0 s Max: 600 s
Filter time constant for displaying the belt speed.
7.4.2.9 Parameter Block 09 - Limit Values

The parameters of this group define the limits for process values and specify the event classes of the asso-
ciated events.
Events that can only occur with regular feed operation are only monitored 10 s after beginning feed opera-
tion.
P09.01 Limit: Actual Flow Rate MIN Default: 5 % Io

Min: -10 % Io Max: 200 % Io
Lower threshold for the actual feed rate.
Reference : P03.01 Nominal Flow Rate
P09.02 Event: Actual Flow Rate MIN Default: W1

The actual feed rate is lower than the minimum value P09.01 Limit: Actual Flow Rate MIN.
Possible causes:
- no bulk material
- disturbance forces from force shunts or pressures acting on the weighing equipment
- feed rate setpoint too low
P09.03 Limit: Actual Flow Rate MAX Default: 120 % Io

Min: -10 % Io Max: 200 % Io
Upper threshold for the actual feed rate.
Reference : P03.01 Nominal Flow Rate

Parameters
P09.04 Event: Actual Flow Rate MAX Default: W1

Actual feed rate higher than the maximum value set in P09.03 Limit: Actual Flow Rate MAX
Possible causes:
- bulk material shooting out of the discharge chute
- feed rate setpoint too large
P09.05 Limit: Load MIN Default: 60 % Q

Min: -10 % Q Max: 200 % Q
Lower limit for belt load.
P09.06 Event: Load MIN Default: W1

The belt load is less than the minimum value set in P09.05 Limit: Load MIN
Possible causes:
- no bulk material
P09.07 Limit: Load MAX Default: 120 % Q

Min: -10 % Q Max: 200 % Q
Upper limit for the belt load.
P09.08 Event: Load MAX Default: W1

The belt load is greater than the maximum value set in P09.07 Limit: Load MAX
Possible causes:

Parameters
P09.09 Limit: Speed MIN Default: 5 % V

Min: -10 % V Max: 200 % V
Lower limit for belt speed.
Reference: P03.02 Nominal Speed
P09.10 Event: Speed MIN Default: W1

The belt speed is less than the minimum value set in P09.09 Limit: Speed MIN
P09.11 Limit: Speed MAX Default: 120 % V

Min: -10 % V Max: 200 % V
Upper limit for belt speed.
P09.12 Event: Speed MAX Default: W1

The belt speed is greater than the maximum value set in P09.11 Limit: Speed MAX
7.4.2.10 Parameter Block 10 - Calibration Data

The parameters of this group contain the setpoints for setup programs and their outputs. Adjustment values
that have been lost can be completely reconstructed by entering earlier values.
If replacements are made it is sufficient to load the previously set parameters into the new unit. No
readjustment is necessary.
P10.01 LC Filter Default: 0.25 s

Min: 0.25 s Max: 300 s
The load cell filters affects all load cell related measuring values. In general this value
should be left at the factory setting.
Note: filtering the load cell signal also effects the regulating action.
P10.02 Range Correction Default: 1

Min: 0.5 Max: 2
The parameter affects the load measurement F proportionally.
Q(corrected) = Q(measured) * P10.02

Parameters
P10.03 Belt Circuit Time Default: 30 s

Determines the measurement period for the calibration program LB: Pulses/Belt. Usually,
the time chosen is the time required for one belt circuit.
P10.04 Calibration Weight Default: 10 kg

Min: 0.001 kg Max: 22000 kg
Belt load measurement can be verified using test weights. This is done by running
the adjustment program CW: Span Calibrationwithout flow of material.
The test weight as it acts on the load cell is keyed in.
Also refer to: P10.02 Range Correction
P10.05 Basic Tare Default: 0 kg/m

Min: 0 kg/m Max: 10000 kg/m
The result of the TW: Tare calibration program in accordance with the dead weight without
the flow of bulk solids.
P10.06 Tare Correction Default: 0 kg/m

Min: -1000 kg/m Max: 1000 kg/m
The result of the adjustment program >0< Zero Set or the automatic material check (KME).
P10.07 Belt Circuit No. Default: 1000000 I/B

Min: 0 I/B Max: 9000000 I/B
Number of impulses from the pulse generator at the belt drive that constitute one belt rota-
tion.
The result of the calibration program LB: Pulses/Belt. This defines the duration of calibra-
tion programs.
Divided by P05.01 Pulses per length, this gives the belt length in meters.
7.4.2.11 Parameter Block 11 - Rate controller

The parameters of this group define the behavior of the feed rate controller.
Also refer to the controller block diagrams in the appendices.

Parameters
P11.01 Optimize Controller Default: STANDARD

Alternative: STANDARD
UNIVERS
STANDARD: standard controller adjustment for the weighfeeder application.
UNIVERS: user-defined controller adjustment for special cases (refer to appendix).
The appendix contains a detailed wiring diagram and applications for special cases.
Caution! The parameters from P11.19 are reset to the factory settings when changing from
UNIVERS to STANDARD.
P11.02 P-Component KP Default: 0.04 mA/%

Min: 0 mA/% Max: 1000 mA/%
Proportional component of the feed rate regulator.
Special case: KP = 0 results in an I-regulator
Reference value: P03.01 Nominal Flow Rate
Also refer to:

A regulator block diagram can be found in the appendices
P11.03 I-Component TN Default: 1 s

Min: 0 s Max: 60000 s
Controller readjusting time.
TN is the reciprocal value of the integration constants KI, i.e. a larger value means a slower
controller.
KI = 1/TN
TN in%/(mA/s)
TN = 0 results in a proportional controller.
Also refer to:

A regulator block diagram can be found in the appendix
P11.04 Filter: Deviation Default: 3 s

Min: 0 s Max: 600 s
Filter time constant for all displays and printouts of the control deviation.

Parameters
P11.05 Time Deviation Default: 20 s

Min: 0 s Max: 600 s
Duration for which a control deviation above the threshold in P11.06 Threshold Deviation
will be tolerated. The event 'control deviation' is identified once the time has been ex-
ceeded.
Simultaneously P11.05 Time Deviation functions as a time constant for the filter that con-
tains the value of the control deviation. A 'control deviation' event is also identified if the
filtered result exceeds the threshold value P11.08 Deviation abs. max..
Also refer to:

P11.06 Threshold Deviation
P11.07 Factor Deviation
P11.08 Deviation abs. max.
P11.09 Event: Deviation
P11.06 Threshold Deviation Default: 5 %

Min: 0 % Max: 100 %
Maximum permissible control deviation.
Reference: P03.01 Nominal Flow Rate.
Also refer to: P11.05 Time Deviation, P11.09 Event: Deviation
P11.07 Factor Deviation Default: 1

Min: 0 Max: 1
An event message as per P11.09 Event: Deviation will be identified if the absolute value of
the control deviation for the duration P11.05 Time Deviation is greater than the threshold
P11.06 Threshold Deviation.
With a setpoint of 100%, the effective threshold is always determined by the parameter
P11.06 Threshold Deviation. For lower setpoints the threshold can be reduced with para-
meter P11.07 Factor Deviation.
Examples:
P11.07 = 0 : Effective threshold = P11.06 × Setpoint / P03.01
P11.07 = 1 : Effective threshold = P11.06
P11.08 Deviation abs. max. Default: 100 %

Min: 0.1 % Max: 1000 %
The amount of the control deviation will be filtered (filter time constant: P11.05 Time Devia-
tion). If the filter output exceeds the limit set here a 'control deviation' event will be identified
(P11.09 Event: Deviation). The filter is reset when the scales are switched off.

Parameters
P11.09 Event: Deviation Default: W1

Maximum Deviation exceeded. The actual feed rate has deviated to far from the setpoint
over too long a period of time.
Possible causes:
- material has been incorrectly handled:
- the bulk material is flowing irregularly or cannot be discharged satisfactorily
- arching in the feed hopper
- there is a backup on the discharge side
- a large quantity of material continues to trickle from the feeder
- the controller has at times come against its limits

- error in the electronics
- check the cable to the external output regulator and to the motor. Check the output regu-
lator settings (current limiting, speed range)
- calibration error: during initial calibration the regulator was set at such a critical value that
minor changes in the overall properties of the system lead to unreliable operation.
Also refer to: P11.08 Deviation abs. max., P11.07 Factor Deviation, P11.06 Threshold Dev-
iation, P11.05 Time Deviation
P11.10 Event: Controller Limited Default: W1

The Controller Magnitude of the feed rate regulator has reached the upper response thre-
shold. After a time message HI05 (P11.09) will be output.
1. No material is flowing or material flow is irregular.
2. The external output regulator has been incorrectly set.
Step to take: check the material discharge and the Controller Magnitude (service value Y).
At Nominal Flow Rate Y should be between about 10...14 mA.
P11.11 Lower Limit Default: 0 mA

Lower limit for the regulator actuating variable.
If transfer is made with currents from 4 ... 20 mA, the parameter should be set at least to
4 mA. P11.13 Controller Magnitude Offset must be set to a value equal to or greater than
P11.11 Lower Limit.
Also refer to: P11.13 Controller Magnitude Offset

Parameters
P11.12 Upper Limit Default: 20 mA

Upper limit for the regulator actuating variable.
With inputs lower than 20 mA the limit depends on the size of the threshold value.
Also refer to:

A description of the effect of the upper limit can be found in the appendices
P11.13 Controller Magnitude Offset Default: 0 mA

Offset of the actuating variable by a constant value. The offset takes effect before the limi-
tation of the actuating variable.
Generally the same values are chosen for P11.13 Controller Magnitude Offset as for
P11.11 Lower Limit.
Optimization:
- fill the feeder hopper with bulk material
- calculate the actuating variable Y1, the value at which the discharge unit begins to work
- calculate the actuating variable Y2, the value at which reduction of the feed is suspended.
For feeders that are operated with feed rate setpoints of 0:
P11.13 Controller Magnitude Offset = Y2
All other feeders:
P11.13 Controller Magnitude Offset = Y1
Note: P11.13 Controller Magnitude Offset must be equal to or greater than P11.11 Lower
Limit.
P11.14 Position at STOP Default: 0

Alternative: 0
Lower Limit
If the scales are switched off the actuating variable can be set to 0 or to the offset value
P11.11 Lower Limit.
P11.15 Volumetric Start-Up Default: 0 Circuits

Min: 0 Circuits Max: 2 Circuits
The maximum duration of volumetric operation once the scale has been switched on. If
selected, feeding will switch to gravimetric operation once the startup time has past.
This duration is given in fractions of one complete belt circuit.
This function improves the startup with an empty feeder.
Also refer to:

P06.04 Start-Up Mode

Parameters
P11.16 Volumetric Clearance Default: 0 Circuits

Min: 0 Circuits Max: 2 Circuits
Duration of clearance mode. The flow gate is switched off before the feeder discharge ele-
ment (belt drive) to clear the system. This allows the discharge element to be emptied.
The duration is given as a fraction of a complete belt circuit.
P11.17 Setpoint Offset Default: 4 mA

Input current offset for an analog setpoint of 0 % of Nominal Flow Rate.
This parameter takes effect only if P04.02 Feedrate Setpoint has been set to AI.
P11.18 Setpoint Range Default: 20 mA

Input current for the analog setpoint of 100 % of the Nominal Flow Rate.
The range and offset parameters take effect only if P04.02 Feedrate Setpoint has been set
to AI.
P11.19 Store Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
YES-A
Saving the control magnitude before turning off the scale. The next start will begin with this
value.
NO: do not save

YES: save
YES-A: only save if the scale has not broken down due to an alarm
P11.20 Volumetric Mode Default: Qconst

Alternative: Qconst
Yconst
Specifying volumetric mode.
Qconst: V * Qconst is effective as the actual value.
V represents the instantaneous belt speed, Qconst the stored belt load value (rated belt
load or most recent measured value).
The scales are speed-controlled.
Yconst: the controller is switched off, P11.21 Bypass only is effective.
For further details see the section 'Details: Regulation' in the appendices.

Parameters
P11.21 Bypass Default: 0 mA

Constant for the flow rate setpoint pilot control.
One value is superimposed additively on the actuating variable, proportionally to the preset
setpoint. This parameter gives the bypass value for the nominal setpoint.
Also refer to: the controller block diagram in the appendix.
P11.22 Setpoint Filter 1st Ord Default: 0 s

The time constant for a 1st-order filter in the setpoint branch. Does not function for the by-
pass.
To prevent overshoot, the setpoint is decoupled from the actual controller

through a reconstruction of the controlled member. The setpoint filters P11.22 and P11.23
delay the controller while the bypass comes to the controller magnitude output without a
delay.
The filter is switched off with P11.22 = 0.
Also refer to: the controller figure in the appendix
P11.23 Setpoint Filter 2nd Ord Default: 0 s

The time constant for a second filter in the setpoint branch. Does not function for the by-
pass.
To prevent overshoot, the setpoint is decoupled from the actual controller

through a reconstruction of the controlled member. The setpoint filters P11.22 and P11.23
delay the controller while the bypass comes to the controller magnitude output without a
delay.
The filter is switched off with P11.23 = 0.
Also refer to: the controller figure in the appendix
P11.24 Set/Act Sources Default: I

Alternative: I
Q
Selecting the process variable:
I: feed rate is regulated to the feed rate setpoint

Q: belt load is regulated to the belt load setpoint

Parameters
P11.25 Adaptation 1 Default: NO

Alternative: NO
W
Controlled adaption of the controller input
The adaption means that the controller can be adapted to variable route reinforcements or
the
guidance behavior can be improved.
7.4.2.12 Parameter Block 12 - Analog Outputs

The parameters in this group select the control source for the analog output channels. On the VCU 20104
controller only one analog channel is available and it is set to feedrate feedback by default.
P12.01 AO: Setpoint Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AO
Analog output channel for the setpoint flow rate.
Also refer to: P12.02 Setpoint Offset, P12.03 Setpoint Range
P12.02 Setpoint Offset Default: 4 mA

The output current for the value of the setpoint feed rate of 0 %.
Reference: P03.01 Nominal Flow Rate
Also refer to: P12.01 AO: Setpoint
P12.03 Setpoint Range Default: 20 mA

The output current for the value of a setpoint flow rate of 100 %.
Also refer to: P12.01 AO: Setpoint
P12.04 AO: Actual Flow Rate Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AO
Analog output channel for the actual flow rate.
Also refer to: P12.05 Flow Rate Offset, P12.06 Flow Rate Range

Parameters
P12.05 Flow Rate Offset Default: 4 mA

The output current for the value of the actual flow rate of 0 %.
Also refer to: P12.04 AO: Actual Flow Rate
P12.06 Flow Rate Range Default: 20 mA

The output current for the value of the actual flow rate of 100 %.
Also refer to: P12.04 AO: Actual Flow Rate
P12.07 AO: Belt Load Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AO
Analog output channel for the belt load.
P12.08 Belt Load Offset Default: 4 mA

The output flow for the value of the belt load of 0 %.
Reference: nominal belt loading (service value)
Also refer to: P12.07 AO: Belt Load
P12.09 Belt Load Range Default: 20 mA

The output flow for the value of the belt load of 100 %.
Also refer to: P12.07 AO: Belt Load
P12.10 AO: Speed Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AO
Analog output channel for the belt speed.

Parameters
P12.11 Speed Offset Default: 4 mA

The output flow for the value of the belt speed of 0 %.
Also refer to: P12.10 AO: Speed
P12.12 Speed Range Default: 20 mA

The output flow for the value of the belt speed of 100 %.
Also refer to: P12.10 AO: Speed
P12.13 AO: Deviation Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AO
Analog output channel for the control deviation.
Also refer to: P12.14 Deviation Offset, P12.15 Deviation Range
P12.14 Deviation Offset Default: 4 mA

The value of the control deviation 'zero' lies between the offset and 20 mA.
Also refer to: P12.13 AO: Deviation
P12.15 Deviation Range Default: 20 mA

The output current is calculated according to the following formula:
Current = 10 mA + (P12.14)/2 + (P12.15 - P12.14) × control deviation / 100 %

Parameters
P12.16 AO: Motor Speed Control Default: AO VCU1.AO1

Alternative: AO
n/a
Analog output channel for the actuating variable Y of the feed rate regulator.
Also refer to:

- the parameters in the 'regulator' block
- the regulator diagram in the appendices
7.4.2.13 Parameter Block 13 - Digital Inputs

Inputs
The parameters in this group are used to associate various controller functions with specific digital input
channels and to associate events with those functions. Most of the functions specified in this group are hard
wired on the controller and cannot be changed.
P13.01 Event: External Event 1 Default: A

External interference signal at fault input 1.
Possible cause: depends on the external cabling. Usually: an error in the main drive
P13.02 DI: External Event 1 Default: DI VCU1.DI1 Low

Alternative: DI
n/a
Input 1 for an external interference signal.
The input is also linked to the internal interference logic (block: interlocking).
Also refer to: P13.01 Event: External Event 1
P13.03 Event: External Event 2 Default: A

Possible cause: depends on the external cabling.

Parameters
P13.04 DI: External Event 2 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
P13.05 Event: External Event 3 Default: IG


Alternative: n/a
DI
P13.07 Event: External Event 4 Default: IG


Alternative: n/a
DI

Parameters
P13.09 DI: Acknowledge Events Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
Digital input for acknowledging event messages.
Caution: the level is static and may not be on permanently (otherwise continuous acknowl-
edgement).
P13.10 DI: Local Mode Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
Feedback from the local operating console VLG that has been switched to 'local'.
The DISOCONT Tersus is now a passive display device only. It is switched to 'volumetric'
automatically to suppress event messages. The DISOCONT Tersus switches itself off when
it is switched back.
P13.11 DI: Volumetric Mode Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
Digital input for switching the scales to volumetric operation, not synchronized with previous
operation.
Also refer to: P13.12 DI: Volumetric synchron
P13.12 DI: Volumetric synchron Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
Switches to volumetric operation while the actuating variable continues continuously. The
actuating variable is calculated as an average of the actuating variable obtained during
regular operation. Alterations to the feed rate setpoint automatically adjust the actuating
variable.
Also refer to: P13.11 DI: Volumetric Mode
P13.13 Event: NAMUR Error VCU1-DI6 Default: A

The sensor signal at the input exceeds the permissible level.
Possible cause:
- cable to the sensor is broken
- the sensor is faulty
- there is a short circuit in the cable connection
- an external signal sensor is outputting the incorrect signal level

Parameters
P13.14 Event: NAMUR Error VCU1-DI7 Default: A

Possible cause:
P13.15 Event: NAMUR Error VCU2-DI6 Default: IG

Possible cause:

Possible cause:

Possible cause:

Parameters

Possible cause:
P13.19 DI: Reset Totalizer 1 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
Digital input for canceling totalizing counter 1. The positive flank is the actuator.
P13.20 DI: Reset Totalizer 2 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
Digital input for clearing totalizing counter 2. The positive flank takes effect.
P13.21 Belt Limit Switch Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
The input channel for connecting the signal from a belt limit switch. The 'belt skew' event is
identified when the switch responds.
Also refer to: P13.22 Event: Limit Switch
P13.22 Event: Limit Switch Default: IG

The event is identified when the belt limit switch has responded.
Possible causes:
- extreme belt off-center run
- contaminated limit switch
- defect on automatic belt tracking
- defect on the belt
Actions:
- make a visual check of the belt run
- correct the belt run with the belt tightening equipment
- check the belt tightening and automatic belt tracking

Parameters
P13.23 DI: Zero Set Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
Input channel for starting the 'zeroing program' with an empty belt (calibration program >0<
Zero Set).
P13.24 Event: NAMUR Error VMO1-DI7 Default: IG

Possible cause:
P13.25 Event: NAMUR Error VMO2-DI7 Default: IG

Possible cause:
7.4.2.14 Parameter Block 14 - Digital Outputs

The parameters in this group are used to associate various controller functions with specific digital output
channels. Most of the functions specified in this group are hard wired at assembly.
P14.01 DO: Scale Start Default: DO VCU1.DO1 High

Alternative: DO
n/a
Sends a start command to the feeder's main drive.
P14.02 DO: Feeder Started Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Digital output signal used to display the ON or OFF scales states.

Parameters
P14.03 DO: Start Prefeeder Default: DO VCU1.DO2 High

Alternative: DO
n/a
The digital output for turning the prefeeder on or off.
An output should be selected on the main VCU (local bus address 1) if there is active belt
load regulation of the P25.01 type = "PULSE" .
P14.04 DO: ALARM Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The output becomes active if any alarm is triggered (common alarm). The scales have
failed.
P14.05 DO: Deviation Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The output signal becomes active when the monitoring activates the control deviation
(P11.09 Event: Deviation).
This contact output is independent of the event class.
P14.06 DO: Actual Flow Rate MIN Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The output signal becomes active if the feed rate falls below the minimum feed rate (P09.01
Limit: Actual Flow Rate MIN).
The contact output is independent of the event class.
P14.07 DO: Actual Flow Rate MAX Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The output signal becomes active when the maximum feed rate (P09.03 Limit: Actual Flow
Rate MAX) is exceeded.

Parameters
P14.08 DO: Load MIN Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The output signal becomes active when it falls below the minimum belt load (P09.05 Limit:
Load MIN).
P14.09 DO: Load MAX Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The output signal becomes active when it exceeds the maximum belt load (P09.07 Limit:
Load MAX).
P14.10 DO: Speed MIN Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The output signal becomes active when it falls below the minimum belt speed (P09.09 Lim-
it: Speed MIN).
P14.11 DO: Speed MAX Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The output signal becomes active when it exceeds the maximum belt speed (P09.11 Limit:
Speed MAX).
P14.12 DO: Volumetric Mode Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The output becomes active if the scales are switched to a volumetric mode.
P14.13 DO: Local Mode Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The output becomes active if the scales are switched to local mode.

Parameters
P14.14 DO: WARNING Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The output signal becomes active if any warning is pending.
P14.15 DO: Keyboard Mode Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The output becomes active when keyboard mode is preselected.
(The DISOCONT Tersus is operated using the operating console VHM or EasyServe).
P14.16 DO: Zero Set OK Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
This contact can monitor the successful conclusion of the zero setting program (*).
The digital output is set to be inactive when starting zero setting. After completing the con-
trol, the contact is set active again if the results are within the allowed boundaries.
(*) Refer to the calibration program >0< Zero Set
7.4.2.15 Parameter Block 15 - Batch Mode

The parameters of this group define and optimize behavior in batch mode. Batching mode is used to ensure
that the feeder turns off independantly after conveying a preset quantity.
Also refer to the chapter in the manual:

'General Diagram' → 'Batching'
'Appendix'' → 'Batch Operation Control'
P15.01 Batch Mode Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
Sets whether batch mode can be run or not.
In addition, "batching" "selection" has to be selected with the operating menu .
Also refer to the chapter in the manual:

'General Diagram' → 'Batching'
'Appendix'' → 'Batch Operation Control'
P15.02 Batch Setpoint Source Default: OP

Alternative: OP
FB
AI
Establish the source that will determine the batch.

Parameters
P15.03 Adaptation Time Default: 3 s

Establishes the duration of the entire dribble feed phase.
P15.04 Correction Amount Default: 0 kg

Min: -100000 kg Max: 1000000 kg
The start of the adaptation time is shifted by this quantity. An adaptation time = 0 corres-
ponds to a pre-threshold.
The correction quantity should be set to 0 for initial startup. The value of Correction Amount
is adapted after each batch if P15.05 Adaptation Factor is not equal to zero so that the
defect of the next batch is minimized.
P15.05 Adaptation Factor Default: 0.5

Min: 0 Max: 1
The application point of the switch-off function is adapted automatically so that the system
is better adapted to the actual conditions for the next batch.
Adaptation Factor = 0 : no adaptation

Adaptation Factor = 1 : full adaptation
Interim values result in filtered adjustment; this should be used in particular for systems with
poor reproducibility.
The result of the event is stored in P15.04 Correction Amount.
P15.04 NEW = P15.04 OLD - Batch Residual Amount * P15.05
P15.06 Batch Automatic Record Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
YES: automatic print after each completed batch.
NO: Printout of the batch can only be made via menu.
The printout can be made only after a batch has ended automatically or manually. The
printout is stored to a file that can be read using the Web-Server.
P15.07 DI: Batch Terminate Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
Digital input signal for stopping a current batch.

Parameters
P15.08 DO: Batch Running Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The output becomes active if a batch is run.
The signal is active at the start of the batch and deactivated again when the batch has been
completed. It remains active if batch operation is continuous.
P15.09 DO: Dribble Feed Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The output becomes active in the dribble feed phase.
P15.10 DO: Full Feed Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The output becomes active in the full feed phase.
P15.11 Analog Setpoint Relat. Default: 1000 kg

Min: 0 kg Max: 220000000 kg
Effective only when P15.02 Batch Setpoint Source = AI
The batch setpoint resulting for an input flow corresponding to the parameter P15.12 Batch
Setpoint Range.
P15.12 Batch Setpoint Range Default: 20 mA

Input current for a batch setpoint that corresponds to P15.11 Analog Setpoint Relat..
P15.13 Batch Setpoint Offset Default: 4 mA

Input current for a batch setpoint of 0. Negative values can bridge the input area.
For example:
P15.11 = 1000 kg
P15.12 = 20 mA
P15.13 = -20 mA
0 ... 20 mA then correspond to 500 ... 1000 kg

Parameters
P15.14 Batch Tolerance Default: 100000 kg

If the batch lies outside of the tolerance range, the maximum alteration of
the correction quantity at adaptation is the entered tolerance value. Also, an event is identi-
fied.
Also refer to: P15.15 Event: Out of Tolerance
P15.15 Event: Out of Tolerance Default: W2

Event Group: MF Number: 06
The batch result is outside the tolerance range.
Possible causes:
- highly erratic material flow
- altered feeder discharge behavior
- error in weight calculation due to disturbance forces
P15.16 Pre-cut-off Amount Default: 0 kg

The digital output P15.17 DO: Pre-cut-off is set if the remaining quantity of the batch drops
below the value in the parameter P15.16. The contact continues to be set until the batch is
finished.
P15.17 DO: Pre-cut-off Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The digital output P15.17 is set if the remaining quantity of the batch drops below the value
in the parameter P15.16 Pre-cut-off Amount. The contact continues to be set until the batch
is finished.
P15.18 Batch Setpoint Limit Default: 1000000 kg

Min: 1 kg Max: 100000000 kg
Upper threshold for batch setpoint entry. The threshold is used to prevent incorrect entries
and thus overflows.
Also refer to: P15.19 Event: Batch setpoint Limit

Parameters
P15.19 Event: Batch setpoint Limit Default: W1

Erroneously entered batch setpoint. The value entered is reduced to the permissible upper
limit in P15.18 Batch Setpoint Limit.
Possible causes:
- incorrect entry
- incorrect upper threshold
Also refer to: P15.18 Batch Setpoint Limit
P15.20 Batch behaviour after power down Default: Cancel

Alternative: Continue
Cancel
Defines behavior after a power down:
Cancel: the batch begun before the power down is aborted. A new batch is begun with the
current setpoint.
Continue: the batch begun before the power down is completed.
7.4.2.16 Parameter Block 16 - Maintenance interval

The parameters of this group define maintenance intervals and the internal accuracy analysis function.
P16.01 Maintenance Electric Default: 3000 h

Min: 1 h Max: 10000 h
Indication of maintenance work that may need to be performed, dependent on the duty
cycle of the power supply. This parameter defines the interval between maintenance work.
Also refer to: P16.02 Event: Maint. Electric
P16.02 Event: Maint. Electric Default: IG

The sum of the times during which the mains voltage is on is greater than the time P16.01
Maintenance Electric.
A message occurs after each expired time interval. The message may indicate service work
required.

Parameters
P16.03 Maintenance Feeder Run Default: 3000 h

Min: 1 h Max: 10000 h
Indication of maintenance work that may need to be performed, dependent on the duty
cycle of the scales (scales ON). This parameter defines the interval between maintenance
work.
Also refer to: P16.04 Event: Maint.Feeder Run
P16.04 Event: Maint.Feeder Run Default: IG

The sum of the runtimes of the conveying elements is greater than the time P16.03 Main-
tenance Feeder Run.
A message occurs after each expired time interval. The message may indicate service work
required.
7.4.2.17 Parameter Block 17 - VAP

If measurement is made at the discharge point VAP, the weighbridge measuring point is repositioned to the
material discharge point by a delay element. The totalized amount of material discharged is directly record-
ed. The belt sensor has to be installed and evaluated.
Note for the weighfeeders: if VAP is active, we recommend switching on automatic belt influence compensa-
tion BIC.
The conditions: The ratio of the 'distance from the center of the weighbridge to material discharge' to the
'total belt length' is known.
P17.01 VAP Active Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
Activates the delay for the belt load used for regulation for the time required for the material
to reach the discharge point.
P17.02 Platform Dis.Length Default: 0 % LB

Min: 0 % LB Max: 50 % LB
The space from the middle of the weighbridge to the material dispatch in % of the entire
belt length (refer to P10.07 Belt Circuit No.)
7.4.2.18 Parameter Block 18 - Belt Monitoring

The parameters in this group control the Belt Motion Monitor (BMM).

Parameters
P18.01 Belt Sensor Active Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
The belt sensor and sensor surface in the conveyor belt are used for identifying Belt Drift
and Slip Value and synchronizing adaptive belt influence compensation (BIC).
The belt sensor must be activated and the signal input defined in order to apply adaptive
belt influence compensation (P18.03 BIC Active), basic slip control (P18.12 Event: Slip) and
basic belt motion monitoring (P18.08 Event: Belt Drift).
See also:
P18.02 DI: Source Belt Sensor
P18.04 Sensor Length
P18.05 Sensor Width
P18.06 Sensor Offset
P18.02 DI: Source Belt Sensor Default: DI VCU1.DI7 High

Alternative: DI
n/a
The digital input for the belt sensor. This function can be checked with the corresponding
service value.
DI: A DI6, DI7 sensor input should be used.

n/a: BIC and the belt monitoring functions are inactive.
P18.03 BIC Active Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
Automatic belt influence compensation (BIC) monitors and corrects the belt influence. As
with belt monitoring it requires a sensor and sensor surface.
Note:
Initial startup is made without active BIC.
Characteristics:
After belt influence compensation is activated the influence that the conveyor belt has on
weight measurement is offset after approximately ten belt circuits.
P18.04 Sensor Length Default: 8.2 cm

Min: 0.01 cm Max: 400 cm
Length of the metallic markings worked into the belt in the direction of belt travel.

Parameters
P18.05 Sensor Width Default: 12 cm

Width of the metallic markings worked into the belt at right angles to the direction of belt
travel.
P18.06 Sensor Offset Default: 0 cm

Min: -400 cm Max: 400 cm
The zero point of recording the belt drift can be corrected with the offset. Unfortunately, this
restricts the maximum display zone. This is why greater differences should be calibrated by
mechanically shifting the sensor.
The new display = the old display - the offset
P18.07 Belt Drift Default: 3 cm

Threshold value for belt misalignment identification to generate an event message Event:
Belt Drift.
P18.08 Event: Belt Drift Default: W1

The belt has exceeded the tolerance levels set.

Steps:
1. Remove any soiling to the tail and drive pulleys
2. Align the belt
Monitoring may also be subject to error. Therefore: keep an eye on the service value for the
belt motion sensor and correct any errors that may arise.
Related threshold value: Belt Drift
P18.09 Belt Skew Default: 4 cm

Threshold of the belt drift for detection of event Event: Belt Skew.
P18.10 Event: Belt Skew Default: A

Belt has run off-center. Feeder is no longer operable.

Action: See Event: Belt Drift
Related threshold: Belt Skew

Parameters
P18.11 Slip Value Default: 2 % LB

The permitted slip of the belt over one complete revolution or the permitted change in
length of the conveyor belt in % of the total belt length.
There is a Event: Slip event message if it exceeds the limit

and the P18.15 DO: Belt Slip digital output is set.
P18.12 Event: Slip Default: W1

This event is identified if the belt motion does not correspond to that predicted by the motor
revolutions.
Possible causes:
- belt is slipping at the drive pulley
- withdrawal forces are too high
- gearing is defective
- belt or drive pulley heavily soiled
Steps:
- visual inspection of the belt and the bulk material flow
P18.13 DO: Belt Drift Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The digital output to show the event of drift.
Also refer to: P18.07 Belt Drift and P18.08 Event: Belt Drift
The output operates independently of the event class of the corresponding event.
P18.14 DO: Belt Skew Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Digital output to show the belt skew event.
Also refer to: P18.09 Belt Skew and P18.10 Event: Belt Skew

Parameters
P18.15 DO: Belt Slip Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Digital output to show Event: Slip.
Also refer to P18.11 Slip Value
P18.16 DI: BIC freeze Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
The BIC values currently running in are frozen when this digital input is set.
This prevents the values already ascertained from being falsified on belt loads that fluctuate
substantially.
7.4.2.19 Parameter Block

Block 19 - Communication EasyServe
The parameters of this group define the parameters for serial communication with EasyServe via RS232 or
RS485. These parameters have no function if EasyServe is connected via Ethernet.
P19.01 Own Address Default: 1

Min: 1 Max: 254
Relevant only for EasyServe connection via RS232 or RS485.
All devices connected to the communicatio bus must have disjunct addresses.
Also refer to: P19.02 Baud Rate, P19.03 Format Data
P19.02 Baud Rate Default: 38400

Alternative: 38400
Data transfer speed. This parameter is used for information only. The speed cannot be
changed.
P19.03 Format Data Default: 8-N-1

Alternative: 8-N-1
Formats the serial data. The value is used for information only and cannot be altered.
7.4.2.20 Parameter Block 20 - Communication Fieldbus

The parameters of this group define the communication procedure to be used to a higher-level plant control
system and configure the data link.

Parameters
Details on the fieldbus interface can be found in the following manuals:

DISOCONT Tersus: BV-H2448
INTECONT Tersus: BV-H2474
DISOCONT Tersus Software VCF2017x: BV-H2468
P20.01 Protocol Type Default: NO

Alternative: NO
Modbus-RTU
PROFIBUS DP
DeviceNet
Modbus-TCP
Ethernet/IP
Type of communication protocol. Some types of fieldbus need their respective fieldbus
card.
DISOCONT Tersus: Further details on card installation can be found in the system manual
BV-H2406. Manual 'Data Communication' (BV-H2448) contains further information on the
data structures.
INTECONT Tersus: Manual 'Data Communication' (BV-H2474) contains further information
on the data structures.
NO: Modbus-TCP can be used to read but write-accesses will not be processed.
Modbus-RTU: RS232, RS422 or RS485 interface; fieldbus interface card VSS 28020 must
be installed.
PROFIBUS DP: Fieldbus interface card VPB 28020 must be installed.
DeviceNet: Fieldbus interface card VCB 28020 must be installed.
Modbus-TCP: Complete communication (read/write) using Ethernet and the main VCU
RJ45 plug.
Ethernet/IP: Communication via Ethernet and the RJ45 plug on the main VCU.
The red-coded RJ45 socket X96 may not be used for communication with the host comput-
er.
P20.02 Timeout Host Default: 5 s

Min: 1 s Max: 600 s
Monitors the interface
A telegram from the host system will be expected within the time set if the timeout value in
P20.02 is greater than zero.

Parameters
P20.03 Event: Cyclic Communication Default: A

Cyclical serial communication with the higher-order plant control system has been inter-
rupted for longer than the timeout-period in P20.02.
To rectify: check cable connections.
P20.04 Event: Acyclic Communication Default: A

Incorrect data in the noncyclical communication from the host computer.
Possible cause: poor programming of the host computer
P20.05 Check in Keyboard Mode Default: YES

Alternative: NO
YES
To be able to use the keyboard mode as emergency operation if the coupling fails (without
having to log off the fieldbus coupling), this parameter can be used
to deactivate fieldbus communication monitoring in keyboard mode.
This allows the scales to be operated even if the fieldbus link fails.
P20.06 Compatibility DISOCONT Master Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
Compatibility setting for the predecessor electronics systems DISOCONT or INTECONT
PLUS.
NO: Not completely compatible

YES: compatible, but with restricted data link compatibility for new functions
P20.07 Word Sequence Default: I:std/L:std

Alternative: I:std/L:std
I:swp/L:std
I:std/L:swp
I:swp/L:swp
The parameter determines the word sequence within a double word.
I → denotes IEEE 754 values (floating-point values)

L → denotes LONG values (4 byte integer values)
std → will not swap the word order
swp → will swap the word order

Parameters
P20.08 Byte Sequence Default: High - Low

Alternative: High - Low
Low - High
Determines the byte sequence in a data word.
P20.09 Configuration Default: FIXED_8_16

Alternative: NO_PARA_ID_3_6
NO_PARA_ID_4_12
PARA_ID_6_15
FIXED_8_16
FIXED_8_8
FIXED_4_4
VARIABLE COMPATIBLE
FIXED COMPATIBLE
The configuration of the content of the data of the fieldbus telegrams. You can find a de-
tailed description in the manuals for data communication:
The contents of the data has to be set on the scale and opposite point in a way that is com-
patible to one another!
P20.10 Address Default: 1

Min: 1 Max: 254
Address of the device as a slave at the modbus.
Each address may be used at a bus once only.
P20.11 Resolution Default: 4096

Min: 1 Max: 32767
The maximum resolution in analog format or integer format of the measured value trans-
ferred.
The resolution is related to the nominal value of the respective process value.
P20.12 Baud rate Default: 19200

Alternative: 9600
4800
2400
19200
38400
Data transfer rate at Modbus-RTU.

Parameters
P20.13 Data Format Default: 8-O-1

Alternative: 8-O-1
8-E-1
8-N-1
Modbus-RTU always uses an 11-bit character frame.
Example: 8-O-1 means:

1 start bit, 8 data bit, odd parity, 1 stop bit
N = No parity
O = Odd parity
E = Even parity
P20.14 Physics Default: RS232

Alternative: RS485-2-wire
RS485-4-wire
RS232
Selects the electrical interface type (Modbus RTU)

Min: 0 Max: 126
Address of the slave at the PROFIBUS
P20.16 FLOAT-Format Default: IEEE

Alternative: IEEE
SIEMENS-KG
Information on the formats for all setpoints, measuring values and floating point parame-
ters.

Min: 0 Max: 63
The address of the weighing electronics on DeviceNet
P20.18 Baud rate Default: 125K

Alternative: 125K
250K
500K
Data transfer rate of the DeviceNet.

Parameters
P20.19 Parameter Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
Select whether the user data package has a parameter block or not.
P20.20 Preset Count Default: 2

Min: 2 Max: 4
The number of specified values that can be specified in a telegram by the higher-order
plant control system.
P20.21 READ_ID Count Default: 6

Min: 0 Max: 12
The number of freely selectable measuring and status values (scales→ master) that are
queried in a telegram.
P20.22 Access Rights Limitation FB Default: NO

Alternative: NO
FIRST WRITE
REMOTE IP
Determines for network protocol Modbus-TCP which master system may intervene as a
controller:
NO: No restrictions
FIRST WRITE: The subscriber that transmits the first write access gets the control rights.
The other subscribers may read only.
REMOTE IP: Control commands from the subscriber with the IP address given in P20.23
Remote IP Address FB only will be carried out.
P20.23 Remote IP Address FB Default: 192.168.240.250
IP address of the subscriber with control rights for Modbus-TCP.
Also refer to: P20.22 Access Rights Limitation FB
7.4.2.21 Parameter Block 21 - Fixed mode configuration

Configuration of the data in fieldbus communication 'FIXED' mode that were exchanged with the host com-
puter via serial interface.
Also refer to: P20.09 Configuration
For the available data and their Ids see the separated communication manual:

Parameters

P21.01 ID Preset Value 1 Default: 320
Selecting the first control command with ID 320 (decimal) in the fieldbus telegram. It cannot
be changed in this parameter.
The following values in the telegram can be configured as per the ID list in the data com-
munication manual:
Corresponds to P21.01 ID Preset Value 1

Parameters
P21.09 ID Read Value 1 Default: 752
Selecting the first value to be read from weighing electronics in the fieldbus telegram. The
number of the value (ID) can be found in the Data Communication manual:
As P21.09 ID Read Value 1

Parameters

Parameters
7.4.2.22 Parameter Block 22 - Ethernet

The parameters in this group control the Ethernet ports. It is necessary to provide inputs when EasyServe, a
VHM operating element or a host computer is supposed to be connected via Ethernet.
You can find information on the selection of addresses in the BV-H2406 manual.
P22.01 IP Address Default: 192.168.240.1
IP address of the weighing electronics. If the control system is integrated into an Ethernet
network, the address must be chosen in agreement with the network administrator. In iso-
lated networks we recommend the factory setting 192.168.240.x. "x" allows for selection of
the system on the bus.
P22.02 Net Mask Default: 255.255.255.0
The net mask setting is based on the local network type.

In general the following setting is used: 255.255.255.0
See also: P22.02 Net Mask, system manual BV-H2406
P22.03 Gateway Default: 0.0.0.0
Generally no input is required. Typical value: 0.0.0.0
7.4.2.23 Parameter Block

Block 23 - PLC Outputs
Applicable only when physical DISOCONT Tersus outputs are controlled by the control system.
The DISOCONT Tersus allows physical output signals to be controlled directly by the control system com-
puter via fieldbus. The parameters of this group assign physical channels to the fieldbus commands.
Please also refer to: status of fieldbus protocol commands in manual 'DISOCONT Tersus Data Communica-
tion' (BV-H2448).
P23.01 DO: PLC 1 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Definition of the binary output channel controlled by PCS command 1.

Parameters

Alternative: n/a
DO
Corresponds to P23.01 DO: PLC 1

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Parameters
P23.09 AO: PLC 1 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AO
Definition of the analog output channel controlled by PCS analog command word 1.
P23.10 AO: PLC 2 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AO
Corresponds to P23.09 AO: PLC 1
7.4.2.24 Parameter Block 24 - Interlocking

The parameters of this group configure the system's predefined events and running messages.
Also refer to the interlocking logic circuit diagram in the appendix
P24.01 DI: Event Mechanics 1 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
LS
Defines the input channel. The meaning is defined by the external circuitry.

Alternative: n/a
DI
LS

Alternative: n/a
DI
LS

Alternative: n/a
DI
LS

Parameters

Alternative: n/a
DI
LS
P24.06 DI: Event Electricity 1 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
LS

Alternative: n/a
DI
LS

Alternative: n/a
DI
LS
P24.09 DO: Event Mechanics Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Defines the physical output signal. See the logic diagram for the meaning of the output.
P24.10 Event: Mechanics Default: W1

Defines the event class. The meaning of the event can be gathered from the logic diagram.
P24.11 DO: Event Electricity Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO

Parameters
P24.12 Event: Electricity Default: W1

P24.13 DO: Event Mechatronics 1 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
P24.14 DO: Event Mechatronics 2 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
P24.15 Event: Mechatronics Default: W1

P24.16 DO: Ready Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
P24.17 Event: Not Ready Default: W1

P24.18 DO: Ready for Start Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO

Parameters
P24.19 Event: Not Ready for Start Default: W1

7.4.2.25 Parameter Block 25 - Belt Load Controller

The parameters of this group configure the ratio of the prefeeder to the equipment for measuring the flowth-
rough of bulk solids.
P25.01 Belt Load Controller Default: NO

Alternative: NO
ANALOG
PULS
Stepping
There is the possibility of controlling belt loading by means of a controlled material prefeed-
er. This process is used with weighfeeders that do not draw directly from a bin, in particular
because the bulk solids are inclined to blast.
This parameter defines the control process for the prefeeder.
Alternatives:
NO: no belt loading regulation
ANALOG: Analog controller magnitude output for speed-controlled prefeeders or pneumati-

cally controlled rotary gates with integrated position control.
PULS: pulse/pause output for intermittently triggered prefeeders.
Stepping: position-controlled prefeeders with P25.11 - P25.15 parameters
Also refer to:

- the controller's block circuit diagram is in the appendix
- the loading controller using the second weighbridge
- parameter block 2nd Weighbridge
P25.02 Controller Magnitude Adaption Default: 10 mA

Min: 0.001 mA Max: 20 mA
The speed bypass that is superimposed on the belt loading controller. This parameter is
used to calibrate belt loading to the nominal value in volumetric operation.

Parameters
P25.03 Blind Distance Default: 5 m

Min: 0 m Max: 100 m
The material running path from the material feed point of the prefeeder to the middle of the
weighbridge.
The controller automatically adjusts itself depending upon the blind distance, rated speed
and load cell filter P10.01 LC Filter.
Long ways produce a slow controller and vice versa.
P25.03 = 0m : The controller is switched off and in the base position
P25.04 Offset Default: 0 mA

The value of the controller magnitude to the prefeeder for a rated speed of 0 % or an open-
ing on the position-controlled prefeeder without material discharge.
P25.04 Offset = 0 mA is set at P25.01 Belt Load Controller = PULS

The lower threshold value for the controller magnitude to the prefeeder. P25.05 Lower Limit
= P25.04 Offset is normally set.
P25.04 Offset = 0 mA is set at P25.01 Belt Load Controller = PULS

Upper limit for the regulator actuating variable.
This limit depends on the size of the setpoint with inputs smaller than 20 mA. To find the
correlation with the setpoint in the appendix when describing the controller.
P25.07 Position at STOP Default: 0

Alternative: 0
Lower Limit
The value of the controller magnitude to the prefeeder when the feeder scale is turned off.
0: controller magnitude = 0mA

Lower Limit: controller magnitude = value in P25.05 Lower Limit

Parameters
P25.08 Store Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
YES-A
This parameter defines the storage property for the controller magnitude when resuming
feeding after a standstill.
0: The controller magnitude reached before turning off is not stored
YES: The integral component of the controller magnitude reached just before turning off is
maintained at restart
YES-A: Like YES, however setting the integral component to zero if feeding has been be-
come inoperative due to an alarm
The parameter only functions when using the main weighbridge to belt load regulation. The
behavior is as with YES when using the second weighbridge.
P25.09 Controller Magnitude Prefeeder Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AO
Only relevant to P25.01 = ANALOG
Definition of the output channel for the controller magnitude to the material prefeeder.
P25.10 Pulse Length Default: 1 s

Min: 0 s Max: 60 s
Only relevant to P25.01 = PULS or ANALOG
The length of the duty cycle of the prefeeder, with P25.01 = ANALOG in the lower feed rate
zone.
The pulse length remains constant and the pause is adapted by load regulation.
An output on the main VCU (local bus address 1) should be selected with active belt load
regulation of the P25.01 = PULS type.
P25.11 S: P-Component Default: 0.5 s/mA

Min: 0 s/mA Max: 1000 s/mA
Only relevant if P25.01 = "Stepping".
The proportion of the position controller for the position-controlled prefeeder.
Also refer to: P25.12 S: I-Component

Parameters
P25.12 S: I-Component Default: 3 s

Min: 0 s Max: 60000 s
The integral component of the position controller for the position-controlled prefeeder.
Also refer to: P25.11 S: P-Component
P25.13 S: Threshold Response Default: 0 %

Min: 0 % Max: 1000 %
The minimum waiting periods between two adjustment steps. This parameter can be used
to prevent continuous vibration of the prefeeder around the operating point.
P25.14 S: DO Open Flow Gate Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The definition of the output channels for opening the position-controlled prefeeder. With
DISOCONT Tersus the output should be on the main VCU (local bus address 1).
P25.15 S: DO Close Flow Gate Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The definition of the output channel for closing the position-controlled prefeeder. With
DISOCONT Tersus the output should be on the main VCU (local bus address 1).
P25.16 QA Setpoint Source Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
FB
AI
The definition of the input channel for the load setpoint.
The load setpoint = nominal belt loading (service value) is at P25.16 QA Setpoint Source =
n/a
Refer to the following when norming the input and adjusting AI:
- P25.17 QA Setpoint Range
- P25.18 QA Setpoint Offset

Parameters
P25.17 QA Setpoint Range Default: 20 mA

Only relevant to P25.16 QA Setpoint Source = AI.
Input flow for a load setpoint of 100 % of nominal belt loading (service value).
Also refer to:

- P25.16 QA Setpoint Source
- P25.18 QA Setpoint Offset
P25.18 QA Setpoint Offset Default: 0 mA

Only relevant to P25.16 QA Setpoint Source = AI.
Input flow for a load setpoint of 0 %.
Also refer to:

- P25.16 QA Setpoint Source
- P25.17 QA Setpoint Range
P25.19 QA-Vmin Default: 0 %

Min: 0 % Max: 100 %
The Qa target setpoint for belt load regulation is calculated so that it
does not drop below the speed of QA-Vmin with target belt loading. This means that belt
loading is reduced in a small operating range.
The function is turned off at P25.19 = 0.
Also refer to: P25.20 QA-Qmin

Parameters
P25.20 QA-Qmin Default: 0 %

Min: 0 % Max: 100 %
To prevent inaccurate measurements, the setpoint is limited to
QA-Qmin for belt loading. P25.20 QA-Qmin has priority over P25.19 QA-Vmin.
The function is turned off at P25.20 = 0.
Note:
Speed regulation for the feed belt to compensate belt loading fluctuations remains active in
all cases.
States
a) flow rate setpoint in percent of the nominal flow rate (P03.01) < P25.20 (operation with
minimum belt loading):
belt loading setpoint = P25.20
b) flow rate setpoint in percent of the nominal flow rate (P03.01) > P25.20 and flow rate
setpoint in percent of the nominal flow rate (P03.01) < P25.19 (operation at reduced belt
loading):
belt loading setpoint = flow rate setpoint in percent of the nominal flow rate / P25.19
c) flow rate setpoint in percent of the nominal flow rate (P03.01) > P25.19 (normal opera-
tion):
belt loading setpoint = P03.01 / P03.02
Examples of settings:
A) flow rate regulation via belt loading at the rated speed of the feed belt
The weighfeeder should be run at the operating point
of the rated speed “independant of the conveying capacity setpoint”.
P25.19: 100 %
P25.20: 0 %
B) like A), however at minimum belt loading

The weighfeeder should be run at the rated speed “independant of the setpoint”.
Belt loading should not drop below a lower limit, for instance of 30 % of nominal belt load.
P25.19: 100 %
P25.20: 30 %
C) operation over an extremely large flow rate range

The weighfeeder should be operated in a power range of 1:100.
P25.19= 5 % (of course, a higher value such as 10 % can be set alternatively)
P25.20 = 0 %
It is run at nominal belt loading in the "upper" power range. The speed
(operating point) is reduced to 5 %. This corresponds to a conventional weighfeeder at an
adjustment range of 1:20.
When an operating range setpoint < 5 % is specified, the setpoint for
belt loading is reduced. There is no other reduction
in the operating point of speed.
D) minimum speed and minimum load

The weighfeeder should run at at least 20 % of rated speed. It should not exceed
a minimum 30 % belt loading.
P25.19 = 20 %
P25.20 = 30 %

Parameters
P25.21 QA-Ypuls Default: 0 mA

Pulses with the amplitude of P25.21 are issued in pulse-pause operation as the controller
magnitude to the prefeeder. If the internal controller magnitude is in excess of the value
P25.21, it switches over to (normal) continuous operation.
Refer to P25.22 QA-Ymin for a description of the function
Effective only when P25.01 Belt Load Controller = ANALOG.
P25.22 QA-Ymin Default: 0 mA

If the internal controller magnitude drops below the value P25.22, it switches into (normal)
continuous operation. P25.21 produces hysteresis for switching over the types of operation.
P25.21 = 0 and P25.22 = 0 switches the function off.
Description of the function of the pulse control unit

The pulse control unit of the prefeeder allows a substantially greater adjustment range. The
control system works continually in the upper power range. If the internal controller magni-
tude drops below the value of P25.22, the controller magnitude is clocked so that the drive
of the prefeeder is not operated in a speed range that is too small. The prefeeder is switch-
ed on in clocked operation for at least the time selected in P25.10. The pause interval time
is determined by the belt loading controller.

Parameters
P25.23 QA Coeffizient Calculation Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES-1.WB
YES-2.WB
The coefficient between the controller magnitude to the prefeeder and the resulting operat-
ing range can be automatically ascertained and used in regulation. This is particularly help-
ful when bulk solids are supposed to be fed with substantially differing bulk density.
NO: The bulk density is assumed to be almost constant. The correlation between controller
magnitude and the feed rate of the prefeeder is entered in P25.02 Controller Magnitude
Adaption.
YES-1.WB: This coefficient is ascertained with the aid of the belt load and feed rate ascer-
tained via the main weighbridge.
YES-2.WB: This coefficient is ascertained with the aid of the belt load and feed rate ascer-
tained via weighbridge on the material feed. This process can ascertain the coefficient more
quickly due to the lower amount of time between prefeeders and measuring point. Of
course, this measuring point is generally less precise than the main weighbridge. This ad-
justment is used with long and slow-running feed belts and long scales.
The prerequisite: The feeder scale has a second weighbridge. Refer to the 2nd
Weighbridge group of parameters.
The following is relevant to calculating the coefficient:

- P25.24 Yz Dead Time
- P25.25 QA Filter Coefficient
You can find details in the block circuit diagram in the appendix.
P25.24 Yz Dead Time Default: 0.5 s

Min: 0 s Max: 600 s
The dead time between the prefeeder bin and feed point to the weigh belt with intermediate
transport equipment at a fixed speed.
P25.24 Yz Dead Time = 0s is set if the speed of the transport equipment is regulated syn-
chronously to the prefeeder.
P25.25 QA Filter Coefficient Default: 5 m

Min: 0 m Max: 100 m
The mean value is formed for the coefficient between the controller magnitude and resulting
operating range of the prefeeder over a route that corresponds to the belt length entered.
Also refer to:

P25.23 QA Coeffizient Calculation

Parameters
P25.26 QA v-Adaption Default: 80 %

Min: 1 % Max: 100 %
Adapting the speed of the controller magnitude.
P25.27 QA Upper Limit relative Default: 1000 % Y

Min: 1 % Y Max: 100000 % Y
The limit of the prefeeder controller magnitude is dependant upon the weighfeeder control-
ler magnitude.
For example:
P25.27 QA Upper Limit relative = 150 % Y
The controller magnitude of the feed belt: 50 %
=> The maximum controller magnitude to the prefeeder: 75 %
P25.28 Blind Distance 2. Weighbridge Default: 2 m

Min: 0 m Max: 100 m
The route section on the belt between the bulk solids feed and 2nd weighbridge.
P25.29 QA Adaption 2. Weighbridge Default: 5 m

Min: 0 m Max: 100 m
The mean value is formed for the coefficient between the controller magnitude and resulting
operating range of the prefeeder over a route that corresponds to the belt length entered at
P25.23 QA Coeffizient Calculation = YES-2.WB.
Also refer to:

P25.23 QA Coeffizient Calculation
7.4.2.26 Parameter Block 26 - Bin Weigher

In addition to the weighfeeder, the system supports weighing and bin level control of an additional hopper.
This hopper is often a control hopper for the continuous weighfeeder.

Parameters
P26.01 Bin Weigher Active Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
Simulation
The bin weigher operates completely independently of the continuous scales.
It has the following functions:
1. displaying the bin weight
2. registering and monitoring threshold values
3. regulating the (min/max) level
4. the check scale for the check system
It can also be filled via menu.
The continuous fill level can also be regulated via block Bin Level Controller.
P26.01 = Simulation:
Bin regulation and min/max regulation are simulated.
The continuous scale draws off material and filling is done with 4 × P03.01.
P26.02 LC: Load Measurement Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
LC
FB
AI
Definition of the measuring channel
If FB or AI are selected the external value will be converted to a value with mV/V units that
corresponds to a measurement from a load cell. The following signal processing calculates
weight in kg from the signal in mV/V and is identical for all input types.
Also refer to:

P26.02 LC: Load Measurement
P26.03 LC Characteristic Value

P26.30 Bin Level analog Input Offset
P26.31 Bin Level analog Input Range

Transfer factor of the load cell as per the data sheet. All load cells have to have the same
nominal value.
Also refer to: P26.04 LC Rated Capacity

Parameters

Min: 0.5 kg Max: 220000000 kg
Sum of the bin's load cell rated capacities. All load cells must have the same rated data.
Special case of a partially-weighed bin:

If a bin is only supported x % by load cells at WZnominal1 nominal load sum and is other-
wise supported on non-weighed supports (fixed bearings), the load cell rated capacity to be
entered is given by
P26.04 = WZnominal1 × 100 % / x %
If the percentage component x % on the load cell is not known a priori, the nominal value is
determined by externally weighing one bin level.
Also refer to: P26.03 LC Characteristic Value

Min: 0.25 s Max: 300 s
Time constant of the load cell filter.
The load cell filter affects all measuring load related measuring values.
P26.06 Bipolar Measurement Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
Switches the measuring range for the load cell amplifier.
NO: measurement can be made in one load direction only

YES: the load cell can measure both compression and tensile forces
As there is generally always an initial load on the load cell it is usually sufficient to analyze
the signal in the direction of compression only. The YES setting is needed in rare special
cases only, e.g. if a measuring eye is used to record weight.
Bipolar measurement reduces the resolution of the measuring signal.
P26.07 Event: Error LC Input (Bin) Default: W1

The load cell cable is improperly connected, not connected or has been interrupted. The
load cell may be faulty.
Steps to take :
- if the cabling is intact: replace the load cell amplifier VME in the VCU
Note:
The power supply must be switched off and on again if the scales still cannot be switched
on even after the error has been rectified.

Parameters
P26.08 Event: LC Input > MAX Default: W1

The load cell load is greater than 110 % of the sum of the load cell nominal loads.

Possible reasons:
- incorrect cabling
- faulty load cell
P26.09 Nominal Bin Load Default: 100 % LC

Min: 0 % LC Max: 1000 % LC
The nominal bin level is the reference value for threshold values and analog outputs. It is
given as a percentage of the load cell nominal load (P26.04 LC Rated Capacity).
P26.10 Display Format Default: ---.--- t

-----.- kg
----.-- kg
---.--- kg
--.---- kg
------- t
-----.- t
----.-- t
---.--- t
Select the dimension and the decimal places for displays.
P26.11 Display Filter Default: 3 s

Min: 0 s Max: 600 s
Time constant of the filter for displaying the weight value.
The filter applies to the display and to the analog or serial printout but not for threshold
values or control contacts.

Parameters
P26.12 Control Level MIN Default: 60 %

Min: -10 % Max: 200 %
A filling unit can be controlled using MIN and MAX levels (output P26.14 DO: Bin Filling).
Switched on if the bin level underruns the MIN level and switched off again when the MAX
level is reached.
Reference value: P26.09 Nominal Bin Load
See also: P26.13 Control Level MAX
P26.13 Control Level MAX Default: 70 %

Min: -10 % Max: 200 %
A filling unit can be controlled using the MIN and MAX control levels (output P26.14 DO:
Bin Filling). If the fill level drops below MIN, it is switched on and it is switched off again
when it reaches MAX.
Also refer to: P26.12 Control Level MIN
P26.14 DO: Bin Filling Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Defines the output to start the filling procedure.
The output is set to 'do not fill' each time a scales alarm is triggered.
Also refer to: P26.12 Control Level MIN, P26.13 Control Level MAX
P26.15 Bin Level MIN Default: 5 %

Min: -200 % Max: 200 %
MIN threshold for the bin level.
Also refer to: P26.16 Event: Bin Level MIN, P26.17 DO: Bin Level MIN

Parameters
P26.16 Event: Bin Level MIN Default: W1

The bin level has underrun the lower threshold.
Possible cause:
- refilling working incorrectly
Also refer to: P26.15 Bin Level MIN
P26.17 DO: Bin Level MIN Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Defines the output signal 'bin level too low'.
The output becomes active if the fill level underruns the lower threshold value. It operates
independent of the event class of the corresponding event.
P26.18 Bin Level MAX Default: 120 %

Min: -10 % Max: 200 %
Max threshold for the bin level.
Also refer to: P26.19 Event: Bin Level MAX, P26.20 DO: Bin Level MAX
P26.19 Event: Bin Level MAX Default: W1

The bin level has exceeded the upper threshold.
Possible cause:
- refilling not switching off correctly
Also refer to: P26.18 Bin Level MAX

Parameters
P26.20 DO: Bin Level MAX Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Defines the output in case the hopper fill level exceeds the upper threshold.
P26.21 AO: Bin Load Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AO
Defines the output channel for the hopper fill level.
Also refer to: P26.22 AO: Offset, P26.23 AO: Range
P26.22 AO: Offset Default: 4 mA

Output current for a bin weight of 0 %.
See also:
P26.21 AO: Bin Load
P26.23 AO: Range
P26.09 Nominal Bin Load
P26.23 AO: Range Default: 20 mA

Output current for a fill weight of 100 %.
See also: P26.21 AO: Bin Load, P26.22 AO: Offset
P26.24 Range Correction Default: 1

Min: 0.5 Max: 2
This parameter is used to correct the measuring result. It is set automatically by the calibra-
tion program CB: Weight Check'.
The measuring result is corrected using the factor in P26.24.

Parameters
P26.25 Tare (Bin) Default: 0 kg

Min: 0 kg Max: 220000000 kg
The tare is calculated automatically by the calibration program TW: Tare' and set into this
parameter.
P26.26 Calibration Weight Default: 10 kg

Min: 0 kg Max: 220000000 kg
Used to enter the test weights used for the calibration program CB: Weight Check.
P26.27 Controller in OFF-Mode Default: YES

Alternative: NO
YES
This parameter defines whether the filling weight control (P26.12 Control Level MIN, P26.13
Control Level MAX, P26.14 DO: Bin Filling) and bin regulation (block: bin level controller)
are always active or only when the scale is switched on.
P26.28 DI: Bin Load Sensor Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
Digital input for a bin load sensor. The probe has the function of keeping the bin from over-
flowing. If the sensor is activated, filling is discontinued for 60 seconds or is aborted.
- output as per P26.14 DO: Bin Filling to OFF
- output as per P27.04 DO: Feeder ON to OFF
- controller magnitude (P27.03 AO: Controller Magnitude Bin Level) to 0 and controller in
base position
Filling is aborted regardless of the filling source (regulator, controller, manual)
and the event class (P26.29 Event: Bin Load MAX Sensor).
P26.29 Event: Bin Load MAX Sensor Default: W1

The fill level sensor reports a too-high fill level in the hopper.
Possible causes:
- the weight of the bulk material is very low so that the weight-controlled filling is not shut-
ting off soon enough.
- the refill equipment is not closing correctly.
- the upper fill threshold level P26.13 Control Level MAX has been set too high.
An overfilled hopper can lead to inaccurate check measurements and so to false adjust-
ment of the calculation of the feed rate.

Parameters
P26.30 Bin Level analog Input Offset Default: 4 mA

Raising the analog input for the bin fill level of the additional bin
The input flow corresponding to a signal of 0 mV/V.

Effective only when P26.02 LC: Load Measurement = AI...
Also refer to:

for DMS inputs'
P26.31 Bin Level analog Input Range
P26.31 Bin Level analog Input Range Default: 20 mA

The sensitivity adjustment of the analog input for weighing the additional bin
Converting the analog value into the voltage signal corresponding to a load cell:
The measured value [mV/V] = (input flow – P26.30) / (P26.31 – P26.30) * P26.03
where:
P26.30 = Bin Level analog Input Offset
P26.31 = Bin Level analog Input Range
P26.03 = LC Characteristic Value
Effective only when P26.02 LC: Load Measurement = AI...
Also refer to:

for DMS inputs'
P26.30 Bin Level analog Input Offset
7.4.2.27 Parameter Block 27 - Bin Level Controller

This continuous controller keeps the fill level in the bin at the setpoint level.
Precondition: weight measurement of the separate bin has been activated (P26.01 Bin Weigher Active =
YES).
Digital control of the separate bin filling can be found in the Bin Weigher block.
Details on the controller and the controller block diagram can be found in the appendix.
P27.01 Bin Controller ON Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
Activates the continuous controller for the fill level of the additional bin.
Also refer to: P26.01 Bin Weigher Active

Parameters
P27.02 Filling Type Default: YES

Alternative: NO
YES
Defines the standard direction.
YES: The controlled organ fills the bin.

NO: The controlled organ empties the bin.
P27.03 AO: Controller Magnitude Bin Level Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AO
Output signal for the fill level controller actuating variable.
P27.04 DO: Feeder ON Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Output channel for switching on the continuous feed element (control element).
The output is set to off, the controller magnitude is set to 0 and the controller is put into the
base position with every scale alarm. The automatic check system does the regulating dur-
ing its measuring phase.
P27.05 Setpoint Bin Level Default: 0 kg

Setpoint for the hopper in normal operation.
P27.06 Feeder Constant Default: 0 (kg/h)/mA

Min: 0 (kg/h)/mA Max: 1000000 (kg/h)/mA
Proportional constant of the conveyor element. The parameter designates the feed rate for
a flow of 1 mA at the output P27.03 AO: Controller Magnitude Bin Level.
P27.07 Dead Time TT Default: 3 s

Min: 0 s Max: 60000 s
Transport times between the regulated conveyor element (control element) and the bin if
the transporting feeder element has a fixed conveying speed.

Parameters
P27.08 P-Component KP Default: 0 mA/kg

Min: 0 mA/kg Max: 10000 mA/kg
Proportional component of the fill level controller.
An I controller results at KP = 0 that leads to a control circuit with an instable structure with
this regulation. This setting should therefore be avoided.

Min: 0 s Max: 60000 s
Reset time of the controller integral component for the bin fill level. The integral component
reaches the same magnitude during this period as the proportion with a constant control
deviation.
The integral component is switched off at P27.09 I-Component TN = 0.
P27.10 D Portion TV Default: 0 s

Min: 0 s Max: 60000 s
Differential component of the bin fill level controller.
The differential component is switched off if P27.10 D Portion TV = 0.
P27.11 D Filter TD Default: 0 s

Min: 0 s Max: 60000 s
Filter time constant for the differential component.
This value should not be greater than the D component. 0.1 ... 0.3 * P27.10 is normal.
Also refer to: P27.10 D Portion TV
P27.12 Bypass Default: 10 mA

Constant for pilot control of the conveyor into a bin that is emptied by the continuous scale.
This constant describes the current as a controller magnitude that produces a feed rate at
the conveyor bin corresponding to the nominal feed rate (P03.01 Nominal Flow Rate) of the
continuous scale.
The bypass is adjusted so that the fill level of the bin is retained (outflow = inflow) if the
controller is switched off (P27.08 P-Component KP, P27.09 I-Component TN, P27.10 D
Portion TV = 0) and the scale is switched on.
The bypass can be changed in small increments until the service value yBi oscillates
around 0, even if the controller is active.
(The designs with different signs apply correspondingly to P27.02 Filling Type = NO.)

Parameters
P27.13 Bypass D Portion Default: 0 s

Min: 0 s Max: 60000 s
In critical circumstances such as with a small hopper or long dead time, the D portion for
the bypass can relieve the controller if there are large changes in weighfeeder setpoints.
The control deviation time interval can be minimized.
Recommendation: 0 under normal circumstances and approximately TT/2 (P27.07 Dead
Time TT) under critical circumstances
P27.14 Controller Magnitude Offset Default: 0 mA

Increase of the actuating variable for the conveyor element.
In general parameters P27.14 Controller Magnitude Offset and P27.15 Lower Limit are set
to the same value.

Internal lower threshold for the actuating signal to the conveyor element.
In general parameters P27.14 Controller Magnitude Offset and P27.15 Lower Limit are set
to the same value.

Upper threshold for the actuating signal to the conveyor element.
P27.17 Dead Band Deviation Default: 0 kg

The effective control deviation Xd(w) at the controller input can be reduced by the factor of
P27.18 Dead Band Factor within a range of ± P27.17 Dead Band Deviation. This can bring
about more settled (slower) control in the stable state (near the setpoint) for the bin weight
with malfunctions in the weight signal.
P27.18 Dead Band Factor Default: 0

Min: 0 Max: 1
Factor for the control deviation for a fill level close to the setpoint.
Also refer to: P27.17 Dead Band Deviation

Parameters
P27.19 Setpoint Filter Default: 0.5 s

Min: 0 s Max: 200 s
The setpoint filter for the fill level setpoint.
This can prevent overshoot with setpoint changes effected by the check system (KME).
P27.20 Flow Rate Filter Default: 0.5 s

Min: 0 s Max: 200 s
Time constant for the filter in the fill level actual value. Rapid control reaction requires a low
time constant.
The value set is automatically taken into account by the calibration program BIN: Controller
Optimization'.
P27.21 DI: Init. Controller Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
Contact initializes all parts of the controller that store information. Bypass and increase only
are active as long as this is applied.
P27.22 Bin Setpoint source Default: PARAMETER

Alternative: PARAMETER
FB
This parameter defines whether the fill level setpoint is given by parameter P27.05 Setpoint
Bin Level or by the fieldbus interface (ID: hex 0x0266 or dec 614).
7.4.2.28 Parameter Block 28 - 2nd Weighbridge

The parameters of this group are only relevant if the feeder scale is designed with two weighing stations.
This is where the parameters for the weighbridge are adjusted to bulk solids feed. The second weighbridge
is used for improving belt load regulation.
P28.01 2nd Weighbridge active Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
Activating the functions linked to the optional weighbridge in the area of the bulk solids feed
onto the feed belt. In particular, the second weighbridge can be used with feeders that have
upstream prefeeders and substantially improve belt load regulation there. The second
weighbridge generally is less accurate than the first or main weighbridge.
The second weighbridge is used:

- on feeders with upstream prefeeders,
- with a long transport route from bulk solids feed to the main weighbridge, and
- slow-moving feed belts
Also refer to: group of parameters Belt Load Controller

Parameters
P28.02 2nd Weighbridge Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
LC
AI
FB
The definition of the input channel for the load on the second weighbridge.
If LC is selected, refer also to:

P28.03 LC Characteristic Value
P28.04 LC Rated Capacity

P28.22 2nd Bridge analog Input Offset
P28.23 2nd Bridge analog Input Range

The transmission characteristic value for the load cell as per the nameplate.

Min: 0.001 kg Max: 220000000 kg
The total of the rated loads of power intake on the second load cell. If several load cells are
used for this measuring point, all have to have the same nominal data. Fixed bearings are
counted as similar load cells.
P28.05 Effective Platform Length Default: 0.18 m

Min: 0.001 m Max: 100 m
Effective weigh bridge length. In systems with a weighing roller that rotates in the direction
of belt travel, the active length is half of the distance between the non-weighing rollers on
either side of the weighing roller.

Min: 0.25 s Max: 300 s
The load cell filters affects all load cell related measuring values. In general this value
should be left at the factory setting.
Note: filtering the load cell signal has an impact on the control characteristics of belt load
regulation.

Parameters
P28.07 Event: Error LC Input (2nd Bridge) Default: W1

The load cell cable is improperly connected, not connected at all or has been disconnected.
The load cell may be faulty.
Actions:
P28.08 2nd Bridge MIN Default: 5 %

Min: -200 % Max: 200 %
The lower threshold value for the load on the second weighbridge in percent of rated load
(service value).
P28.09 Event: 2nd Bridge MIN Default: W2

The load on the second weighbridge has fallen below the threshold value.
Possible causes:
- no bulk solids
- defect on the prefeeder
- weighing station stuck
- belt load regulation poorly adjusted
- defect in load cell
Actions:
- make a visual check of the bulk solids on the belt
- use a calibration weight to check the weighing station
P28.10 DO: 2nd Bridge MIN Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The output becomes active if the belt load drops below the threshold value P28.08 2nd
Bridge MIN. The output functions independent of the class of the associated event.
P28.11 2nd Bridge MAX Default: 150 %

Min: -10 % Max: 200 %
The upper limit for the load on the second weighbridge in percent of the rated load (service
value).

Parameters
P28.12 Event: 2nd Bridge MAX Default: W2

The load on the second weighbridge is in excess of the threshold value.
Possible causes:
- the belt is covered
Actions:
P28.13 DO: 2nd Bridge MAX Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The output becomes active when the belt load is in excess of the threshold value P28.11
2nd Bridge MAX. The output functions independent of the class of the associated event.
P28.14 Range Correction (2nd Bridge) Default: 1

Min: 0.2 Max: 5
The correction factor for measured value acquisition.
P28.15 Tare (2nd Bridge) Default: 0 kg/m

Min: 0 kg/m Max: 10000 kg/m
The measured load with an empty feed belt.
This value is automatically ascertained and entered by the calibration program TW: Tare.
P28.16 Controller active Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
P28.17 P-Component KP Default: 0.5

Min: 0 Max: 100
The proportion of the controller for the belt load.
Only relevant for P25.23 QA Coeffizient Calculation = NO

Parameters

The reset time for the integral component of the controller for the belt load.
Only relevant for P25.23 QA Coeffizient Calculation = NO
P28.19 Analog Output 2nd Bridge Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AO
The definition of the analog output channel for the load on the second weighbridge.
Also refer to:

P28.20 2nd Bridge Offset
P28.21 2nd Bridge Range
P28.20 2nd Bridge Offset Default: 4 mA

The output current for the 0 % load on the second weighbridge
Also refer to:

P28.19 Analog Output 2nd Bridge
P28.21 2nd Bridge Range
P28.21 2nd Bridge Range Default: 20 mA

The output current for a load on the second weighbridge corresponding to nominal belt
loading (service value).
Also refer to:

P28.22 2nd Bridge analog Input Offset Default: 4 mA

The input flow for a load of 0 %.
Only relevant if P28.02 2nd Weighbridge = AI
Also refer to: P28.23 2nd Bridge analog Input Range

Parameters
P28.23 2nd Bridge analog Input Range Default: 20 mA

The input flow for a load of 0 % of the nominal belt load (service value).
Only relevant if P28.02 2nd Weighbridge = AI
Also refer to: P28.22 2nd Bridge analog Input Offset
7.4.2.29
7.4.2.29 Parameter Block 29 - Check System
The check system controls and corrects a continuous scales using the change in bin weight; the changes in
weight result only from the bulk material passing over continuous scales. During measurement all other in-
and outflows must be stopped.
A signals flow chart for control can be found in the appendix.
P29.01 Type of Check System Default: NO

Alternative: NO
Single Unit
Separated Units
Filling System
Extern
Selects the control concept
NO:
No check system
Single unit:
The continuous feeder scale and control weighing bin form a mechanical unit and are
weighed together. The continuous weighfeeder discharges from the hopper.
Separated Units:
The continuous feeder scale and control weighing bin are decoupled both mechanically and
with regards to weighing. The continuous weighfeeder discharges from the hopper.
Filling system:
The continuous weighfeeder fills the control bin during the check.
External:
The control procedure is controlled by a higher-order system. The DISOCONT Tersus only
supplies the relevant measured values.
The following parameters only are effective:
- P29.27 DO: Check Measurement Active
- P29.30 Absolute Range
- P29.31 Relative Range
The following parameter description relates primarily to the 'single unit' and 'separated
units' types.
The appendix has a flow chart.

Parameters
P29.02 Auto Correction Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
Setting for the correction unit once measurement is finished.
NO: Correction must be started manually

YES: Correction is performed automatically if the correction result lies within the set thre-
sholds (P29.30 Absolute Range, P29.31 Relative Range).
P29.03 Cyclic Auto Start Default: NO

Alternative: NO
Tare
Span
Automatic start of the check system.
NO:
No automatic start
Tare:
Automatic start for controlling and correcting tare or additive effects of errors.
Span:
Automatic start for controlling and correcting the proportionality factor between the meas-
ured value and actual feed rate. Correction of multiplicatively acting effects of errors.
It starts after a pause preselected with the parameters P29.04 Cycle Time. It also makes
sense to preselect automatic correction (P29.02 Auto Correction = YES).
P29.04 Cycle Time Default: 0.5 h

Min: 0.01 h Max: 100 h
With automatic start selected, the standby time between the end of one check and the start
of the next.
Also refer to: P29.03 Cyclic Auto Start
P29.05 Release Check System Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
FB
DI
Defines the input that will activate a check by the system controller.
If no active signal given:

1. no check will be started
2. a running check will be canceled.
The setting 'n/a' makes the check system continuously active.

Parameters
P29.06 Event: No Check Release Default: W2

Event Group: CH Number: 09
This event is identified if a check has been started but the plant control has not authorized
one.
Generally, no steps need to be taken. The event serves only as an indication of the missing
authorization.
P29.07 Check Start Span Default: OP

Alternative: OP
DI
FB
The definition of the input channel to the start of the control measurement with the goal of a
range correction.
P29.08 Check Start Tare Default: OP

Alternative: OP
DI
FB
The definition of the input channel to the start of the control measurement with the goal of a
tare correction.
P29.09 Accept Correction Default: OP

Alternative: OP
DI
FB
Determine the signal source for correction of the continuous scales on the basis of the out-
come of the check system.
Once measurement has ended the check system moves to the acknowledgement phase
and waits for the correcting command, when P29.02 Auto Correction = NO. Corrections can
also by made manually if the tolerances P29.30 Absolute Range or P29.31 Relative Range
have been exceeded. Correction is triggered by the input flank.

Parameters
P29.10 Finish Check Measurement Default: OP

Alternative: OP
DI
FB
Determines the source of the signal for canceling a running check. The command acts in all
phases of measurement. The calibration of the continuous scale is not changed by the
cancellation. The input is flank-controlled.
The check must be canceled if the measuring system is in acknowledgement phase and if
the control outcome is not to be used to correct the continuous scales.
P29.11 Set: Quantity or Rotations Default: Quantity

Alternative: Quantity
Circuits
Defining the condition for the length of the control measurement
Quantity: The measurement is finished when the quantity of bulk solids given in P29.13
Check Quantity has been conveyed.
Circuits: The measurement is finished when the belt has progressed the belt length given in
P29.13 Check Quantity.
P29.12 Check Circuits Default: 0

Min: 0 Max: 100
The length of belt progress measured in complete belt circuits after which the control mea-
surement is finished. The value should be an integer, in particular if BIC has not been acti-
vated (P18.03 BIC Active = NO) .
Only relevant if P29.11 Set: Quantity or Rotations = circuits
P29.13 Check Quantity Default: 0 kg

Min: 0 kg Max: 100000000 kg
The quantity of bulk solids that should be discharged as a check.
The quantity selected should be large enough to minimize the effects of errors when deter-
mining the control quantity. By the same token the hopper should have sufficient capacity
for the control quantity.

Parameters
P29.14 Storage Quantity Default: 500 kg

Min: 0 kg Max: 100000000 kg
The storage quantity determines the minimum fill level for the start of a check. If needed,
material will be filled to this level before measurement begins.
Conditions:
1. The storage quantity must be smaller than the maximum control fill level: P29.14 <
P29.19 Maximum Fill Weight.
If this condition is not met, the check will end after starting with the message CH 03 (max.
check fill level).
2. The storage quantity must be greater than the sum of the check quantity, the minimum
check fill level and an excess allowance: P29.14 Storage Quantity > P29.13 Check Quanti-
ty + P29.17 Minimum Fill Weight + MT + MB
If this condition is infringed the fill level will fall below the min. control fill level during the
check. The measurement would then cancel with the message CH 02 (min. check fill level).
MT = losses caused by the settling time P29.21 Damping Time.
MB = losses caused by the blind distance P29.22 Blind Distance (only with P29.01 Type of
Check System = single unit).
P29.15 Minimum Check Quantity Default: 0 kg

The minimum quantity of bulk solids that has to be discharged to ensure that the result of
the control measurement is seen as valid.
Only relevant if P29.11 Set: Quantity or Rotations = circuits
P29.16 Event: Minimum Check Quantity Default: W1

The event is identified when the control measurement was finished after the given number
of belt circuits before the given minimum quantity of bulk solids has been discharged.
Possible cause:
The belt load is less than expected. The result of the check might be afflicted with an im-
permissibly large defect.
Remedy:
Increase the belt load

Parameters
P29.17 Minimum Fill Weight Default: 0 kg

Min: 0 kg Max: 100000000 kg
Bulk material buffer that must remain in the hopper during a check so that the flow charac-
teristics and the material density at the feeding point do not change significantly.
The measurement would cancel with the message CH 02 (min. check fill level) if the ma-
terial quantity falls below this amount.
P29.18 Event: Minimum Fill Weight Default: W1

The fill level has fallen below the threshold value in P29.17 Minimum Fill Weight during a
check.
Possible cause:
- bulk material density higher than specified
- unfavorable settings in P29.13 Check Quantity or P29.12 Check Circuits, P29.17 Mini-
mum Fill Weight or P29.14 Storage Quantity
P29.19 Maximum Fill Weight Default: 1000 kg

Min: 0 kg Max: 100000000 kg
The maximum check fill weight is the greatest fill level allowed during a check. The measur-
ing period will not begin until the fill level falls below this value.
The permissible operating range of the control measurement within the bin fill level is de-
termined by the two threshold values Min P29.17 Minimum Fill Weight and Max P29.19
Maximum Fill Weight.
P29.20 Event: Maximum Fill Weight Default: W1

The maximum fill level was exceeded during the check. The control measurement is fi-
nished early.
Possible cause:
The storage quantity (P29.14 Storage Quantity) is greater than the maximum control fill
level (P29.19 Maximum Fill Weight). The check will be canceled just after it starts. In case
of an error, check the magnitude of both parameters.

Parameters
P29.21 Damping Time Default: 3 s

The waiting period from switching off filling to starting the control measurement. The
process variables should stabilize within this period. This time is also observed even if the
bin was not filled shortly beforehand.
P29.22 Blind Distance Default: 0 %

Min: 0 % Max: 100 %
If P29.01 Type of Check System = single unit
a) P17.01 VAP Active = NO blind distance from the center of the weighbridge to the materi-
al discharge as % of the overall belt length
b) P17.01 = YES the blind distance is 0.
Falls P29.01 Type of Check System = separated unit

a) P17.01 VAP Active = NO blind distance from the material feed to the middle of the
weighbridge.
b) P17.01 = YES the route from the material feed to the material discharge.
P29.23 DO: Control Started Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Defines the output channel for the message 'control active'.
The signal is active from the start of the control until successful correction or cancellation.
P29.24 Feeder Stopped Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
FB
DI
The On/Off feedback from the filling element. The settling time (P29.21 Damping Time)
starts with the Off signal when the check has started. The check will wait for the feedback
signal (the P29.25 Event: Feeder Not Stopped event) before starting the settling time if
filling is switched on.
The check will be canceled without a response if the conveying element On feedback is
received after starting settling time.

Parameters
P29.25 Event: Feeder Not Stopped Default: W1

The control waits until conveyance into the control bin is stopped.
Possible cause:
- long time required to end filling
- incorrect control sequence for bin filling
P29.26 Event: Prepare Check Measurement Default: W2

The check procedure is in the filling phase or settling time or the fill level is still greater than
the maximum check fill level (P29.19 Maximum Fill Weight).
For information only. In general, nothing else needs to be done.
P29.27 DO: Check Measurement Active Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Defines the output channel for the message that the check system is in the measuring
phase.
P29.28 Event: Expect Acceptance Default: W2

At the end the check system waits for a decision by the operator:
a) accept correction result, correct continuous scales

b) discard correction result and cancel
If 'automatic correction' is active, the operator need only act if a tolerance level is exceeded
(P29.02 Auto Correction = YES).
Step: Communicate decision about correction

Parameters
P29.29 DO:Expect Acceptance Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The definition of the output channel for the information that the check system is waiting for
the operator's decision at the end.
The output is independent of the event class.
Also refer to: P29.28 Event: Expect Acceptance
P29.30 Absolute Range Default: 10 %

Min: 0 % Max: 1000 %
Threshold for the sum of all previous corrections.
Correction will not be made automatically if the threshold would be exceeded by a check.
An event will be identified in each case.
See also:
P29.32 Event: Absolute Tare Correction Error
P29.34 Event: Absolute Span Correction Error
P29.31 Relative Range Default: 3 %

Min: 0 % Max: 1000 %
Threshold for the currently pending correction.
Correction will not be made automatically if the error overshoots the threshold. An event will
be identified in each case.
See also:
P29.33 Event: Relative Tare Correction Error
P29.35 Event: Relative Span Correction Error

Parameters
P29.32 Event: Absolute Tare Correction Er- Default: W1

ror
The current correction would make the sum of all zero-point corrections greater than the
threshold value P29.30 Absolute Range since the last basic tare calibration. There is no
automatic correction. The operator can acknowledge the message and enter the result
manually. Monitoring and messaging occur in the acknowledgement phase. The correction
weighting factor P29.36 Correction Evaluation is not taken into account in the error analy-
sis.
Cause of the event:

- substantial tare drift in the feeder scale (contamination or stuck weighing station)
- defects in bin weight measurement (shunt forces or pressure effects)
Actions:
- checking the weighing station of the feeder scale
- taring the feeder scale
- checking bin weighing (the stability of the weight display when loading and unloading)
P29.33 Event: Relative Tare Correction Error Default: W1

The result of the current correction deviates more greatly than the threshold value P29.31
Relative Range from that of the last measurement. There is no automatic correction. The
operator can acknowledge the message and enter the result manually. It is monitored and
reported in the acknowledgement phase. The correction weighting factor P29.36 Correction
Evaluation is not taken into account in the error analysis.
Cause of the event:

Actions:
- checking bin weighing (the stability of the weight display when loading and unloading)

Parameters
P29.34 Event: Absolute Span Correction Default: W1

Error
The threshold in P29.30 Absolute Range was exceeded by the sum of all corrections for
multiplicative errors.
Bprod = (1 - B * K) * 100 %
Bprod: Sum of all previous corrections as a %

B: newly calculated correction factor = (loss in control bin weight) / (advancement in conti-
nuous scales counter)
K: product of all previous corrections stored in P10.02 Range Correction
P29.35 Event: Relative Span Correction Er- Default: W1

ror
The multiplicative error just ascertained exceeds the threshold value in P29.31 Relative
Range.
Brel = (1 - B )× 100
Brel: error relative to the current adjustment of the continuous scales as a %

B: newly calculated correction factor = (loss in control bin weight) / (advancement in conti-
nuous scales counter)
P29.36 Correction Evaluation Default: 1

Min: 0 Max: 1
The extent of the correction is determined by the factor P29.36 Correction Evaluation.
There is no correction with P29.36 = 0 and the complete defect ascertained is corrected
with P29.36 = 1.
P29.36 = 1 is normally set for the first control measurement to make a basic setting. Sub-
sequent corrections, in particular when checks are automatically started, are normally car-
ried out with P29.36 < 1. This makes it possible to filter the control results and eliminate
random measuring errors in the control measurement.
P29.37 Correction Speed Default: 0 s

To ensure that the correction does not bring about any feed rate jumps, it can be automati-
cally carried out in small steps. If 0 is entered, it is corrected
in one step. P29.37 defines the time between two steps of 0.1 % of the nominal load (at
tare correction) or 0.1 % of P10.02 Range Correction (with range correction).

Parameters
P29.38 AO: Check Measurement Result Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AO
Defines the analog output channel for the result of the control (loss in bin weight) / (ad-
vancement in continuous scales counter). Updating is made at the start of an acknowled-
gement phase. The output value is retained until the next acknowledgement phase. The
correction quantification in P29.36 Correction Evaluation is disregarded at output.
Signal scaling is linear between 4 ... 20 mA = 0.9 ... 1.1.

Examples:
4 mA = 0.9
12 mA = 1
20 mA = 1.1
P29.39 DO: Check Gate Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
This parameter relates only to the check by increase in weight of the bin (P29.01 Type of
Check System = Filling System).
Procedure: the control gate will divert the material either through the normal conveyance
path or into the control bin. The correct position of the control gate can be monitored by the
digital input 'Echo Control Gate' (P29.40 Check Gate Feedback).
P29.40 Check Gate Feedback Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
This parameter only relates to the check by weight increase in the bin (P29.01 Type of
Check System = filling system).
Defines the input channel for the position return signal from the control gate. The return
signal is not monitored with the setting 'n/a'.
If there is no feedback from the control gate within the monitoring time (P29.41 Check Gate
Time), the control gate error event is set and the KME is canceled.
Also refer to: P29.39 DO: Check Gate, P29.42 Event: Check Gate Error

Parameters
P29.41 Check Gate Time Default: 0 s

Tolerated time allowed for the control gate to move between command and position return
signal.
Also refer to:

P29.39 DO: Check Gate
P29.40 Check Gate Feedback
P29.42 Event: Check Gate Error
P29.42 Event: Check Gate Error Default: W1

The control gate did not reach its end position within the tolerance time.
Possible cause:
- gate has no power
- gate is stuck
Also refer to:

P29.41 Check Gate Time
P29.43 Limit Max. Bin Error Default: 0 %

Min: 0 % Max: 10000 %
The bin fill level is measured at the start and the end of the measuring phase. Both measur-
ing points are monitored for disturbances in the measurement.
If the malfunctions exceed the threshold value in P29.43, another attempt at measuring will
be started after a time defined by P29.21 Damping Time. However, if this attempt also re-
turns excessively high malfunctions, the check will be canceled, the result discarded and an
event identified (P29.44 Event: Bin Error). Disturbances are not monitored if the setting is
0%.
How to set:
1. set the threshold to 10,000 %
2. Monitor the service display 'KME Window' during the check procedure
and note the max. value.
3. enter approximately 3 times the value in the parameter P29.43 Limit Max. Bin Error.

Parameters
P29.44 Event: Bin Error Default: W1

Large disturbances in the weight signal of the control bin were detected during the check.
The check was canceled and the result discarded. It is also canceled if the event class has
been set to IG.
Possible cause:
- force bypasses at the control bin
- pressure forces acting on the control bin
- wind forces acting on the control bin
Also refer to: P29.43 Limit Max. Bin Error
P29.45 DO: Correction Error Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Defines the output channel for displaying an error condition of the control measurement.
The output is set if one of the events CH 04 - CH 07 occurs (measuring result lies outside
tolerance levels). The check is finished, although the correction has not been carried out.
7.4.2.30 Parameter Block 30 - Moisture

For certain processes, other units than units of weight per time may be more relevant to the feeding
process. One example is bulk material moisture. The relevant parameter is not the weight of the moist ma-
terial but rather the weight of the dry material.
The measuring system can correct bulk solid properties such as these. This requires that the disturbance
variable, e.g. the moisture or ash content, be measured and the result sent to the system. The measuring
system then calculates the bulk solid components relevant to the process and feeds it instead of the total
weight.
P30.01 Moisture Active Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
The actual feed rate can be corrected with the moisture block. The corrected value will
always be used for the controller input and the batch counter if moisture correction is active.
The pulses for an external counter can be output configured with P30.14 Pulse Counter
corrected, corrected or not corrected.
NO: No correction
YES: Weight signal is corrected
The parameters relevant to moisture correction are visible only when correction is active.

Parameters
P30.02 Moisture Select Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
FB
With factory default value "n/a" , the correction is not active.
P30.03 AI: Moisture Measurement Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AI
Defines the input signal for the measuring signal of the error effects, e.g. the moisture con-
tent.
Also refer to:

P30.04 Nominal Moisture
P30.05 Moisture Offset
P30.06 Moisture Range
P30.04 Nominal Moisture Default: 20 %

Min: 0 % Max: 100 %
Maximum value of additives (moisture) content as a percentage of weight.
Also refer to:

P30.03 AI: Moisture Measurement
P30.05 Moisture Offset
P30.06 Moisture Range
P30.05 Moisture Offset Default: 4 mA

Current for a correction value of 0%
Reference value: P30.04 Nominal Moisture
Also refer to: P30.03 AI: Moisture Measurement, P30.06 Moisture Range
P30.06 Moisture Range Default: 20 mA

Current for a correction value of 100%
Reference value: P30.04 Nominal Moisture
Also refer to: P30.03 AI: Moisture Measurement, P30.05 Moisture Offset

Parameters
P30.07 DO: Moisture active Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Definition of the output channel for signal "Correction active".
Also refer to: P30.02 Moisture Select
P30.08 Moisture MAX Default: 10 %

Min: 0 % Max: 100 %
Threshold for monitoring the moisture as a portion of the moisture content of the overall
weight.
Also refer to: P30.09 DO: Moisture MAX, P30.10 Event: Moisture MAX
P30.09 DO: Moisture MAX Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Defines the output channel for the signal that indicates that the moisture content has ex-
ceeded its threshold. The output is independent of the class of the related event.
Also refer to: P30.08 Moisture MAX, P30.10 Event: Moisture MAX
P30.10 Event: Moisture MAX Default: W1

The measured value of the interference quantity (for instance, the moisture) has been ex-
ceeded. Feeding errors may arise.
Possible cause:
- extremely damp bulk material
- moisture measurement measuring error
Also refer to: P30.08 Moisture MAX, P30.09 DO: Moisture MAX
P30.11 AO: Flow Rate corrected Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AO
Defines the output channel for the feed rate corrected for the disturbance value (moisture).
Also refer to: P30.12 AO: Flow Rate Offset, P30.13 AO: Flow Rate Range

Parameters
P30.12 AO: Flow Rate Offset Default: 4 mA

Output current for a performance of 0 %.
P30.13 AO: Flow Rate Range Default: 20 mA

The output current for a performance of 100 %.
P30.14 Pulse Counter corrected Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
Defines the output signal for connecting an external impulse counter.
NO: The impulse output supplies the uncorrected material quantity

YES: The impulse output supplies the bulk material quantity corrected by the correction
factor, e.g. moisture.
7.4.2.31 Parameter Block 31 - Dead Time

The system allows the switch-on command and setpoints to be delayed. This is a useful function if several
consecutive feeders operate as a collective system and the batch must be correct at all times. The first
feeder receives the control commands instantaneously, the following feeder receives them after a delay
corresponding to the transit time of the bulk material from the first feeder to the collection point (= dead
time).
P31.01 Dead Time Active Default: NO

Alternative: NO
Setpoint + ON/OFF
Setpoint
ON/OFF
There is a dead time element for the setpoint and ON/OFF command each, each of which
can be activated separately.
NO: no dead time active

Setpoint: dead time active for the setpoint only
ON/OFF: dead time for ON/OFF only active
Setpoint + ON/OF: dead time for setpoint and ON/OFF active
P31.02 Dead Time Default: 0 s

Min: 0 s Max: 600 s
The value for dead time is valid for start/stop commands and setpoint changes.

Parameters
P31.03 Setpoint Select Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
FB
Activates the setpoint delay. If set to 'n/a', alterations are carried out with no delay.
P31.04 Setpoint Clock ON Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
FB
The signal indicates whether the transport equipment is running and thus whether the delay
should continue running. The delay is always on If set to 'n/a'.
P31.05 ON/OFF Select Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
FB
Activates the delay for start/stop commands. If set to 'n/a', alterations are carried out with
no delay.
P31.06 ON/OFF Clock ON Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
FB
The signal indicates whether the transport equipment is running and thus whether the delay
should continue running. The delay is always on If set to 'n/a'.
P31.07 Time Elements Preassign Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
FB
With this command the timing elements are preallocated with the current setpoint or
the current ON/OFF command.
P31.08 Initialise Time Elements Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
FB
The setpoint element is preallocated with ZERO at initialization and the ON/OFF element is
preallocated with OFF.

Parameters
P31.09 DO: Dead Time Active Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Digital output for active dead-time setpoint or active dead-time ON/OFF.
P31.10 DO: Setpoint Active Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Digital output for active dead-time setpoint.
P31.11 DO: ON/OFF Active Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Digital output active dead-time ON/OFF.
7.4.2.32 Parameter Block 32 - Linearization

The parameters of this group define the characteristic curve of a non-linear external component and offset
its effect. Measured value acquisition on weighfeeders is slightly non-linear dependant upon belt loading.
4 points along the characteristic curve are used for linearization. The points are determined from the actual
(correct) value of the quantity of bulk solids conveyed over a period of time, ascertained by a separate
check scale at the appropriate belt load, and the quantity of bulk solids added up by the weighfeeder over
the period of the measurement. Another point of the characteristic curve is the origin (0% / 0%). The charac-
teristic curve is continued at a continuous gradient above the highest point.
The reference for all linearizing points is nominal belt loading (service value).
P32.01 Linearization ON Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
Load measuring can be linearized with this parameters.
The 4 linearization points can be determined by calibration with calibration weights or using
material. Not required or not measured points must be laid either outside the measuring
range or must be interpolated.
Consider the location of the linearization in the signal processing (--> appendix).
Detailed calibration instructions are in the appendix.
P32.02 Linearization S1 Default: 25 % Q

Min: 0.01 % Q Max: 1000 % Q
Linearization point 1:
Actual belt load, e.g. determined using calibration weights or by material measurement.

Parameters
P32.03 Linearization I1 Default: 25 % Q

Min: 0.01 % Q Max: 1000 % Q
Linearization point 1:
The load measured from the weighfeeder.

Min: 0.01 % Q Max: 1000 % Q
Linearization point 2.
Otherwise as P32.02 Linearization S1

Min: 0.01 % Q Max: 1000 % Q
Refer to P32.03 Linearization I1 for a description

Min: 0.01 % Q Max: 1000 % Q

Min: 0.01 % Q Max: 1000 % Q

Min: 0.01 % Q Max: 1000 % Q

Min: 0.01 % Q Max: 1000 % Q

Parameters
P32.10 Event: Linearization Error Default: W2

Not a monotonically increasing curve.
A monotonically increasing compensation curve is monitored when:

- linearization is switched on,
- a parameter is altered
7.4.2.33 Parameter Block 33 - Flow Gate

The parameters of this group are only relevant if the prefeeder is designed as a position-regulated feed gate
for the bulk solids to the feeder scale.
P33.01 AI: Position Flow Gate Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AI
The definition of the input channel for the feedback signal for the position of the prefeeder.
Also refer to:

P33.02 AI: Offset
P33.03 AI: Range
P33.02 AI: Offset Default: 4 mA

The input flow at the "just closed" position of the feed gate.
P33.03 AI: Range Default: 20 mA

The input flow for the nominal position is 100 %. There should be a material flow of 100 %
of the nominal operating range P03.01 Nominal Flow Rate at the nominal position under
nominal conditions for the bulk solids.
P33.04 AO: Position Flow Gate Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AO
The definition of the analog output channel with the information on the position of the pre-
feeder to external equipment. Norming via P33.05 AO: Offset and P33.06 AO: Range
P33.05 AO: Offset Default: 4 mA

The output current for the 0 % prefeeder position is opened ('just closed').

Parameters
P33.06 AO: Range Default: 20 mA

The output current for the 100 % prefeeder position is opened ('just completely opened').
P33.07 Event: MIN Flow Gate Default: W2

The event is identified when the prefeeder has run past the limit switch for the minimum
position. It is used to protect the mechanical equipment.
Possible causes:
Defects in the prefeeder control unit
Actions:
Check the control unit.
P33.08 Position MIN Flow Gate Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
The definition of the input channel for the signal from the limit switch on the prefeeder for
the minimum open position.
P33.09 Event: MAX Flow Gate Default: W2

The event is identified when the prefeeder has run past the limit switch for the maximum
position. It is used to protect the mechanical equipment.
Possible causes:
Actions:
P33.10 Position MAX Flow Gate Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
The definition of the input channels for the signal of the limit switch on the prefeeder for the
maximum open position.
7.4.2.34
7.4.2.34 Parameter Block 34 - 2-Sensor Slip
The slippage of the feed belt can be ascertained either with a mark put into the belt or by measuring the
speed at two different points. In general, one measuring point is mounted on the belt drive and the second

Parameters
measuring point is mounted on a roll moved by the belt. Monitoring them ascertains the ratio of the two
speeds and reports any deviations that indicate that the belt is slipping through or tearing.
Slippage can be identified more quickly through the second sensor and the appendix contains details on
evaluating it.
P34.01 2-Sensor Slip active Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
Activating slippage identification over two speed sensors.
P34.02 Source Sensor 1 Default: Speed

Alternative: Speed
DI
Defining the signal that is supposed to be evaluated for the first speed measurement. Gen-
erally, the sensor on the drive motor is used.
Speed: The speed sensor on the drive motor is used

DI: A separate sensor is used. The input is defined for the sensor in P34.03 DI: Sensor 1.
P34.03 DI: Sensor 1 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
The definition of the input channel for the first sensor at P34.02 Source Sensor 1 = DI.
The requirements made of the input are described in the appendix.
P34.04 Characteristic Value Sensor 1 Default: 100 I/m

Min: 0.01 I/m Max: 1000000 I/m
The number of pulses of the first sensor per meter of the conveyor belt
The parameter is only relevant to P34.02 Source Sensor 1 = DI
P34.05 DI: Sensor 2 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
The definition of the input channel for the second sensor.
The requirements made of the input are described in the appendix.
P34.06 Characteristic Value Sensor 2 Default: 100 I/m

Min: 0.01 I/m Max: 1000000 I/m
The number of pulses of the second sensor per meter of the conveyor belt

Parameters
P34.07 Slip Value 2 Default: 2 % LB

The threshold value for slippage per belt circuit in percent of a complete belt circuit.
P34.08 Event: Slip 2 Default: W1

The event is identified when the slippage exceeds the set threshold value.
Possible causes:
- contamination on the belt, the head pulley or the pulley with the second sensor
- the belt slips on the head pulley (higher draw-off strength and bulk solids stuck in the inlet)
- sluggish pulley with the second sensor
Actions:
- make a visual check of the bulk solids situation
- check the drive motor and gear
- check the second pulley
P34.09 DO: Slip 2 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The output becomes active when the slippage is in excess of the threshold value in P34.07
Slip Value 2.
The output functions independant of the event class set in P34.08 Event: Slip 2.
7.4.2.35 Parameter Block 35 - Pressure Compensation

Pressure compensation has the function of compensating the vertical forces resulting from pressures on the
bin in the weight signal. The pressure is measured, the resulting force acting on the surface area affected by
the applied pressure calculated and the bin weight value corrected additively.
P35.01 Compensation Active Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
Activates pressure compensation.
If compensation is not activated, the associated parameters will not be displayed in Easy-
Serve.

Parameters
P35.02 Compensation Source Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AI
LC
The definition of the input channel for the pressure signal.
Also refer to:

P35.03 Pressure Characteristic Value
P35.04 Pressure Rated Cap.
Also refer to the following when adjusting P35.02 = AI :

P35.18 Compensation analog Input Offset
P35.19 Compensation analog Input Range
P35.03 Pressure Characteristic Value Default: 2 mV/V

Nominal sensitivity of the pressure sensors (nameplate).
P35.04 Pressure Rated Cap. Default: 0.5 Bar

Min: 0.001 Bar Max: 2000 Bar
Nominal capacity of the pressure sensors (nameplate).
P35.05 Filter Pressure Value DMS Default: 0.25 s

Min: 0.25 s Max: 300 s
The filter was adjusted for the input signal if P35.02 Compensation Source = LC.
P35.06 Event: DMS-Input Default: A

The event is identified if there is a substantial defect in the signal of the pressure sensor
and the pressure signal is read in through the VME interface.
Possible causes:
- defective sensor cable
- sensor improperly connected

Parameters
P35.07 Event: DMS-Input > MAX Default: A

This event is identified when the output signal of the pressure measuring sensor is over its
nominal value.
Possible causes:
- overload on the pressure sensor
- defective sensor
P35.08 Event: DMS-Input < MIN Default: W1

The event is identified when the output signal of the pressure measuring sensor is substan-
tially below zero.
Possible causes:
- unexpected pressure conditions
- defective sensor
P35.09 Zero Default: 0 Bar

Min: -100 Bar Max: 1000 Bar
The compensation of a potential offset of the pressure sensor
Setting:
P35.09 = 0
Read off the service value of the pressure with atmospheric pressure on the sensor
Adjust the value read in P35.09
Finally, the service display should display the value 0 for pressure.
P35.10 Norming Default: 0 kg/Bar

Min: 0 kg/Bar Max: 220000000 kg/Bar
Adjusting the proportionality factor between pressure and the force resulting from pressure
on the load cells of the bin.
Setting:
- initially adjust P35.09
- note the weight m0 of the bin at the pressure = 0
- impinge the bin with any (although constant) pressure
- read the service value of the pressure (p1)
- note the weight m1 of the bin
- adjust P35.10 = (m1 - m0) / p1
The bin weight shown should now always be m0 regardless of the pressure.

Parameters
P35.11 Pressure-MIN Default: 0 %

Min: -200 % Max: 200 %
The minimum threshold value for pressure monitoring.
Reference value: P35.04
P35.12 Event: Pressure-MIN Default: W2

The pressure in the bin has fallen below the lower threshold.
Possible causes:
- soiled sensor
- defective sensor
P35.13 DO: Pressure-MIN Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The output becomes active when the measured pressure value is below the threshold value
in P35.11 Pressure-MIN.
The output functions independant of the selection of event class in P35.12 Event: Pressure-
MIN.
P35.14 Pressure-MAX Default: 105 %

Min: -100 % Max: 200 %
The maximum threshold value for pressure monitoring.
Reference value: P35.04 Pressure Rated Cap.
P35.15 Event: Pressure-MAX Default: W2

The pressure in the bin has exceeded the upper threshold value.
Possible causes:
- soiled sensor
- defective sensor

Parameters
P35.16 DO: Pressure-MAX Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The output becomes active when the measured pressure value is above the threshold val-
ue in P35.14 Pressure-MAX.
The output functions independant of the selection of event class in P35.15 Event: Pressure-
MAX.
P35.17 DI: Switch On Compensation Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
The definition of the input channel for activating pressure compensation.
Compensation is always active with P35.17 DI: Switch On Compensation = n/a .
P35.18 Compensation analog Input Offset Default: 4 mA

The input flow for pressure zero.
Only relevant if P35.02 Compensation Source = AI
P35.19 Compensation analog Input Range Default: 20 mA

The input flow for nominal pressure adjusted in P35.04 Pressure Rated Cap..
Only relevant if P35.02 Compensation Source = AI
7.4.2.36 Parameter Block 36 - FCB analog outputs

The DISOCONT Tersus has a small PLC, the logical analog outputs of which are tied to the physical outputs
by parameters in this block.
Refer to the chapter 'Appendix' → 'PLC Functionality (optional)' for information on programming the PLC.
P36.01 FCB_AO 01 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AO
Assigning the physical output signal for analog output 1 of the PLC.
P36.02 Offset FCB_AO 1 Default: 4 mA

Output current for a PLC signal of 0.

Parameters
P36.03 Range FCB_AO 1 Default: 20 mA

Output current for a PLC signal of 100%
Reference value: P36.04 Reference FCB_AO 1
See also: P36.01 FCB_AO 01
P36.04 Reference FCB_AO 1 Default: 1000

Min: 1 Max: 1000000
Maximum value of the signal at the PLC analog output.
Also refer to: P36.01 FCB_AO 01, P36.03 Range FCB_AO 1

Alternative: n/a
AO
Corresponds to P36.01 FCB_AO 01

Description see:
P36.01 FCB_AO 01
P36.02 Offset FCB_AO 1
P36.03 Range FCB_AO 1
P36.04 Reference FCB_AO 1

Description see:
P36.01 FCB_AO 01

Min: 1 Max: 1000000
Description see:
P36.01 FCB_AO 01

Parameters

Alternative: n/a
AO

Description see:
P36.01 FCB_AO 01

Description see:
P36.01 FCB_AO 01

Min: 1 Max: 1000000
Description see:
P36.01 FCB_AO 01

Alternative: n/a
AO

Description see:
P36.01 FCB_AO 01

Parameters

Description see:
P36.01 FCB_AO 01

Min: 1 Max: 1000000
Description see:
P36.01 FCB_AO 01

Alternative: n/a
AO

Description see:
P36.01 FCB_AO 01

Description see:
P36.01 FCB_AO 01

Parameters

Min: 1 Max: 1000000
Description see:
P36.01 FCB_AO 01
P36.21 FCB Variant Default: Empty
Name of the required function block link. This name is automatically transferred to the pa-
rameter when a new link is loaded. When the system is started after turning on the voltage,
it checks to see whether the name of the function block link loaded is the same as the
name entered in the parameter. Event P36.22 Event: FCB-Error is identified if the names
are different.
This check serves as a control if a replacement part is used.
P36.22 Event: FCB-Error Default: A

This event is identified if the function block link loaded does not correspond to the link
stored in the parameter.
Caution: It probably does not have the full functionality. Unreliable operating states
may arise.
Possible causes:
- it forgot to load the correct link after exchanging the VCU.
- the name in the parameter was changed manually.
Steps to be taken:
- load the function block link with the correct name.
7.4.2.37 Parameter Block 37 - FCB digital outputs

The DISOCONT Tersus has a small PLC, the logical binary outputs of which are tied to the physical outputs
by parameters in this block.
Refer to the chapter 'Appendix' → 'PLC Functionality (optional)' for information on programming the PLC.
P37.01 FCB_DO 01 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Allocation of the physical output channel to the binary output signal of the internal PLC.

Parameters

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Parameters

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Parameters

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO
7.4.2.38 Parameter Block 38 - Data Logging

The parameters in this group configure the recording of process data. The recorded data are available at the
operating panel and can be easily accessed via Ethernet on the controller homepage.
P38.01 Hourly Total Time Default: 0 min

Min: -1 min Max: 59 min
Moment at which the totalizing counter begins logging in minutes from the start of a full
hour.
P38.02 Daily Total Time Default: 0 min

Min: -1 min Max: 1439 min
Moment at which the totalizing counter begins logging in minutes from the start of a day.

Parameters
P38.03 Logger cycle time Default: 1 min

Min: 1 min Max: 1439 min
Logging cycle time for the Data Log Values selected by P38.04 ... P38.13.
P38.04 Data Log Value 1 Default: 752
Select the process value for recording. You can find the identification number of a value in
the data communication manual.
Also refer to:

P38.03 Logger cycle time
These manuals:
Similar to P38.04 Data Log Value 1

Parameters
7.4.2.39 Parameter Block 39 - Configuration HMI Values

The parameters in this group define the process variables to be displayed on the 'Values' page of the oper-
ating panel (HMI, OP) for a DISOCONT Tersus.
On an INTECONT Tersus these values can be called up with the '9' key.
EasyServe can be used for easy configuration or the settings can be made with the help of the allocation
map in the data description of the serial interface in the operating panel.
You can find the characteristic values (ID) belonging to the process variables in the manual on data com-
munication:
P39.01 HMI Value 01 Default: 1996
Identification number (ID) of the desired process variable.

Parameters

Parameters
7.4.2.40 Parameter Block 40 - Local Mode (Speed)

The parameters of this group are only relevant if a VMO model local operating panel is used to control the
drives. Drives can be controlled individually in local operation for service jobs.
This block contains the parameters for continually functioning drives, feed gates (rollers) with built-in posi-
tion control or valves.
Each VMO can control as many as 5 drives. The parameters for these drives are marked with block num-
bers 1 ... 5 in this group of parameters.
You can find a logic diagram of the local control unit in the appendix.
Note: Communication to the VMO has to be activated via parameters P01.12 to P01.15 Event: Communica-
tion VMO20100-Unit 2.
Furthermore, the parameters in the VMO should also be adjusted accordingly in addition to the pa-
rameters in the VCU. This is generally done at the manufacturer's.
P40.01 Motor Select (Block 1) Default: VMO1 Motor1

Alternative: VMO1 Motor1
VMO1 Motor2
VMO1 Motor3
VMO1 Motor4
VMO1 Motor5
VMO2 Motor1
VMO2 Motor2
VMO2 Motor3
VMO2 Motor4
VMO2 Motor5
not active
Selecting the drives in VMO that is assigned to parameter block 1. It is then operated in
VMO with the appropriate line.
VMOx MotorY: The drive is linked to motor Y in VMO x.
P40.02 ON in Remote (Block 1) Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
LS
The signal running through the selected output channel is linked with the ON command for
the drive. When the output becomes active, the drive is shown in VMO as running. The
drive can be switched on and off via VMO in local operation .
n/a: The drive in VMO is not linked with any signal. This motor should be deactivated in
VMO.

Parameters
P40.03 Controller Magnitude (Block 1) Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
LS
The signal running over the selected output channel is linked to the controller magnitude for
the drive. The value of the controller magnitude is shown in VMO and can be specified in
VMO in local operation.
n/a: The drive is not linked to any signal. This setting is selected when the drive is operated
at a constant speed.
P40.04 Controller Magnitude Offset (Block 1) Default: 0 mA

The controller magnitude flow where the motor stops right out of rotating operation so that it
no longer conveys bulk solids.
P40.05 JOG enable (Block 1) Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
Activating switching on the drive even with a defect.
NO: The drive cannot be switched on with an alarm.
YES: When there is an alarm, the motor can still be started in local operation of VMO.
However, it only runs until the start button is pressed. This operating mode only makes
sense with belt drives that have to be started with belt drift to move the belt into normal
position again.
P40.06 Release local Start (Block 1) Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
LS
The definition of the input channel of the signal for releasing local operations in VMO. The
VMO can only be switched in local operation when this signal is on. This input makes it
possible to switch in local operation via key switch or with signals from the host computer.
n/a: Local operation can be selected in VMO at any time.
Note: the parameters MOTOR1.MAN_AUTO or GENPAR.KEYB_CMN_MODE also have to

be set in VMO.

Parameters
P40.07 DI: External Error 1 (Block 1) Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
The definition of the input channel for the 1st malfunction signal.
Exception: Refer to P40.05 JOG enable (Block 1)
The malfunction inputs P40.07, P40.08 and P40.09 work at the same priority. The drive
cannot be switched on in local operation if there is one of these malfunctions.

Alternative: n/a
DI
The definition of the input channel for the 2nd malfunction signal.

Alternative: n/a
DI
The definition of the input channel for the 3rd malfunction signal.
P40.10 DI: ON Motor (2nd) (Block 1) Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
The definition of the output channel for the drive is running signal. The output is active pre-
cisely when the output defined via P40.02 ON in Remote (Block 1) is also active.
P40.11 Motor Select (Block 2) Default: VMO1 Motor2

VMO1 Motor2
VMO1 Motor3
VMO1 Motor4
VMO1 Motor5
VMO2 Motor1
VMO2 Motor2
VMO2 Motor3
VMO2 Motor4
VMO2 Motor5
not active
Refer to the corresponding parameter for drive block 1 (P40.01 Motor Select (Block 1) to
P40.10 DI: ON Motor (2nd) (Block 1)) for the function.

Parameters

Alternative: n/a
LS

Alternative: n/a
LS


Alternative: NO
YES

Alternative: n/a
DI
LS

Alternative: n/a
DI

Parameters

Alternative: n/a
DI

Alternative: n/a
DI

Alternative: n/a
DO
P40.21 Motor Select (Block 3) Default: not active

VMO1 Motor2
VMO1 Motor3
VMO1 Motor4
VMO1 Motor5
VMO2 Motor1
VMO2 Motor2
VMO2 Motor3
VMO2 Motor4
VMO2 Motor5
not active

Alternative: n/a
LS

Parameters

Alternative: n/a
LS


Alternative: NO
YES

Alternative: n/a
DI
LS

Alternative: n/a
DI

Alternative: n/a
DI

Parameters

Alternative: n/a
DI

Alternative: n/a
DO

VMO1 Motor2
VMO1 Motor3
VMO1 Motor4
VMO1 Motor5
VMO2 Motor1
VMO2 Motor2
VMO2 Motor3
VMO2 Motor4
VMO2 Motor5
not active

Alternative: n/a
LS

Alternative: n/a
LS

Parameters


Alternative: NO
YES

Alternative: n/a
DI
LS

Alternative: n/a
DI

Alternative: n/a
DI

Alternative: n/a
DI

Parameters

Alternative: n/a
DO

VMO1 Motor2
VMO1 Motor3
VMO1 Motor4
VMO1 Motor5
VMO2 Motor1
VMO2 Motor2
VMO2 Motor3
VMO2 Motor4
VMO2 Motor5
not active

Alternative: n/a
LS

Alternative: n/a
LS


Parameters

Alternative: NO
YES

Alternative: n/a
DI
LS

Alternative: n/a
DI

Alternative: n/a
DI

Alternative: n/a
DI

Alternative: n/a
DO
7.4.2.41 Parameter Block 41 - Local Mode (Gate)

The parameters of this group are only relevant if a VMO model local operating panel is used to control the
drives. Drives can be controlled individually in local operation for service jobs.
This block contains the parameters for position-controlled prefeeders that are controlled by the VCU with the

Parameters
Open and Closed signals.
You can find a logic diagram of the local control unit in the appendix.
Note: Communication to the VMO has to be activated via parameters P01.12 to P01.15 Event: Communica-
tion VMO20100-Unit 2.
Furthermore, the parameters in the VMO should also be adjusted accordingly in addition to the pa-
rameters in the VCU. This is generally done at the manufacturer's.
P41.01 Motor Select Default: VMO1 Motor5

VMO1 Motor2
VMO1 Motor3
VMO1 Motor4
VMO1 Motor5
VMO2 Motor1
VMO2 Motor2
VMO2 Motor3
VMO2 Motor4
VMO2 Motor5
not active
Select the drive in VMO that is assigned the parameter block. It is then operated in VMO
with the appropriate line.
VMOx MotorY: The drive is linked to motor Y in VMO x.
P41.02 OPEN in Remote Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
LS
The definition of the output channels for the open feed gate signal.
P41.03 DI: Limit Switch OPEN Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
The definition of the input channel for the feed gate open in end position signal. The limit
switch stops the further operation of the slide gate in the OPEN direction to protect the me-
chanical equipment.
P41.04 CLOSE in Remote Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
LS
The definition of the output channels for the close feed gate signal.

Parameters
P41.05 DI: Limit Switch CLOSE Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
The definition of the input channel for the feed gate is closed in end position signal. The
limit switch stops the further operation of the slide gate in the CLOSED direction to protect
the mechanical equipment.
P41.06 Release local Start Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
LS
The definition of the input channel of the signal for releasing local operations in VMO. The
VMO can only be switched in local operation when this signal is on. This input makes it
possible to switch in local operation via key switch or with signals from the host computer.
n/a: Local operation can be selected in VMO at any time.
Note: the parameters MOTOR1.MAN_AUTO or GENPAR.KEYB_CMN_MODE also have to

be set in VMO.
P41.07 DI: External Error 1 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
The definition of the input channel for the 1st malfunction signal.
The malfunction inputs P41.07, P41.08 and P41.09 work at the same priority.

Alternative: n/a
DI
The definition of the input channel for the 2nd malfunction signal.

Alternative: n/a
DI
The definition of the input channel for the 3rd malfunction signal.

Event Messages
8 Event Messages
DANGER
Events register abnormal states, e.g. malfunctions or exceeded thre-
shold values.
A running feeder can be a hazard to people or to property.
The cause of event messages must be corrected before events are ac-
knowledged!
Event messages are grouped together.

Group Identifier Event Domain
SY Internally monitoring the control system

SC Irregularities in operator control or peripheral control
WE Fault in the external power electronics
WM Fault in the mechanical system
MF Fault in the bulk material flow
IL Messages from interlocking with system control
CO Internal controller malfunction message
CA Adjustment fault
HI Threshold value exceeded upwards
LO Threshold value exceeded downwards
Tab. 38 : Event groups
Note:
In the following list, parameters related to the indicated event are shown in parentheses.
8.1 Events Details
8.1.1 Event Group: Calibration

CA01 Event: Error LC Input (P07.04)
The load cell cable is improperly connected, not connected or has been interrupted.
Measures:
Note:
The power supply must be switched off and on again if the scales cannot be switch-
ed on even after the error has been rectified.

Event Messages
CA02 Event: Tachometer Input (P07.03)

The signals at the feeder drive's impulse speedometer input are outside of the speci-
fied range.
Possible causes:
- there is a fault in the speed impulse sensor cable (check the shielding and the wir-
ing)
- the sensor has been incorrectly calibrated
CA03 Event: Error LC Input (Bin) (P26.07)

The load cell cable is improperly connected, not connected or has been interrupted.
Steps to take :
- if the cabling is intact: replace the load cell amplifier VME in the VCU
Note:
The power supply must be switched off and on again if the scales still cannot be
switched on even after the error has been rectified.
CA04 Event: Error LC Input (2nd Bridge) (P28.07)

The load cell cable is improperly connected, not connected at all or has been discon-
nected. The load cell may be faulty.
Actions:
CA05 Event: Linearization Error (P32.10)

Not a monotonically increasing curve.
A monotonically increasing compensation curve is monitored when:

- linearization is switched on,
- a parameter is altered

Event Messages
CA06 Event: Tare Correction (P06.13)

This event is identified if the change in tare identified by the automatic zeroing sys-
tem exceeds the threshold value in P06.12 Zeroing Limit.
Possible causes:
- low quantities of bulk material on the belt
- error in the weighing mechanics
Actions:
- visual inspection of the belt and the weighing system.
- run the base tare adjustment program
- check weight measuring using test weights
CA07 Event: DMS-Input (P35.06)

The event is identified if there is a substantial defect in the signal of the pressure
sensor and the pressure signal is read in through the VME interface.
Possible causes:
- defective sensor cable
8.1.2 Event Group: Check Measurement

CH01 Event: Minimum Check Quantity (P29.16)
The event is identified when the control measurement was finished after the given
number of belt circuits before the given minimum quantity of bulk solids has been
discharged.
Possible cause:
The belt load is less than expected. The result of the check might be afflicted with an
impermissibly large defect.
Remedy:
Increase the belt load
CH02 Event: Minimum Fill Weight (P29.18)

The fill level has fallen below the threshold value in P29.17 Minimum Fill Weight dur-
ing a check.
Possible cause:
- bulk material density higher than specified
- unfavorable settings in P29.13 Check Quantity or P29.12 Check Circuits, P29.17
Minimum Fill Weight or P29.14 Storage Quantity

Event Messages
CH03 Event: Maximum Fill Weight (P29.20)

The maximum fill level was exceeded during the check. The control measurement is
finished early.
Possible cause:
The storage quantity (P29.14 Storage Quantity) is greater than the maximum control
fill level (P29.19 Maximum Fill Weight). The check will be canceled just after it starts.
In case of an error, check the magnitude of both parameters.
CH04 Event: Absolute Tare Correction Error (P29.32)

The current correction would make the sum of all zero-point corrections greater than
the threshold value P29.30 Absolute Range since the last basic tare calibration.
There is no automatic correction. The operator can acknowledge the message and
enter the result manually. Monitoring and messaging occur in the acknowledgement
phase. The correction weighting factor P29.36 Correction Evaluation is not taken into
account in the error analysis.
Cause of the event:

Actions:
- checking bin weighing (the stability of the weight display when loading and unload-
ing)
CH05 Event: Relative Tare Correction Error (P29.33)

The result of the current correction deviates more greatly than the threshold value
P29.31 Relative Range from that of the last measurement. There is no automatic
correction. The operator can acknowledge the message and enter the result manual-
ly. It is monitored and reported in the acknowledgement phase. The correction
weighting factor P29.36 Correction Evaluation is not taken into account in the error
analysis.
Cause of the event:

Actions:
- checking bin weighing (the stability of the weight display when loading and unload-
ing)

Event Messages
CH06 Event: Absolute Span Correction Error (P29.34)

The threshold in P29.30 Absolute Range was exceeded by the sum of all corrections
for multiplicative errors.
Bprod = (1 - B * K) * 100 %
Bprod: Sum of all previous corrections as a %

B: newly calculated correction factor = (loss in control bin weight) / (advancement in
continuous scales counter)
K: product of all previous corrections stored in P10.02 Range Correction
CH07 Event: Relative Span Correction Error (P29.35)

The multiplicative error just ascertained exceeds the threshold value in P29.31 Rela-
tive Range.
Brel = (1 - B )× 100
Brel: error relative to the current adjustment of the continuous scales as a %

B: newly calculated correction factor = (loss in control bin weight) / (advancement in
continuous scales counter)
CH08 Event: Feeder Not Stopped (P29.25)

The control waits until conveyance into the control bin is stopped.
Possible cause:
- long time required to end filling
- incorrect control sequence for bin filling
CH09 Event: No Check Release (P29.06)

This event is identified if a check has been started but the plant control has not au-
thorized one.
Generally, no steps need to be taken. The event serves only as an indication of the
missing authorization.
CH10 Event: Prepare Check Measurement (P29.26)

The check procedure is in the filling phase or settling time or the fill level is still great-
er than the maximum check fill level (P29.19 Maximum Fill Weight).
For information only. In general, nothing else needs to be done.

Event Messages
CH11 Event: Expect Acceptance (P29.28)

At the end the check system waits for a decision by the operator:
a) accept correction result, correct continuous scales

b) discard correction result and cancel
If 'automatic correction' is active, the operator need only act if a tolerance level is
exceeded (P29.02 Auto Correction = YES).
Step: Communicate decision about correction
CH12 Event: Check Gate Error (P29.42)

This parameter relates only to the check by increase in weight of the bin (P29.01
Type of Check System = Filling System).
The control gate did not reach its end position within the tolerance time.
Possible cause:
- gate has no power
- gate is stuck
Also refer to:

P29.41 Check Gate Time
CH13 Event: Bin Error (P29.44)

Large disturbances in the weight signal of the control bin were detected during the
check. The check was canceled and the result discarded. It is also canceled if the
event class has been set to IG.
Possible cause:
- force bypasses at the control bin
- pressure forces acting on the control bin
- wind forces acting on the control bin
Also refer to: P29.43 Limit Max. Bin Error
8.1.3 Event Group: Controller

CO01 Event: Controller Limited (P11.10)
The Controller Magnitude of the feed rate regulator has reached the upper response
threshold. After a time message HI05 (P11.09) will be output.
1. No material is flowing or material flow is irregular.
2. The external output regulator has been incorrectly set.
Step to take: check the material discharge and the Controller Magnitude (service
value Y). At Nominal Flow Rate Y should be between about 10...14 mA.

Event Messages
CO02 Event: MIN Flow Gate (P33.07)

The event is identified when the prefeeder has run past the limit switch for the mini-
mum position. It is used to protect the mechanical equipment.
Possible causes:
Actions:
CO03 Event: MAX Flow Gate (P33.09)

The event is identified when the prefeeder has run past the limit switch for the maxi-
mum position. It is used to protect the mechanical equipment.
Possible causes:
Actions:
CO04 Event: Bin Load MAX Sensor (P26.29)

The fill level sensor reports a too-high fill level in the hopper.
Possible causes:
- the weight of the bulk material is very low so that the weight-controlled filling is not
shutting off soon enough.
- the refill equipment is not closing correctly.
- the upper fill threshold level P26.13 Control Level MAX has been set too high.
An overfilled hopper can lead to inaccurate check measurements and so to false

adjustment of the calculation of the feed rate.
CO05 Event: Volum. caused by LC-error (P06.17)

This event is identified when the scale has switched to volumetric operation because
of a defect in measured value acquisition. This defect is only identified when two
weighing channels are used for main measured value acquisition and the measured
values of both channels depart from one another by more than 13 %.
Possible causes:
- blocked material in the weighing range
- non-symmetrical belt loading
Only relevant if P06.16 Volum on LC failure = YES

Event Messages
8.1.4 Event Group: Electrical System

WE01 Event: Power Failure (P07.08)
This event is identified once the power supply is restored.
The scales will not switch on automatically, regardless of the event class. The event
must first be acknowledged and the command to start given again before the scales
will restart.
WE02 Event: NAMUR Error VCU1-DI6 (P13.13)

Possible cause:

Possible cause:

Possible cause:

Possible cause:

Event Messages

Possible cause:

Possible cause:
WE08 Event: Analog Input < Offset (P07.12)

One of the analog inputs has a smaller signal than the zero-point offset that was set.
A tolerance of 0.4 mA has been set to avoid constant setting and clearing of the input
signal, in case this input signal should happen to be unsettled.
WE13 Event: NAMUR Error VMO1-DI7 (P13.24)

Possible cause:
WE14 Event: NAMUR Error VMO2-DI7 (P13.25)

Possible cause:

Event Messages
8.1.5 Event Group: Interlock

IL01 Event: Run Disabled (P04.04)
No release signal from the source determined by P04.03 Source Run Enable.
If this event is pending then the downstream transport equipment is most likely not
switched on.
IL02 Event: Mechanics (P24.10)

Defines the event class. The meaning of the event can be gathered from the logic
diagram.
IL03 Event: Electricity (P24.12)

diagram.
IL04 Event: Mechatronics (P24.15)

diagram.
IL05 Event: Not Ready (P24.17)

diagram.
IL06 Event: Not Ready for Start (P24.19)

diagram.
IL10 Event: FCB-Error (P36.22)

This event is identified if the function block link loaded does not correspond to the
link stored in the parameter.
Caution: It probably does not have the full functionality. Unreliable operating
states may arise.
Possible causes:
- it forgot to load the correct link after exchanging the VCU.
- the name in the parameter was changed manually.
Steps to be taken:
- load the function block link with the correct name.

Event Messages
8.1.6 Event Group: Material Flow

MF05 Event: Moisture MAX (P30.10)
The measured value of the interference quantity (for instance, the moisture) has
been exceeded. Feeding errors may arise.
Possible cause:
- extremely damp bulk material
- moisture measurement measuring error
Also refer to: P30.08 Moisture MAX, P30.09 DO: Moisture MAX
MF06 Event: Out of Tolerance (P15.15)

The batch result is outside the tolerance range.
Possible causes:
- highly erratic material flow
- altered feeder discharge behavior
- error in weight calculation due to disturbance forces
MF07 Event: Batch setpoint Limit (P15.19)

Erroneously entered batch setpoint. The value entered is reduced to the permissible
upper limit in P15.18 Batch Setpoint Limit.
Possible causes:
- incorrect entry
- incorrect upper threshold
Also refer to: P15.18 Batch Setpoint Limit
8.1.7 Event Group: MAX

HI01 Event: LC Input > MAX (P07.06)
The load acting on the load cell is greater than 110 % of the sum of the nominal
loads of the load cells.

Possible causes:
- Shunt forces or compression ratios bring about incorrect load cell loading
- incorrect cabling
- faulty load cell

Event Messages
HI02 Event: Actual Flow Rate MAX (P09.04)

Actual feed rate higher than the maximum value set in P09.03 Limit: Actual Flow
Rate MAX
Possible causes:
- disturbance forces from force shunts or pressures acting on the weighing equip-
ment
- feed rate setpoint too large
HI03 Event: Load MAX (P09.08)

The belt load is greater than the maximum value set in P09.07 Limit: Load MAX
Possible causes:
ment
HI04 Event: Speed MAX (P09.12)

The belt speed is greater than the maximum value set in P09.11 Limit: Speed MAX
HI05 Event: Deviation (P11.09)

Maximum Deviation exceeded. The actual feed rate has deviated to far from the
setpoint over too long a period of time.
Possible causes:
- material has been incorrectly handled:
- the bulk material is flowing irregularly or cannot be discharged satisfactorily
- arching in the feed hopper
- there is a backup on the discharge side
- a large quantity of material continues to trickle from the feeder
- the controller has at times come against its limits

- error in the electronics
- check the cable to the external output regulator and to the motor. Check the output
regulator settings (current limiting, speed range)
- calibration error: during initial calibration the regulator was set at such a critical
value that minor changes in the overall properties of the system lead to unreliable
operation.
Also refer to: P11.08 Deviation abs. max., P11.07 Factor Deviation, P11.06 Thre-
shold Deviation, P11.05 Time Deviation

Event Messages
HI10 Event: LC Input > MAX (P26.08)

The load cell load is greater than 110 % of the sum of the load cell nominal loads.

Possible reasons:
- incorrect cabling
- faulty load cell
HI11 Event: Bin Level MAX (P26.19)

The bin level has exceeded the upper threshold.
Possible cause:
- refilling not switching off correctly
HI12 Event: 2nd Bridge MAX (P28.12)

The load on the second weighbridge is in excess of the threshold value.
Possible causes:
- the belt is covered
Actions:
HI14 Event: DMS-Input > MAX (P35.07)

This event is identified when the output signal of the pressure measuring sensor is
over its nominal value.
Possible causes:
- overload on the pressure sensor
- defective sensor

Event Messages
HI16 Event: Pressure-MAX (P35.15)

The pressure in the bin has exceeded the upper threshold value.
Possible causes:
- soiled sensor
- defective sensor
8.1.8 Event Group: Mechanic

WM01 Event: Limit Switch (P13.22)
The event is identified when the belt limit switch has responded.
Possible causes:
- extreme belt off-center run
- contaminated limit switch
- defect on automatic belt tracking
- defect on the belt
Actions:
- make a visual check of the belt run
- correct the belt run with the belt tightening equipment
- check the belt tightening and automatic belt tracking
WM02 Event: Slip (P18.12)

This event is identified if the belt motion does not correspond to that predicted by the
motor revolutions.
Possible causes:
- belt is slipping at the drive pulley
- withdrawal forces are too high
- gearing is defective
- belt or drive pulley heavily soiled
Steps:
- visual inspection of the belt and the bulk material flow
WM03 Event: Belt Skew (P18.10)

Belt has run off-center. Feeder is no longer operable.
Action: See Event: Belt Drift
Related threshold: Belt Skew

Event Messages
WM04 Event: Belt Drift (P18.08)

The belt has exceeded the tolerance levels set.
Steps:
1. Remove any soiling to the tail and drive pulleys
2. Align the belt
Monitoring may also be subject to error. Therefore: keep an eye on the service value
for the belt motion sensor and correct any errors that may arise.
Related threshold value: Belt Drift
WM05 Event: Slip 2 (P34.08)

The event is identified when the slippage exceeds the set threshold value.
Possible causes:
- contamination on the belt, the head pulley or the pulley with the second sensor
- the belt slips on the head pulley (higher draw-off strength and bulk solids stuck in
the inlet)
- sluggish pulley with the second sensor
Actions:
- make a visual check of the bulk solids situation
- check the drive motor and gear
- check the second pulley
WM06 Event: Chain Motion Monitor (P06.10)

This event is identified when the cleaning equipment was switched on below the
feeder scale, although there are not any feedback impulses over a time longer than
the tolerance period.
Possible cause:
- the cleaning equipment is blocked
- the supply voltage is lacking for the equipment
- there is a defect on the impulse sensor
Steps to be taken:
Check the cleaning equipment mechanically and electrically
8.1.9 Event Group: MIN

LO01 Event: LC Input < MIN (P07.05)
The load cell load is less than 3 % of the sum of the load cell nominal loads.
Possible causes:
- incorrect cabling
- faulty load cell

Event Messages
LO02 Event: Actual Flow Rate MIN (P09.02)

The actual feed rate is lower than the minimum value P09.01 Limit: Actual Flow Rate
MIN.
Possible causes:
- no bulk material
ment
- feed rate setpoint too low
LO03 Event: Load MIN (P09.06)

The belt load is less than the minimum value set in P09.05 Limit: Load MIN
Possible causes:
- no bulk material
ment
LO04 Event: Speed MIN (P09.10)

The belt speed is less than the minimum value set in P09.09 Limit: Speed MIN
LO10 Event: DMS-Input < MIN (P35.08)

The event is identified when the output signal of the pressure measuring sensor is
substantially below zero.
Possible causes:
- defective sensor
LO11 Event: Bin Level MIN (P26.16)

The bin level has underrun the lower threshold.
Possible cause:
- refilling working incorrectly

Event Messages
LO12 Event: 2nd Bridge MIN (P28.09)

The load on the second weighbridge has fallen below the threshold value.
Possible causes:
- no bulk solids
Actions:
LO16 Event: Pressure-MIN (P35.12)

The pressure in the bin has fallen below the lower threshold.
Possible causes:
- soiled sensor
- defective sensor
8.1.10 Event Group: Sequence Monitoring

SC01 Event: Setpoint Limited (P07.07)
Cause of the event:
Depending on the respective mode of operation:
a) The setpoint is limited to P03.01 Nominal Flow Rate in gravimetric operation.
b) The setpoint is limited to three times the value of P03.01 Nominal Flow Rate in
volumetric operation.
SC02 Event: Stand-By (P07.01)

Scales are in standby operation, i.e. the controller magnitude to the feed drive is
smaller than the threshold value set in P07.02 Stand-By Limit Value. The feeder
drive is switched off. The 'running' state will still be displayed outwards.
This function protects the motor from overheating at very low speeds or when idling.
Actions:
Key in the larger setpoint and check P07.02 Stand-By Limit Value.

Event Messages
SC03 Event: Maint.Feeder Run (P16.04)

The sum of the runtimes of the conveying elements is greater than the time P16.03
Maintenance Feeder Run.
A message occurs after each expired time interval. The message may indicate ser-
vice work required.
SC04 Event: Maint. Electric (P16.02)

The sum of the times during which the mains voltage is on is greater than the time
P16.01 Maintenance Electric.
A message occurs after each expired time interval. The message may indicate ser-
vice work required.
SC05 Event: External Event 1 (P13.01)

Possible cause: depends on the external cabling. Usually: an error in the main drive



8.1.11 Event Group: System Message

SY01 Event: Memory (P07.09)
The program and parameters memory are checked cyclically. An error has occurred
during that. The scales will no longer function correctly.
Steps to take:
- load the factory settings
- Normally the hardware has to be replaced.

Event Messages
SY02 Event: Communication VCU20100-Unit 2 (P01.06)

This event is identified when communication with the VCU input/output expansion
with VIO software and local bus address 2 is disrupted. The cables and the address
setting should be checked if an error occurs.
SY03 Event: Communication VCU20100-Unit 3 (P01.10)

This event is identified when communication with the VCU input/output expansion
with VIO software and local bus address 3 is disrupted. The cables and the address
setting should be checked if an error occurs.
SY04 Event: Communication HMI 1 (P02.06)

Error in the communication with the first DISOCONT operator panel.

Error in communication with the second DISOCONT operating console.

Error in the communication with the third DISOCONT operator panel.
SY07 Event: Communication VHM serial (P02.11)

This event is detected when the connection via the serial RS485 interface to a VHM
operating panel is interrupted.
Causes of this event:

Scales receives no message from the operating console during a tolerance period
Steps:
- check cable connection
- check that operating console is correctly functioning
- check the operating console settings
- check the addresses of the scales at the RS485 data bus (P01.11 VHM RS485
Address)

Event Messages
SY08 Event: Cyclic Communication (P20.03)

Cyclical serial communication with the higher-order plant control system has been
interrupted for longer than the timeout-period in P20.02.
To rectify: check cable connections.
SY10 Event: Acyclic Communication (P20.04)

Incorrect data in the noncyclical communication from the host computer.
Possible cause: poor programming of the host computer
SY15 Event: Communication VMO20100-Unit 1 (P01.13)

This event is identified when communication with the first local operating terminal
VMO 201xx with local bus address 11 is disrupted. Check the cables and the ad-
dress setting if an error occurs.
SY16 Event: Communication VMO20100-Unit 2 (P01.15)

This event is identified when communication with the second local operating terminal
VMO 201xx with local bus address 12 is disrupted. Check the cables and the ad-
dress setting if an error occurs.

Appendix
9 Appendix
Details of special functions are described in this chapter.
9.1 Setpoint and switch

switch--on sources
Setpoint can be set and feed on and off commands can come from different sources.
Fig. 21: Setpoint and switch-on sources
The sources are preselected with parameters in the 'Control Sources' group.
You can use the OP Mode function to switch back and forth between the pre-selected sources and the key-
board (Keyboard Mode ON/OFF [➙ 30]).
Parameters Function Source

P04.01 Feeder Start OP = keyboard
FB = fieldbus
DI = contact
P04.02 Feedrate Setpoint OP = keyboard
FB = fieldbus
AI = analog input (A/D)
P04.05 Source Relative Setpoint n/a = not assigned
Setpoint with a percentage quantifier OP = keyboard
AI = Analog input
The effective setpoint is displayed on the operating panel. The setpoint input field is only available if the
inputs from the operating panel are allowed by parameter.
A new window for entering the relative component will open when the setpoint field is touched if the relative
setpoint qualifier was pre-selected with the operating panel.

Appendix
Setpoint Synchronization:
The external setpoint will be taken if the source of the setpoint is switched from an external source to the
keyboard (OP). The external source will take effect in the opposite direction.
On / Off Synchronization:
The on/off switch status is retained when switching from an external source to the keyboard (OP). The ex-
ternal source will take effect in the opposite direction.
Mains Power OFF:
The keyboard setpoints are stored.
The flow chart of the start and stop sequence
Fig. 22: The start and stop sequence
Time Condition
1 Feeding does not begin with the on command since the all-clear signal has not been given.
2 To start, the scale requires the rising slope of a start command.
3 Feeding is started with the rising slope.
4 Flow rate control will operate in volumetric operation (also refer to: Volumetric / (Volumetric Syn-
chronous) / Gravimetric Modes of Regulator Operation [➙ 30]) during the start up time defined by T1
= P11.15.
5 Changing over in normal gravimetrically controlled feeding operation (assuming gravimetric mode
was previously selected). Control stays in volumetric mode (assuming it was previously selected by
the operator).
6 Feeding will be switched off if there is no all-clear signal (or if the switch on command was removed).
7 Flow rate recording continues over the time set by T2 = P06.01 to capture trickling bulk solids. After-
wards, the flow rate is no longer calculated; the counter stays at the level already achieved.
Tab. 39 : States and points in time in the flow chart

Appendix
Parameters Function
P11.15 Duration of the volumetric T1 start up period

P06.01 Continuation of totalizing after turning off T2 feeding (afterflow totalizer)
P04.01 Source of the on signal
P04.03 Source of the all-clear signal
P14.02 Scales signal output switched on
Tab. 40 : Relevant parameters
What to do if there is an alarm:

The feeder drive is switched off immediately if an alarm is triggered. The flow rate will continue to be record-
ed even past the time set in P06.01 Afterflow Totalizer.
Measurement and displays:
The measuring load will always be calculated and displayed. The flow rate will only be calculated with the
feeder switched on and during the Afterflow Totalizer (P06.01).

Appendix
9.2 Measuring the flow rate (M)
Fig. 23: The module for measuring the belt load, belt velocity and flow rate

Appendix
F1 Load on load cell 1

F2 Load on load cell 2 P05.02 LC Characteristic Value
f Tachometer 1 P05.03 LC Rated Capacity
RAW1 Loadcell 1 P05.04 Effective Platform Length
RAW2 Loadcell 2 (only VWF software) P05.05 Lever Ratio
v Belt Speed P05.07 Speed Measurement
I Rate P05.08 Source Load Cell
UBAL! Event: Significantly uneven load on load cells 1 and 2 (refer P05.09 Source Load Cell 2
to controller operating modes for instructions).
Q Belt Load
TA Basic (Cal1) or TW: Tare calibration program P10.01 LC Filter
LP filter Low-pass filter P08.01 Filter: Actual Flow Rate
BIC Belt Influence Compensation: P08.02 Filter: Actual Flow Rate analog
Belt Influence Compensation
ZDO Zero Drop Out:
Suppressing tare errors when operating without bulk solids
MOIST Moisture correction P08.04 Filter: Belt Speed
Refer to separate chapter
CTRL Flow rate controller (only VWF software) P09.01 Limit: Actual Flow Rate MIN
Refer to separate chapter
HI02 Event: Actual Flow Rate MAX P09.03 Limit: Actual Flow Rate MAX
HI03 Event: Load MAX P09.05 Limit: Load MIN
HI04 Event: Speed MAX P09.07 Limit: Load MAX
LO02 Event: Actual Flow Rate MIN P09.09 Limit: Speed MIN
LO03 Event: Load MIN P09.11 Limit: Speed MAX
LO04 Event: Speed MIN P05.01 Pulses per length
S1 Totalizer 1 P10.05 Basic Tare
S2 Totalizer 2 P17.02 Platform Dis.Length
S3 Totalizer 3
TC CW: Span Calibration set-up program (TC: weight control)
VAP Feeding with reference to the feeder's discharge point

Appendix
9.3 Flow rate controller

The controller is selected for a velocity-regulated weighfeeder via P11.01 = STANDARD. It is streamlined for
a controller structure as per Weighfeeder with Controlled Belt Velocity [➙ 10].
Fig. 24: Standard flow rate controller
Generally, an excellent control quality is achieved by preset parameters.
The controller structure is extended in the setting via P11.01 = UNIVERS as per the following figure. It can
be used to achieve the The beltweigher with feed control [➙ 12] and Beltweigher with a constant load
[➙ 13] control structures.

Appendix
Fig. 25: Universal flow rate controller
Gravimetric The measured belt load Q is used to ascertain the corresponding setpoint speed. The setpoint
is restricted to the value in P03.01.
Volumetric Mode The setpoint speed develops under the assumption of the rated belt load. The setpoint is re-
stricted to three times the value in P03.01.
Volumetric The most recently measured belt load Qa is used to ascertain the appropriate setpoint speed.
Synchronous The setpoint is limited to three times the value in P03.01.
Tab. 41 : Controller Modes
The controller operating mode is displayed on the operating panel by VOL and GRAV.
NOTE: The speed controller is active in all controller operating modes. If a controller magnitude
that is independant of the actual speed is supposed to be given for test purposes, this can
be done with the increase in P11.13 for flow rate setpoint = 0.

Appendix
Volumetric Start-Up The operating mode for starting up an empty belt. The duration is determined by the P06.04,
P09.05 and P11.15 parameters.
The load set in P09.05 for P06.04 = FAST is used to ascertain the correct setpoint speed.
Otherwise, the rated belt load is used.
The switch-on command immediately sets the prefeeder and drive outputs to ON. The belt
velocity is controlled proportional to the setpoint. After the start up period, it automatically
switches to the measured value of the belt load, which means that the flow rate is controlled.
Volumetric Clearance The prefeeder is immediately switched off when the switch-off command is given, although the
belt continues to run in the Volumetric Synchronous operating mode for the belt route given in
P11.16 to transport the rest of the bulk solids from the belt.
A switch-on command when running empty triggers a new start up period while alarms turn the
belt drive off immediately.
P07.01 The external controller is turned off after 3 s at a controller magnitude below the boundary
defined by P07.02 to protect the drive motor and external flow rate controller from excess tem-
peraturs where the feeder scale continues to indicate running feeding to the control system
provided by customer. It is switched back into normal operation instantaneously. Stored por-
tions in the controller behave in the same fashion as when feeding is switched off.
Set P07.02 = 0 for permanent operation (even at a lower controller magnitude).
Tab. 42 : Special operating modes
Controller parameters
The relationship between the controller parameters and the actuating variable is shown schematically in the
following diagram.
Fig. 26: Effect of the controller parameters on the controller output with a discontinuous control deviation on t=0
The abbreviations are as follows:

Controller parameters Meaning
KP P-portion of the feed rate controller related to the nominal feed rate as a % / %
or a dimensionless P-portion of the speed controller.
TN Reset time in seconds.
Tab. 43 : Controller parameters
Parameter value Special case
KP = 0 I-controller: KI = 1/TN in % / (mA/s)

TN = 0 P-controller: I-portion will be deleted
KP=TN=0 Controller output = controller increase
Tab. 44 : Special cases of controller parameter setting
Monitoring control deviation

The control deviation is displayed and monitored in gravimetric operation only.
The display, but not the monitoring system input, is filtered by parameter P11.04.
Event message 'P11.05' will be triggered if the value of the error signal Xd exceeds the limit value S1 for a

Appendix
duration defined in parameter Event: Deviation. Monitoring will restart if the error signal falls below the thre-
shold during this time.
At the same time, the control deviation value is filtered (filter time in parameter P11.05) and the filter output
is monitored. Event 'Event: Deviation' will be identified if the filter output exceeds the threshold value S2.
Threshold values S1 and S2 can be adapted to the current feed rate setpoint by means of the following for-
mulas:
S1 = P11.06 * [P11.07 + (1 - P11.07) * Feed rate setpoint / P03.01]
S2 = P11.08 * [P11.07 + (1 - P11.07) * Feed rate setpoint / P03.01]
The following diagram illustrates the relationship using with examples for threshold value S1.
P Feed rate setpoint V Limit value S1 or S2

LIM Limit Value in P11.06 or. P11.08 F Influence Factor P11.07
The upper limit of the controller magnitude can be reduced to prevent excess feeding of hazardous sub-
stances at a low target feed rate.
Fig. 27: Upper controller magnitude limit
MX The value of the P11.12 Upper Limit parameter

P% The target feed rate in % of P03.01 Nominal Flow Rate
Y-MAX The limit for the controller magnitude
This figure shows an example of the correlation for three selected settings of the MX parameter.

Appendix
Number Name Effect
P11.19 Store The behavior of the integral component when turning off:
NO: do not save. Starting up with integral component = 0
YES: Starting up begins with the integral component saved before turning off.
YES-A: Only save when feeding has not become inoperative due to an alarm.
P11.21 Bypass Additive pre-control of the controller magnitude by the setpoint (bypass). The
controller magnitude stated in the parameter is given for 100 % setpoint.
The controller magnitude is not synchronized when changing the setpoint by-
pass. The bypass should only be changed in small steps or when the scale is
off to avoid larger jumps in feeding.
P11.20 Volumetric Mode Determining the behavior in volumetric operation:
Qconst: as the Volumetric Mode controller operating mode of the standard
controller
Yconst: the controller is switched off. Only bypass is working. This operating
mode is suited for the belt scale with prefeeder control.
P11.22 Setpoint Filter 1st Ord The filter is supposed to simulate the temporal behavior of a simple external
controlled loop. The time constant should be set in accordance with the exter-
nal route so that there are not any major control differences Xd occurring (ser-
vice value) with setpoint jumps during the signal's transit time. Furthermore,
stored portions are reset when the network is connected.
P11.23 Setpoint Filter 2nd Ord The filter is supposed to simulate the temporal behavior of a more complex
external controlled loop. Setting the time constant in accordance with P11.22.
P11.24 Set/Act Sources Selecting the process variables to be controlled:
→
I: Controlling the actual flow rate ( constant flow rate). The operating person-
nel can specify the setpoint.
→
Q: controlling the actual belt load ( constant belt load). The setpoint is speci-
fied by parameters.
P11.25 Adaptation 1 Adapting the controller with the setpoint. Adaptation adapts the control velocity
and stored integral component to the setpoint. Adaptation has few merits if
P11.21 is set appropriately.
It is not synchronized when changing adaptation. Adaptation should only be
changed when the scale is switched off to avoid greater feeding jumps.
Tab. 45 : The effect of selected parameters of the universal controller

Appendix
9.4 Batch Operation Control

The following figure shows the batching operation process.
Fig. 28: Batching flow chart without setpoint ramp
0-5 Transitions in state (see table) T3 The duration of the adaptation period (P15.03)
m The fed mass PB Batching setpoint in kg
T2 P06.01 Afterflow Totalizer Measu Recording the actual flow rate and calculating the
re totalizing counter
PR Effective flow rate setpoint Feed The switch-on command to the feeder's discharge
organ
Main_ The command for feeding in full feed Dbl_S The command for feeding in dribble feed
Spd pd
B_On The batch running output signal
ON Output signal active OFF Output signal passive
NOTE: The most important settings for batching are made in the Batch Mode block of parameters.
State Transitions During Feeding as per the Flow Chart Diagram

No. Transition in states
0 Start the batch by switching on the scales. First of all, the batch setpoint has to have been entered since the
batch setpoint cannot be changed once the batch is running.
1 Interrupt operation by turning off the scales. The totalizing counter still measures for the time entered in T2 =
P06.01 Afterflow Totalizer.
2 Resume batch by turning on the scales. This can also be done during the Afterflow Totalizer.

Appendix
No. Transition in states

3 The flow rate setpoint is reduced to zero (but only with controlling systems) and the P15.09 DO: Dribble Feed
and P15.10 DO: Full Feed signals swap levels.
The switching time is before the calculated batch end time by the period defined in P15.03 (batch setpoint
reached).
4 A batch is ended if the setpoint minus the 'Correction Amount' defined in P15.04 has been reached or if the
effective setpoint in cases A1 and A2 becomes zero. In case B, a batch is ended at the latest after three times
the adaptation time (P15.03) has elapsed.
With a measuring scales, the dribble feed quantity (pre-contact) results from the adaptation time set multiplied
by the dribble feed starting value.
5 The flow of bulk solids is recorded for the time entered in T2 = P06.01. That also includes the remaining trickle
of bulk solids in the measured value.
A new batch can only be started after the afterflow time has elapsed.
Tab. 46 : Process: discharge weighing with regulating loss-in-weight feeder
Adaptation
With adaptation, a corrective quantity K is calculated from the error quantity (batch actual weight - weight
setpoint) after each completed batch and stored in the P15.04 parameter. This automatically shifts items 3
to 5 of the diagram with the next batch.
K(new) = K(old) + P15.05 * error
K(new) = new corrective quantity
Error = actual batch weight – batch setpoint
Errors greater than the batching tolerance set by P15.14 are restricted to the set tolerance value. Shortfalls
that are smaller than the smallest display digit are not corrected.
P15.05 acts as a filter parameter to ensure that P15.04 contains a mean for the bulk material overrun with.
Behavior if Alarm Triggered

If an alarm is triggered, the batch is interrupted as if feeding were switched off. The batch can be resumed
once the cause has been rectified and the event message acknowledged.
Threshold values
The P09.02 Event: Actual Flow Rate MIN event message is suppressed during the rundown time. This does
not apply to the digital output.
Feed controller in standby mode

The scales can enter standby mode during rundown time (P07.02). The corresponding message is sup-
pressed.
9.5 Belt slip identification
9.5.1 Belt Slippage with Belt Marking

When using a belt with a marking, it can be used to help measure belt motion with a sensor mounted on the
frame. Comparing the belt motion expected from the drive pulley motion with the interval between two con-
secutive sensor signals of the beltmark lets you calculate slip very accurately.
This method also allows errors in the belt velocity to be identified that result from soiling of the drive idler.

Appendix
However, this method can only produce results after one complete belt circuit. A different method must be
used if more rapid identification is required.
In order to harness this method, the belt drift monitoring, the belt slip threshold (in P18.11) and the reaction
to the event (in P18.12 and P18.15) must be set.
9.5.2 2-sensor slip monitoring

Belt slip on the head pulley can be ascertained and monitored with a second sensor on a carrying idler dri-
ven by the belt.
Fig. 29: 2-sensor slip identification
S1 Sensor 1, for instance on the head pulley
S2 Sensor 2, for instance on the tail pulley
M The drive motor of the belt
T Impulse tachometer on the drive motor
P:S1 Selecting the source of signal 1. Relevant parameters:

P34.02 'Source Sensor 1'
If P34.02 = velocity: P05.07 'Speed Measurement'
If P34.02 = DI: P34.03 'DI: Sensor 1'
vs or S1C is selected depending upon the signal source selected.
P:S2 Selecting the source of signal 2: P34.05 'DI: Sensor 2'
S1C Impulses per length of sensor 1: P34.04
S2C Impulses per length of sensor 2: P34.06
vs Impulses per length on the main tachometer: P05.01

Appendix
P_U Impulses per belt circuit: P10.07
SLP Slip service display '2-Sensor Slip'
WM05 Event: Slip 2
MAX P34.07 'Slip Value 2'
The smallest measurable slip S_MIN is the larger of the values A and B:
A = 2 * 100 * vs / (P_U * S1C)
B = 2 * 100 * vs / (P_U * S2C)
Example
vs = 10,000
P_U = 30,000
S1C = S2C = 100
S_MIN = 0.667 %
If P34.07 < S_MIN: S_MIN has an effect.
NOTE: The impulses and pauses between impulses to S1 and S2 have to be at least 1.2 s long.
The impulse and pause have to be at least 0.2 s long if digital inputs are used on the first
VCU of a scale.
9.6 Local operation

For service work, it is often necessary to turn on specific drives individually and without interlocking with
other plant components. Service operation is not intended for running the feeder operationally.
WARNING
There is danger from moving machine parts and flowing bulk solids
Interlocking can be suspended with lowering equipment and a start up warning depending upon settings and
cabling. Special protective measures should be complied with in this operating mode!
It can either be operated in local operation with a VLG model control unit or a VMO model control unit (with
a display).
9.6.1 Controlling with VLG

The VLG control unit is switched on electrically between VCU and the drives. Drives can be switched on and
off individually for service purposes after switching to manual operation (unlocking the operating mode).

Appendix
Fig. 30: Local operation with VLG
You can find details on the design forms, connections and functionality of the VLG in the BV-H 2406 system
manual.
9.6.2 Controlling with VMO

The VMO motor control unit communicates with the VCU through a serial interface (local bus). Drives can
be switched on and off individually for service purposes after switching to manual operation (unlocked oper-
ating mode) and the speed can be specified for controlled drives. You can find technical data and operating
instructions for the VMO in the BV-H2488 manual.
When using the VMO 20100, it continues to be electrically connected to the drives directly from the VCU.
The VMO acts as an input and operating unit in local operation.
Fig. 31: VMO 20100 with VCU 20100
As an alternative, the VMO control unit can also be equipped with its own interface and be switched be-
tween VCU and the drive.

Appendix
Plant Control
Optional:
Gravimetric
DISOCONT Tersus Operator Panel
VCU 20100 VHM 201xx
Local Machine
24VDC Supply Operator Panel
VMO 20101
Actuators/Sensors
(Motors/Valves)
Fig. 32: VMO 20101 with VCU
In this case, the VCU can operate the interface of the VMO in automatic operation. It is autonomously con-
troled via VMO in manual operation. In this case, the parameters have to be adjusted in the VMO for local
operation in a way that matches the parameters of the VCU.
In both cases, the logic is wired for local operation in signal engineering between the automatic control via
VCU and the software interface to the drives.
Fig. 33: Inserted local operation logic
AUTO Control in automatic operation LOC Control in local operation

ACT Actuators: such as motors, valves and feed A Automatic Mode
gates, ...
L Local Operation
The local operation logic is correspondingly notified what output signal is responsible for a drive.
The appropriate parameters are in the Local Mode (Speed) block for drives controlled by velocity with an
external controller or drives controlled by position as well as for valves or in the Local Mode (Gate) block for
feed gates with the open and close drive circuit.

Appendix
The LS signal source designates the logical signal issued at an output in normal (automatic) operation. Then
the local operation logic drives the appropriate output in local operation.
The monitoring inputs for local operation are taken in parallel from the inputs for automatic operation.
9.6.2.1 Local operation logic for rotating drives and valves
Fig. 34: Local operation logic for rotating drives
Signal Meaning An example of main drive and local control

block 1
Parameters Name Value
DO DOx: Start Digital output for starting the drive adjusted as for P14.01 DO: Scale DO-VCU1-
normal operation per parameter. Start DO1

Appendix
DO DOy: Doubling the signal for reporting Drive is Running P14.02 DO: Feeder DO-VCU1-
start(2) Started DO6
LS DOx: Run Input for the switch-on command in automatic opera- P40.02 ON in Remote LS-VCU1-
tion. This signal is passed onto DO DOx in automatic (Block 1) DO1
operation: Start.
This parameter links the local operation logic with
normal operation logic, thus stipulating which drive is
supposed to be switched in local operation.
Enable jog The parameter that defines whether the drive can be P40.05 JOG enable YES
started for set-up mode even if a malfunction is pend- (Block 1)
ing.
Loc Start Start command triggered by the start button of VMO Button on VMO
Local Mode VMO is in Local Mode signal. The conditions for being The state in VMO
able to switch VMO into local mode depend on the
configuration of VMO.
VMO exists The parameter that stipulates whether there is a VMO P01.12 VMO20100- YES
and if it is linked to the drive. P01.14 Unit 1 NO
P40.01 VMO20100- VMO1 motor
Unit 2 1
Motor Select
(Block 1)
VMO OK The Fault-Free Communication to the VMO signal -
Enable Loc The interlocking signal for switching on the drive in P40.06 Release local
Start local operation Start (Block
1)
DIx: Error1 The drive's error signal. The drive cannot be started P40.07 DI: External DI-VCU1-DI1
DIx: Error1 locally if there is an error. P40.08 Error 1 (Block n/a
1)
DIx: Error1 P40.09 n/a
DI: External
Error 2 (Block
1)
DI: External
Error 3 (Block
1)
Loc Active Local operation is active. The signal may also switch -
the controller magnitude for controlled drives to local
input from VMO.
AO AOx The analog output for specifying the speed to the P12.16 AO: Motor AO-VCU1-
drive, set as for normal operation per parameter. Speed AO1
Control
LS AOx The input for specifying speed in automatic operation. P40.03 Controller LS-VCU1-
The signal is passed onto AO AOx in automatic opera- Magnitude AO1
tion. (Block 1)
The parameter connects local operation logic to nor-
mal operation logic, thus stipulating which controller
magnitude is assigned to the drive in local operation.
LOC Seed Specifying the controller magnitude in local operation VMO input
on the VMO
Tab. 47 : Continuous signals

Appendix
9.6.2.2 The logic for position-

position-controlled feed
feed gates
Fig. 35: The logic for position-controlled drives
Signal Meaning An example of feed gates and local control

block 1
Parameters Name Value
DO DOx: Open Digital output for opening the feed gate, set as for P25.14 S: DO Open DO-VCU1-
normal operation per parameter. Flow Gate DO1
DO DOx: Close Digital output for closing the feed gate, set as for nor- P25.15 S: DO Close DO-VCU1-
mal operation per parameter. Flow Gate DO2
LS DOx: Open The input for the Open command in automatic opera- P41.02 OPEN in LS-VCU1-
tion. The signal is passed onto DO DOx in automatic Remote DO1
operation: Start.

Appendix
LS DOx: Close The input for the Open command in automatic opera- P41.04 CLOSE in LS-VCU1-
tion. The signal is passed onto DO DOx in automatic Remote DO2
operation: Start.
Loc Open The command for opening the valve, triggered by the Button on VMO
button of VMO
Loc Close The command for closing the valve, triggered by the Button on VMO
button of VMO
Local Mode VMO is in Local Mode signal. The conditions for being The state in VMO
able to switch VMO into local mode depend on the
configuration of VMO.
VMO exists The parameter that stipulates whether there is a VMO P01.12 VMO20100- YES
and if it is linked to the drive. P01.14 Unit 1 NO
P40.01 VMO20100- VMO1 motor
Unit 2 1
Motor Select
(Block 1)
VMO OK The Fault-Free Communication to the VMO signal -
Enable Loc The interlocking signal for switching on the drive in P40.06 Release local
Start local operation Start (Block
1)
DIx: Error1 The drive's error signal The drive cannot be started P40.07 DI: External DI-VCU1-DI1
DIx: Error1 locally if there is an error. P40.08 Error 1 (Block n/a
1)
DIx: Error1 P40.09 n/a
DI: External
Error 2 (Block
1)
DI: External
Error 3 (Block
1)
Loc Active Local operation is active -
9.7 Belt load regulation of the velocity-

velocity-controlled weighfeeder
When the bulk solids of the weighfeeder are not directly drawn from a bin and are instead distributed onto
the belt from conveyor equipment (i.e., a prefeeder), this prefeeder's flow performance should be controlled
in accordance with weighfeeder performance so that the belt load remains approximately constant. Any
remaining fluctuations in the belt load are balanced out by the weighfeeder's velocity regulation
(Weighfeeder with Controlled Belt Velocity [➙ 10]).
DISOCONT Tersus also has an additional means of control for the belt load beyond the controller for the
flow rate. A second weighbridge can be installed in the area of the transfer point for the bulk solids on scales
with a long transit time from bulk solids transfer to the main weighbridge to improve the time response of
transfer control.
Controller for P25.23 = NO:

Appendix
Fig. 36: Prefeeder control weighfeeder
M The Measuring the Belt Load module CPF Continuous conveyor with continually controllable
prefeeder performance
Q1 Loading the main weighbridge Q2 Loading the second weighbridge (optional)
AR Position-controlled prefeeder PPM Pulse-pause modulator for prefeeders with a fixed

speed
Refer to the parameter list for setting the parameters:

Appendix
Fig. 37: Loading controller with a coefficient estimate (i.e., a weighbridge)

Appendix
Fig. 38: Loading controller with a coefficient estimate (i.e., two weighbridges)

Appendix
Fig. 39: Setpoint calculation for loading

Appendix
Fig. 40: Loading setpoint optimization (OPT) and resulting feed belt velocity
9.8 Bin weigher: Scaling and Limit
Fig. 41: Scaling fill level measurement and limits

Appendix
The normal scales applies in normal operation. The fill level is regulated by the metering hopper. In intermit-
tent operation the metering hopper is activated when the fill level F-Min is underrun and is deactivated as
soon as the F-Max level is exceeded. If the metering hopper is continuously active (P27.01 = YES), the fill
level is regulated to the fill level setpoint F-Set by means of the changes in the metering hopper flow rate.
The check measurement takes over the fill regulation when a check is started. Wherever necessary, it is
filled until there are sufficient bulk solids in the bin (fill level > C-Check + C-Min). The check starts when the
fill level falls below F-Max and is stopped when the fill level falls below C-Min.
9.9 Continuous bin fill level control
Fig. 42: Bin fill level control
Setup Notes

Appendix
P27.12 can be determined in a stationary state once the transient oscillations have subsided. In this state,
the value is calculated as follows:
P27.12 = (yB - P27.14 ) × P03.01 / flow rate setpoint
We recommend calling up the Optimizing Hopper Fill Level Regulation [➙ 46] adjustment program for the
control parameter after entering input the P27.07 and P27.12 parameters.

Appendix
9.10 Details and flow chart control measurement (KME)
Fig. 43: Flow chart control measurement

Appendix
9.11 Linearization
The belt loading does not usually need to be linearized. It only makes sense with major belt load fluctua-
tions.
Calibration with calibration weights:

1. Apply calibration weight Q1, start the scale and call up the zero setting program
2. Note the final result of the zero setting program and enter later in the Linearization I1 parameter
3. Cancel the program and do not overwrite the results
4. Put the results of the formula q1 = Q1 / L * 100 % / q0 into the Linearization S1 parameter
Where:
Q1: calibration weight in kg
L: P05.04 Effective Platform Length
q0: Nominal Belt Load (service value)
Repeat work processes 1 ... 3 with increasingly large calibration weights for the other linearization points.
Calibration using material:

1. Run material inspection with a belt load of q1
2. Read the mean of belt load q1(a) on the unit and enter into the Linearization I1 parameter
3. Key in the results of the formula q1(s) = q1(a) * Ms / Ma in Linearization S1 parameters
Where:
Ms: conveyed quantity of material in kg
Ma: quantity of material read on the equipment in kg
Repeat work processes 1 ... 3 with increasingly large calibration weights for the other linearization points.
9.12 Correction of the foreign substance portion (moisture)

The group of Moisture parameters can be used to activate a correction in the actual value used for control-
ling the flow rate. The proportion of foreign matter (such as water) in the bulk solids fed is ascertained exter-
nally and communicated to the weighing system. This is the basis the system uses to recalculate the weight
ascertained (including foreign substance) onto the net value of the portion relevant to the subsequent step in
the process by subtracting the quantity of foreign substance. The mass flow is gravimetrically controlled
based on the net value, which means that the quantity equalling the weight of the foreign substance is also
fed. The total integration of the gross or corrected net value can be selected as the signal source for the
impulse output.

Appendix
Fig. 44: Simplified signal flow diagram
9.13 Correction with a known quantity

In special applications with batch systems, the continuous scale records both an already known quantity of
bulk solids A and an unknown quantity of bulk solids B to be measured.
Fig. 45: System architecture and signal processing
A Bin with bulk solids A

B Bin with bulk solids B
MA The measuring unit for the flow of bulk solids A
MC The measuring unit for the flow of bulk solids C = A + B

Appendix
I-cor The configuration of the correction value. Relevant parameters:

P04.08 Difference Flow Rate
P04.09 Difference Flow Rate Range
P04.10 Difference Flow Rate Offset
P04.11 Difference Function
IA The measured actual flow rate of bulk solids A
IC The measured actual flow rate of bulk solids C = A + B
IB The calculated actual flow rate of bulk solids B
R Optional controller (only with controlled systems)
yA, yB Optional controller magnitude to the prefeeder for the components (only with controlled systems)
Tab. 48 : Legend
The P04.11 parameter decides on whether the correction to the shown actual flow rate and quantity integra-
tion derived from that or/and to the input signal of the optional controller has an impact. This makes it possi-
ble to easily control the bulk solids component B even in this architecture.
9.14 Links in the Parameter Block 'Interlocking'
Fig. 46: Logic diagram of the links between events and ready messages
Explanations:
All signal levels can be inverted by setting the associated source parameter (also refer to Configuring the
Interfaces [➙ 66]). The factory default is given in the diagram.

Appendix
▪
LOW: closed contact in standby, i.e. power is on. The contact is open if the signal is active (functions as
opener).
▪
HIGH: open contact in standby, i.e. power is not on. The contact is closed if the signal is active (func-
tions as closer).
E: event message
DI: digital input
DO: digital output
Legend Parameters Signal Name
Alarm All event messages of event class ALARM

DI E 1 P24.06 DI: Event Electricity 1
DI EE 1 P13.02 DI: External Event 1
DI M 1 P24.01 DI: Event Mechanics 1
DO E P24.11 DO: Event Electricity
DO M P24.09 DO: Event Mechanics
DO MT 1 P24.13 DO: Event Mechatronics 1
DO MT 2 P24.14 DO: Event Mechatronics 2
DO R P24.16 DO: Ready
DO RS P24.18 DO: Ready for Start
IL-2 P24.10 Event: Mechanics
IL-3 P24.12 Event: Electricity
IL-4 P24.15 Event: Mechatronics
IL-5 P24.17 Event: Not Ready
IL-6 P24.19 Event: Not Ready for Start
Int. alarm Internal alarm resulting from event messages CA01, CA02,
WM01, WM02, WM03, WM04
NO S No service mode: no keyboard mode, no local mode,
no simulation mode
Release P04.03 Source Run Enable
SC-5 P13.01 Event: External Event 1

Appendix
Legend Parameters Signal Name

SC-6 P13.03 Event: External Event 2
SC-11 P13.06 DI: External Event 3
SC-12 P13.08 DI: External Event 4
NOTE: When an input source parameter accepts the value n/a, the signal is internally assumed to
be True.
9.15 Weighing Platforms

Platforms
9.15.1 Effective Weighing Platform Length
The effective weighing platform length "L" is an important value for calibration. It is determined by the design
of the weighing platform and can usually be found in the technical data sheets. However, it is always expe-
dient to measure the length manually and to enter the exact value as a parameter. The hatched area shows
the load distribution on the weighing platform.
Single-Idler Platform
The load on the weighing platform is conducted via a weighing idler into the load cell. This can be done by
means of a lever system or without levers by means of a parallel leaf-spring system.
In this case, L is computed as:
Multiple-Idler Platform
Several weighing idlers are combined into one mechanical unit, the measuring bridge.

Appendix
Buckled Platform
The weighing platform consists of two parts. The force is conducted centrally into the load cell. A split mea-
suring table can also be used in place of the weighing idlers.
Mounting for entire belt on one side only
Lg = Distance to the center of the material cone

Appendix
9.15.2 Calibration Weight

The calibration weight simulates a certain belt load and serves to control the weighing system. It can have a
direct effect on the weighing platform or via a lever system. The weight acting on the weighing platform, and
not the actual weight, must be entered into parameter P10.04. The effective calibration weight QPRF is the
weighing platform load in kg simulated by the calibration weight.
Single-idler platform
Parallel leaf-spring bearing

The calibration weight can theoretically be mounted at any point on the weighing plat-
form mechanical equipment. The effective load is always the applied weight QP.
QPRF = QP
Pivot joint bearing (e.g. crossed flexure strip)
α
tan( )» 0.018 * a
Angle
α=0:K=0
α
Angle = neg : K = neg
Multiple-idler platform

Appendix
Entire platform supported on load cells

QPRF = QP
Pivot joint bearing

See single-idler platform
Buckled platform
The calibration weight usually has an effect in the center.
QPRF = QP
The following applies if the entire belt is supported on one side only:
If the belts are inclined, the extension or shortening of the calibration lever corresponding to the single-idler
platform must be taken into account.
Chain Calibration Weights:

If a chain curtain is placed over the weighing platform area, the effective calibration weight then becomes
the total weight of the chain in the weighing area.
QPRF = n * Lg * s
n = Number of chains
Lg = Overall weighing platform length in m
s = Weight of chain per m in kg/m
9.15.3 Belt inclination

In certain cases, the belt inclination must be entered as a parameter. The orientation of the load cell at in-
stallation is decisive.
At right angles to the belt conveyor

The angle
α must be entered as the parameters. The load acting on the load cell is N = Q * cos α.

Appendix
Vertical to the belt conveyor
0° must be entered as angle

α. The full force Q acts on the load cells.
9.16 Pulse Output for External Totalizing Counters

DISOCONT Tersus has three internal totalizing integrators (=totalizing counters). The results of the counters
can be transferred to an external counter by means of one of the following ways:
▪
Via the electronic impulse output (open collector) DO8 of the VCU at a frequency < 10 Hz for external
electronic counters. This is the most preferable method.
▪
Via a DO1 ... DO7 of the VCU. The minimum impulse length is 1 s. The life cycle of the output relay is
guaranteed for 20 million switches only.
Of course, the counter readings can be read more simply via the fieldbus or in the web server.
The relevant parameters are:
P03.05 Pulse Length Total
P03.08 DO: Pulse Counter
P03.09 Totalizer Increment
P03.08 DO: Pulse Counter P03.05 Pulse Length Total
0 ... 9 ms 10 ms … 1 s >1s
DO8 No pulse 10 ms … 1 s >1s
DO1 … DO7 No pulse 1s >1s
Tab. 49 : Long counting pulse
P03.09 Totalizer Increment Counting pulse weight determined by:

0 kg No pulse
> 0 kg P03.09 Totalizer Increment
Tab. 50 : Counting pulse weight

Appendix
9.17 Using alternative signals (such as analog or fieldbus) for DMS inputs
It is usual for some signals to be read in through sensors with strain gauges (DMS) such as weight, force or
pressure signals. In special cases, these signals are recorded with other types of sensors or reshaped ex-
ternally so that they are available in the form of standard signals (such as 4 ... 20 mA). DISOCONT Tersus
provides the option of reading in some sources of input signals via standard signals. The standard signal is
read in through an analog VAI 20100 interface and reshaped to make it correspond to the signal of a DMS
sensor. The remaining signal processing is identical for the DMS signal and standard signal.
Some measuring signals can also be read in by fieldbus to prevent faults on the transmission path. These
are also processed like DMS signals after appropriate conversion.
Fig. 47: Alternative inputs using the example of a weight signal for an additional bin
LC DMS load cell output voltage 0-20 mA Input current from the external sensor
FB:kg The weight value in kg transmitted from [mV/V] A signal with the dimension mV/V
the fieldbus
Adjust Handing over the signal to the set-up LC [mV/V] The service value of the load in the dimension mV/V
program
LC_0 The rated load cell load in P26.04 LC [%] The service value of the load in percent of LC_0
X0 Offset analog input in P26.30 Xn Range characteristic value in P26.31
V Transmission factor of the load cell in x, y Input and output values of the calculating blocks
P26.03

Appendix
Error Error signal if the physical signal is out of Source Selecting the source for the signal in P26.02
range
Corr Multiplicative correction of the transmis- Tare Zero signal in P26.25 such as determined by the set-
sion factor in P26.24 up program
L The load for further use of the application

software
This figure uses recording the weight of an additional bin as an example of the form the signals of sources
other than DMS load cells are processed in. The set-up programs and service displays (including the para-
meters for tare and correcting sensitivity) remain in manual override, even though they show some values
such as for the DMS load cells. The figure applies accordingly to other signals such as force or pressure.
The corresponding parameters are in the group that also contains the parameter for selecting the signal
source.
NOTE: Please bear the fact in mind that the value resolution of a value read in through the stan-
dard signal is reduced by the resolution of the external transmitter and the VAI 20100 inter-
face assembly in relation to the input for DMS via interface VME0120 (VME0120: 24 bits
and VAI 20100: 16 bits). In addition, there can also be a temporal offset of the signal due to
scanning.
There can be additional errors in particular when forming the difference of signals (such as
differentiating) or a compensator (such as pressure compensation).
9.18 PLC Functionality (Optional)

As with a PLC, you can expand its functionality for additional simple jobs by linking signals and using func-
tion blocks. The function block links can only be configured using EasyServe. Any configuration created can
be loaded into or read out of the control using EasyServe. The link becomes active immediately after being
loaded.
All signals that can are available via fieldbus can be used as input signals for the function blocks. The output
signals are integrated into the standard signal processing of DISOCONT Tersus with the parameters of the
FCB analog outputs and FCB digital outputs groups.
A loaded and active link is shown on the operator panel with the information for the program by pressing the
Help button. The Empty link designates the factory default without added links.

Appendix
Fig. 48: Example of a function block link
In this example, a binary input signal (for instance, an input contact of DISOCONT Tersus) is being read in
through the GP-Din 1 input block and the Delay 1 delay while an inverter is given to the And1-4 AND gate.
The other inputs are linked with the constant 1 and a Cycle 1 frequency generator. This provides the output
with a cyclical signal when the waiting period has elapsed after setting the input. The output of the AND gate
is linked to an output of the DISOCONT Tersus standard control. The physical output requires connecting
the signal with a digital output through P37.01 FCB_DO 01.
9.18.1 Handling the Function Blocks

Condition: The Schenck Process software DISOPLAN (VPL 20430) must be installed on the
PC.
Function blocks can be edited and linked in EasyServe Expert Mode only.
For this DISOPLAN must be started with administrator rights from EasyServe as follows:
▪
Menu item 'Extras | Start | Function Blocks', or
▪
Menu item 'Extras | Start | Function Variants/parameters'
Supplementary documentation:
▪
BV-H2185 EasyServe operating manual
▪
BV-H2461 DISOPLAN operating manual
A detailed description of the function block editor can be found in a separate manual (BV-
H2317)
CAUTION: Creating and modifying links is reserved solely to Schenck Process person-
nel.

Appendix
Configurations can be read out of and loaded into the control. They can be filed on the hard disk of PCs and
called up from there. Links have to be given a name. The empty link (as a factory default) has the name
Empty and should not be used for other links.
WARNING
Possible loss of function when exchanging the VCU.
Function blocks are not automatically stored with the parameters in
EasyServe. If a function block link is loaded, it will be necessary to store it
separately in EasyServe. If the VCU is exchanged, both the parameters
and the function block link have to be loaded separately to restore full func-
tionality. Alternatively, you can use the additionally installed tool
DISOPLAN (that contains both the parameters and the function block links)
to make a complete backup. However, this backup can then no longer be
used for setting a more recent version of the program in the scale.
It is not necessary with a system with the Empty link (refer to Cleaning the Screen and Information [➙ 41])
to reload the link after exchanging the VCU since there is no expansion to the functions from the function
blocks.
Loading the function software or loading default settings or the locking set of the parameters does not have
any impact on the function blocks loaded. In other words, any link that is already loaded is retained. Any
loaded link cannot be deleted; it can only be overwritten. If you want to make a link ineffective, it can be
overwritten with a new link that has to contain at least one block.
A loaded link does not have any effect on scales operation as long as the outputs for the link are not
coupled to the scales software with the corresponding parameters P36.01 to P37.20.
9.18.2 Function Blocks for Binary Signals

The following function blocks are available.
Fig. 49: Binary function blocks

Appendix
No. Type quantity Parameters Function
1 Binary inputs 20 Process variable as per the de- Connection between the function
'GP-DIn' scription of the fieldbus data inter- block logic and the function of the
face standard program
2 Binary output 20 - Makes output signals available. Con-
'GP-Dout' nect using the parameter in the 'FCB
digital outputs' block. All outputs are
available as status information in the
fieldbus interface.
3 Clock generator 2 Periodic time Signal generator for a periodic signal
'Cycle'
4 Bin 0 1 - Generator for the binary constants 1 =

Bin 1 1 True and 0 = False
5 Pulse generator 1 Time for the pulse The timer has three outputs that
'Time' supply an pulse of 0.1 seconds dura-
tion at the time set.
6 AND 6 - And-link of two input signals
'And'
AND 4 - And-link of four input signals
'And 4'
7 OR 6 - Or-link of two input signals
'Or'
OR 8 - Or-link of four input signals
'Or 4'
8 Negation 10 - Invert the signal
'Not'
9 Delay 8 Delay time in seconds Delays the input signal by the speci-
'Delay' fied time
Tab. 51 : Blocks available for processing binary signals
9.18.3 Function Blocks for Analog Signals

Analog signals can be processed with the following function block.

Appendix
Fig. 50: Analog function blocks
No. Type Quantity Parameter Function
1 Analog input 20 Process variable as per Input for a variable with a continuous value.
'GP-AIn' the description of the
fieldbus interface
2 Analog output 20 - Makes output signals available. Connecting via
'GP-Aout' parameters in the FCB analog outputs block. Only 5
FKB outputs can be configured to physical outputs.
All outputs are available as measured values in the
fieldbus interface.
3 Comparator 6 Upper and lower com- Supplies the value 'True' if the input signal lies out-
'Comparator' parative value side of the threshold values.
4 'Limit' 10 Upper and lower thre- Limits the input signal and becomes True when the
shold value limiter arises.
5 Multiplicator 5 - Supplies the product of the input values at the out-
'Multiplicator' put
6 Memory 2 - The input value at MemInp is tied to Acquire with

'Memory' the increasing slope. It is available at the output. At
the same time, the Hold output indicates that a
value has been stored. The memory can be cleared
with Reset.
7 Addition 5 - Makes the sum of the input values available at the
'Add' output.
8 Subtraction 5 - Makes the difference of the input values available at

'Subtract' the output
9 Counter 6 Start value Supplies the counted input impulses at the output

Appendix
No. Type Quantity Parameter Function

'Counter'
10 Switch 1 - Switches one of the three inputs to the output
'Analog switch'
11 Multiplication 20 Dividend Multiplies or divides by a fixed factor
'Factor' Divisor
12 Constant 5 Value of the constants Supplies the numerical value at the output
'Constant'
13 Offset 10 Dividend
'Offset' Divisor
9.19 Checking the Weight Measurement Instrumentation

Most of the function errors are indicated by event messages.
A test connector can be used to perform a basic function inspection if a displayed weight value is evidently
wrong despite correct parameterization.
A simple voltage metering check cannot be made using a measuring instrument due to the alternating vol-
tage supply to the load cells.
A test connector can narrow down any errors between the load cells, cabling and the measuring electronics.
Fig. 51: Test Connector
The test connector is plugged into the load cell cable input on the DISOCONT Tersus instead of the load
cell cable.
Once plugged in, the raw measured value can be read off at the service values of the measuring electron-
ics. It must have the following value: raw measured value 1.5 mV/V ± 3 %.
Note: The raw measured data can be calculated according to the formula: raw measured data ~ 500 *
R2 / R1 [mV/V] if other resistance values should be used in the test connector
The measuring amplifier is working properly if the raw measuring value lies within this range.
The measured load display in kg depends on the way the scale's rated data are set.

Index
Index
2. Password ..................................................................................................................................................................... 99
2nd Bridge analog Input Offset....................................................................................................................................... 186
2nd Bridge analog Input Range...................................................................................................................................... 187
2nd Bridge MAX ............................................................................................................................................................. 184
2nd Bridge MIN .............................................................................................................................................................. 184
2nd Bridge Offset ........................................................................................................................................................... 186
2nd Bridge Range .......................................................................................................................................................... 186
2nd Weighbridge ............................................................................................................................................................ 183
2nd Weighbridge ............................................................................................................................................................ 182
2nd Weighbridge active .................................................................................................................................................. 182
2-Sensor Slip.................................................................................................................................................................. 209
2-Sensor Slip active ....................................................................................................................................................... 209
2-sensor slip monitoring ................................................................................................................................................. 269
Abbreviations ................................................................................................................................................................... 66
About This Manual ............................................................................................................................................................. 1
Absolute Range.............................................................................................................................................................. 195
Accept Correction ........................................................................................................................................................... 189
Access Rights Limitation FB........................................................................................................................................... 153
Access Rights Limitation HMI........................................................................................................................................... 97
Access to Special Functions ............................................................................................................................................ 27
Accessing the Configuration............................................................................................................................................. 37
Acknowledging Event Messages...................................................................................................................................... 29
Activating belt influence compensation (BIC) ................................................................................................................... 58
Activating measurement and feeding with reference to the discharge point (VAP) .......................................................... 58
Adaptation 1 ................................................................................................................................................................... 128
Adaptation Factor ........................................................................................................................................................... 140
Adaptation Time ............................................................................................................................................................. 140
Additional Bin Weighers ................................................................................................................................................... 15
additional containers ........................................................................................................................................................ 15
Address .................................................................................................................................................................. 151, 152
Adjusting the external flow rate controller......................................................................................................................... 55
Adjusting the feeding controller ........................................................................................................................................ 56
Afterflow Totalizer .......................................................................................................................................................... 109
AI Moisture Measurement ............................................................................................................................................. 201
AI Offset ........................................................................................................................................................................ 207
AI Position Flow Gate .................................................................................................................................................... 207
AI Range ....................................................................................................................................................................... 207
Analog Channel A10 ........................................................................................................................................................ 93
Analog Channel A11 ........................................................................................................................................................ 94
Analog Output 2nd Bridge .............................................................................................................................................. 186
Analog Outputs .............................................................................................................................................................. 128
Analog Setpoint Relat..................................................................................................................................................... 141
Angle .............................................................................................................................................................................. 107
AO Actual Flow Rate ..................................................................................................................................................... 128
AO Belt Load ................................................................................................................................................................. 129
AO Bin Load .................................................................................................................................................................. 176
AO Check Measurement Result .................................................................................................................................... 198
AO Controller Magnitude Bin Level ............................................................................................................................... 179
AO Deviation ................................................................................................................................................................. 130
AO Flow Rate corrected ................................................................................................................................................ 202
AO Flow Rate Offset ..................................................................................................................................................... 203
AO Flow Rate Range .................................................................................................................................................... 203
AO Motor Speed Control ............................................................................................................................................... 131
AO Offset .............................................................................................................................................................. 176, 207
AO PLC 1 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 159
AO PLC 2 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 159
AO Position Flow Gate .................................................................................................................................................. 207
AO Range ............................................................................................................................................................. 176, 208
AO Setpoint ................................................................................................................................................................... 128
AO Speed...................................................................................................................................................................... 129
Appendix ........................................................................................................................................................................ 257
Assembling the Electrical Components ............................................................................................................................ 54
Authorization for Control Commands ............................................................................................................................... 26
Index
Auto Correction .............................................................................................................................................................. 188

Auto Zero Active ............................................................................................................................................................. 112
Automatic control measurement unit (KME) ..................................................................................................................... 47
Basic Operating Functions ............................................................................................................................................... 27
Basic Tare ...................................................................................................................................................................... 121
Batch Automatic Record................................................................................................................................................. 140
Batch behaviour after power down ................................................................................................................................. 143
Batch control .................................................................................................................................................................. 100
Batch Mode .................................................................................................................................................................... 139
Batch Mode .................................................................................................................................................................... 139
Batch Operation Control ................................................................................................................................................. 267
Batch Setpoint Limit ....................................................................................................................................................... 142
Batch Setpoint Offset ..................................................................................................................................................... 141
Batch Setpoint Range .................................................................................................................................................... 141
Batch Setpoint Source.................................................................................................................................................... 139
Batch Tolerance ............................................................................................................................................................. 142
Batching ........................................................................................................................................................................... 14
Baud rate................................................................................................................................................................ 151, 152
Baud Rate ...................................................................................................................................................................... 148
Behavior after Connecting the Power ............................................................................................................................... 17
Belt Circuit No. ............................................................................................................................................................... 121
Belt Circuit Time ............................................................................................................................................................. 121
Belt Drift ......................................................................................................................................................................... 146
Belt inclination ................................................................................................................................................................ 292
Belt Influence Compensation BIC .................................................................................................................................... 13
Belt Limit Switch ............................................................................................................................................................. 135
Belt Load Controller ....................................................................................................................................................... 162
Belt Load Controller ....................................................................................................................................................... 162
Belt Load Offset ............................................................................................................................................................. 129
Belt Load Range ............................................................................................................................................................ 129
Belt load regulation of the velocity-controlled weighfeeder............................................................................................. 276
Belt Monitoring ............................................................................................................................................................... 144
Belt Sensor Active .......................................................................................................................................................... 145
Belt Skew ....................................................................................................................................................................... 146
Belt slip identification ...................................................................................................................................................... 268
Belt Slippage with Belt Marking ...................................................................................................................................... 268
Belt Velocity Check .......................................................................................................................................................... 59
Beltweigher with a constant load ...................................................................................................................................... 13
BIC Active ...................................................................................................................................................................... 145
Bin Controller ON ........................................................................................................................................................... 178
Bin Level analog Input Offset ......................................................................................................................................... 178
Bin Level analog Input Range ........................................................................................................................................ 178
Bin Level Controller ........................................................................................................................................................ 178
Bin Level MAX................................................................................................................................................................ 175
Bin Level MIN ................................................................................................................................................................. 174
Bin Setpoint source ........................................................................................................................................................ 182
Bin Weigher.................................................................................................................................................................... 170
Bin Weigher Active ......................................................................................................................................................... 171
Bin Weigher: Display and Operation ................................................................................................................................ 34
Bin weigher: Scaling and Limit ....................................................................................................................................... 281
Bin weight control ............................................................................................................................................................. 46
Bipolar Measurement ..................................................................................................................................................... 172
Blind Distance ........................................................................................................................................................ 163, 193
Blind Distance 2. Weighbridge ....................................................................................................................................... 170
Bypass ................................................................................................................................................................... 127, 180
Bypass D Portion ........................................................................................................................................................... 181
Byte Sequence ............................................................................................................................................................... 151
CA01 Event Error LC Input........................................................................................................................................... 237
CA02 Event Tachometer Input ..................................................................................................................................... 238
CA03 Event Error LC Input (Bin) .................................................................................................................................. 238
CA04 Event Error LC Input (2nd Bridge) ...................................................................................................................... 238
CA05 Event Linearization Error .................................................................................................................................... 238
CA06 Event Tare Correction ........................................................................................................................................ 239
CA07 Event DMS-Input ................................................................................................................................................ 239
Calibrating bin weighing ................................................................................................................................................... 61
Calibrating the Touchscreen ............................................................................................................................................ 40
Index
Calibration ...................................................................................................................................................................... 237

Calibration Data ............................................................................................................................................................. 120
Calibration programs ........................................................................................................................................................ 41
Calibration Weight .......................................................................................................................................... 121, 177, 291
CH01 Event Minimum Check Quantity ......................................................................................................................... 239
CH02 Event Minimum Fill Weight................................................................................................................................. 239
CH03 Event Maximum Fill Weight................................................................................................................................ 240
CH04 Event Absolute Tare Correction Error ................................................................................................................ 240
CH05 Event Relative Tare Correction Error ................................................................................................................. 240
CH06 Event Absolute Span Correction Error ............................................................................................................... 241
CH07 Event Relative Span Correction Error ................................................................................................................ 241
CH08 Event Feeder Not Stopped ................................................................................................................................. 241
CH09 Event No Check Release ................................................................................................................................... 241
CH10 Event Prepare Check Measurement .................................................................................................................. 241
CH11 Event Expect Acceptance .................................................................................................................................. 242
CH12 Event Check Gate Error ..................................................................................................................................... 242
CH13 Event Bin Error ................................................................................................................................................... 242
Chain Motion Delay ........................................................................................................................................................ 111
Characteristic Value Sensor 1 ........................................................................................................................................ 209
Characteristic Value Sensor 2 ........................................................................................................................................ 209
Check Circuits ................................................................................................................................................................ 190
Check Gate Feedback.................................................................................................................................................... 198
Check Gate Time ........................................................................................................................................................... 199
Check in Keyboard Mode ............................................................................................................................................... 150
Check Measurement ...................................................................................................................................................... 239
Check Quantity............................................................................................................................................................... 190
Check Start Span ........................................................................................................................................................... 189
Check Start Tare ............................................................................................................................................................ 189
Check System ................................................................................................................................................................ 187
Check with bulk solids ...................................................................................................................................................... 60
Checking the continuous scale with a calibration weight .................................................................................................. 43
Checking the scale with calibration weights ..................................................................................................................... 59
Checking the Weight Measurement Instrumentation...................................................................................................... 300
Cleaning and Testing the Display..................................................................................................................................... 33
Cleaning the Screen and Information ............................................................................................................................... 41
CleanOut OFF Time ....................................................................................................................................................... 111
CleanOut ON Time ......................................................................................................................................................... 111
CLOSE in Remote .......................................................................................................................................................... 235
CO01 Event Controller Limited ..................................................................................................................................... 242
CO02 Event MIN Flow Gate ......................................................................................................................................... 243
CO03 Event MAX Flow Gate........................................................................................................................................ 243
CO04 Event Bin Load MAX Sensor ............................................................................................................................. 243
CO05 Event Volum. caused by LC-error ...................................................................................................................... 243
Command and Edit Keys.................................................................................................................................................. 26
Communication EasyServe ............................................................................................................................................ 148
Communication Fieldbus ................................................................................................................................................ 149
Compatibility DISOCONT Master ................................................................................................................................... 150
Compensation Active ..................................................................................................................................................... 210
Compensation analog Input Offset ................................................................................................................................. 214
Compensation analog Input Range ................................................................................................................................ 214
Compensation Source .................................................................................................................................................... 211
Configuration .................................................................................................................................................................. 151
Configuration HMI Values .............................................................................................................................................. 223
Configuring Event Messages ........................................................................................................................................... 68
Configuring the Communication Path (Com) .................................................................................................................... 39
Configuring the Interfaces ................................................................................................................................................ 66
Configuring the VHM Operating Panel ............................................................................................................................. 37
Connecting an operating panel (VHM) with a scale controller (VCU) ............................................................................... 18
Connecting EasyServe (PC) with the scales controller (VCU) ......................................................................................... 19
Connecting the web browser with the scales controller (VCU) ......................................................................................... 21
Connecting to a Scales (Con.Scale) ................................................................................................................................ 41
Connection via Bluetooth ........................................................................................................................................... 18, 20
Connection via Ethernet ................................................................................................................................................... 19
Connection via Ethernet Cable......................................................................................................................................... 18
Connection via RS-232 .................................................................................................................................................... 20
Connection via RS485...................................................................................................................................................... 19
Index
Connection via WLAN ...................................................................................................................................................... 20

Continuous bin fill level control ....................................................................................................................................... 282
Continuous scale zero setting .......................................................................................................................................... 44
Control Level MAX ......................................................................................................................................................... 174
Control Level MIN .......................................................................................................................................................... 174
Control operating modes .................................................................................................................................................. 10
Control Sources ............................................................................................................................................................. 103
Control strategies ............................................................................................................................................................. 10
Controller........................................................................................................................................................................ 242
Controller active ............................................................................................................................................................. 185
Controller in OFF-Mode.................................................................................................................................................. 177
Controller Magnitude (Block 1) ....................................................................................................................................... 226
Controller Magnitude Adaption ....................................................................................................................................... 162
Controller Magnitude Offset ................................................................................................................................... 125, 181
Controller Magnitude Offset (Block 1) ............................................................................................................................ 226
Controller Magnitude Prefeeder ..................................................................................................................................... 164
Controlling with VLG ...................................................................................................................................................... 270
Controlling with VMO...................................................................................................................................................... 271
Correction Amount ......................................................................................................................................................... 140
Correction Evaluation ..................................................................................................................................................... 197
Correction of the foreign substance portion (moisture) .................................................................................................. 285
Correction Speed ........................................................................................................................................................... 197
Correction with a known quantity ................................................................................................................................... 286
Counter 1 Unit ................................................................................................................................................................ 102
Counter 2 Unit ................................................................................................................................................................ 103
Counter 3 Unit ................................................................................................................................................................ 103
Cycle Time ..................................................................................................................................................................... 188
Cyclic Auto Start............................................................................................................................................................. 188
D Filter TD ...................................................................................................................................................................... 180
D Portion TV................................................................................................................................................................... 180
Daily Total Time ............................................................................................................................................................. 221
Damaged / Defective Electrical Components ..................................................................................................................... 6
Damping Time ................................................................................................................................................................ 193
Data Format ................................................................................................................................................................... 152
Data Log ON/OFF .......................................................................................................................................................... 101
Data Log Value 1 ........................................................................................................................................................... 222
Data Log Value 10 ......................................................................................................................................................... 223
Data Log Value 2 ........................................................................................................................................................... 222
Data Log Value 3 ........................................................................................................................................................... 222
Data Log Value 4 ........................................................................................................................................................... 222
Data Log Value 5 ........................................................................................................................................................... 222
Data Log Value 6 ........................................................................................................................................................... 222
Data Log Value 7 ........................................................................................................................................................... 223
Data Log Value 8 ........................................................................................................................................................... 223
Data Log Value 9 ........................................................................................................................................................... 223
Data Logging .................................................................................................................................................................. 221
Dead Band Deviation ..................................................................................................................................................... 181
Dead Band Factor .......................................................................................................................................................... 181
Dead Time...................................................................................................................................................................... 203
Dead Time...................................................................................................................................................................... 203
Dead Time Active ........................................................................................................................................................... 203
Dead Time TT ................................................................................................................................................................ 179
Detail Selection ................................................................................................................................................................ 26
Details and flow chart control measurement (KME) ....................................................................................................... 284
Determining the duration of a belt circuit .......................................................................................................................... 41
Deviation abs. max......................................................................................................................................................... 123
Deviation Offset.............................................................................................................................................................. 130
Deviation Range............................................................................................................................................................. 130
Index
DI Acknowledge Events ................................................................................................................................................ 133

DI Batch Terminate ....................................................................................................................................................... 140
DI BIC freeze................................................................................................................................................................. 148
DI Bin Load Sensor ....................................................................................................................................................... 177
DI Chain Motion Monitor................................................................................................................................................ 111
DI Event Electricity 1 ..................................................................................................................................................... 160
DI Event Mechanics 1 ................................................................................................................................................... 159
DI External Error 1 ........................................................................................................................................................ 236
DI External Error 1 (Block 1) ......................................................................................................................................... 227
DI External Event 1 ....................................................................................................................................................... 131
DI Init. Controller ........................................................................................................................................................... 182
DI Limit Switch CLOSE ................................................................................................................................................. 236
DI Limit Switch OPEN ................................................................................................................................................... 235
DI Local Mode ............................................................................................................................................................... 133
DI ON Motor (2nd) (Block 1).......................................................................................................................................... 227
DI Reset Totalizer 1 ...................................................................................................................................................... 135
DI Reset Totalizer 2 ...................................................................................................................................................... 135
DI Sensor 1 ................................................................................................................................................................... 209
DI Sensor 2 ................................................................................................................................................................... 209
DI Source Belt Sensor ................................................................................................................................................... 145
DI Switch On Compensation ......................................................................................................................................... 214
DI Volumetric Mode ....................................................................................................................................................... 133
DI Volumetric synchron ................................................................................................................................................. 133
DI Zero Set .................................................................................................................................................................... 136
Dialog Behaviour .............................................................................................................................................................. 96
Difference Flow Rate ...................................................................................................................................................... 105
Difference Flow Rate Offset ........................................................................................................................................... 106
Difference Flow Rate Range .......................................................................................................................................... 106
Difference Function ........................................................................................................................................................ 106
Digital Inputs .................................................................................................................................................................. 131
Digital Outputs................................................................................................................................................................ 136
Display and Operation Fields ........................................................................................................................................... 24
Display Filter .................................................................................................................................................................. 173
Display Format ............................................................................................................................................................... 173
Display Parameter Alterations .......................................................................................................................................... 35
Display Stored Counter Readings .................................................................................................................................... 34
Display the Most Recent Events ('Errors') ........................................................................................................................ 34
Index
Display the Most Recent Parameter Alterations. .............................................................................................................. 34

DO 2nd Bridge MAX ...................................................................................................................................................... 185
DO 2nd Bridge MIN ....................................................................................................................................................... 184
DO Actual Flow Rate MAX ............................................................................................................................................ 137
DO Actual Flow Rate MIN ............................................................................................................................................. 137
DO ALARM ................................................................................................................................................................... 137
DO Batch Running ........................................................................................................................................................ 141
DO Belt Drift .................................................................................................................................................................. 147
DO Belt Skew ................................................................................................................................................................ 147
DO Belt Slip................................................................................................................................................................... 148
DO Bin Filling ................................................................................................................................................................ 174
DO Bin Level MAX ........................................................................................................................................................ 176
DO Bin Level MIN ......................................................................................................................................................... 175
DO Check Gate ............................................................................................................................................................. 198
DO Check Measurement Active .................................................................................................................................... 194
DO CleanOut Timer ...................................................................................................................................................... 110
DO Control Started ........................................................................................................................................................ 193
DO Correction Error ...................................................................................................................................................... 200
DO Dead Time Active.................................................................................................................................................... 205
DO Deviation ................................................................................................................................................................. 137
DO Dribble Feed ........................................................................................................................................................... 141
DO Event Electricity ...................................................................................................................................................... 160
DO Event Mechanics..................................................................................................................................................... 160
DO Event Mechatronics 1 ............................................................................................................................................. 161
DO Event Mechatronics 2 ............................................................................................................................................. 161
DO Feeder ON .............................................................................................................................................................. 179
DO Feeder Started ........................................................................................................................................................ 136
DO Full Feed ................................................................................................................................................................. 141
DO Keyboard Mode ...................................................................................................................................................... 139
DO Load MAX ............................................................................................................................................................... 138
DO Load MIN ................................................................................................................................................................ 138
DO Local Mode ............................................................................................................................................................. 138
DO Moisture active ........................................................................................................................................................ 202
DO Moisture MAX ......................................................................................................................................................... 202
DO ON/OFF Active ....................................................................................................................................................... 205
DO PLC 1 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 157
DO PLC 2 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 158
DO PLC 3 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 158
DO PLC 4 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 158
DO PLC 5 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 158
DO PLC 6 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 158
DO PLC 7 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 158
DO PLC 8 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 158
DO Pre-cut-off ............................................................................................................................................................... 142
DO Pressure-MAX ........................................................................................................................................................ 214
DO Pressure-MIN .......................................................................................................................................................... 213
DO Pulse Counter ......................................................................................................................................................... 103
DO Ready ..................................................................................................................................................................... 161
DO Ready for Start........................................................................................................................................................ 161
DO Scale Start .............................................................................................................................................................. 136
DO Setpoint Active ........................................................................................................................................................ 205
DO Slip 2 ....................................................................................................................................................................... 210
DO Speed MAX............................................................................................................................................................. 138
DO Speed MIN .............................................................................................................................................................. 138
DO Start Prefeeder ....................................................................................................................................................... 137
DO Volumetric Mode ..................................................................................................................................................... 138
DO WARNING .............................................................................................................................................................. 139
DO Zero Set OK ............................................................................................................................................................ 139
DO Expect Acceptance .................................................................................................................................................. 195
Effective Platform Length ....................................................................................................................................... 107, 183
Effective Weighing Platform Length ............................................................................................................................... 289
Electrical Connections ...................................................................................................................................................... 54
Electrical System............................................................................................................................................................ 244
Emergency Setpoint ....................................................................................................................................................... 117
Entering Basic parameters ............................................................................................................................................... 54
Ethernet.......................................................................................................................................................................... 157
Index
Event 2nd Bridge MAX .......................................................................................................................................... 185, 249

Event 2nd Bridge MIN ........................................................................................................................................... 184, 253
Event Absolute Span Correction Error .................................................................................................................. 197, 241
Event Absolute Tare Correction Error ................................................................................................................... 196, 240
Event Actual Flow Rate MAX ................................................................................................................................ 119, 248
Event Actual Flow Rate MIN ................................................................................................................................. 118, 252
Event Acyclic Communication ............................................................................................................................... 150, 256
Event Analog Input < Offset .................................................................................................................................. 117, 245
Event Batch setpoint Limit ..................................................................................................................................... 143, 247
Event Belt Drift ...................................................................................................................................................... 146, 251
Event Belt Skew .................................................................................................................................................... 146, 250
Event Bin Error ...................................................................................................................................................... 200, 242
Event Bin Level MAX............................................................................................................................................. 175, 249
Event Bin Level MIN .............................................................................................................................................. 175, 252
Event Bin Load MAX Sensor ................................................................................................................................. 177, 243
Event Chain Motion Monitor .................................................................................................................................. 112, 251
Event Check Gate Error ........................................................................................................................................ 199, 242
Event Communication HMI 1................................................................................................................................... 98, 255
Event Communication VCU20100-Unit 2 ................................................................................................................ 94, 255
Event Communication VCU20100-Unit 3 ................................................................................................................ 95, 255
Event Communication VHM serial ........................................................................................................................... 99, 255
Event Communication VMO20100-Unit 1................................................................................................................ 96, 256
Event Communication VMO20100-Unit 2................................................................................................................ 96, 256
Event Controller Limited ........................................................................................................................................ 124, 242
Event Cyclic Communication................................................................................................................................. 150, 256
Event Deviation ..................................................................................................................................................... 124, 248
Event DMS-Input ................................................................................................................................................... 211, 239
Event DMS-Input < MIN ........................................................................................................................................ 212, 252
Event DMS-Input > MAX ....................................................................................................................................... 212, 249
Event Electricity ..................................................................................................................................................... 161, 246
Event Error LC Input ............................................................................................................................................. 115, 237
Event Error LC Input (2nd Bridge) ......................................................................................................................... 184, 238
Event Error LC Input (Bin) ..................................................................................................................................... 172, 238
Event Expect Acceptance ..................................................................................................................................... 194, 242
Event External Event 1 .......................................................................................................................................... 131, 254
Event FCB-Error.................................................................................................................................................... 218, 246
Event Feeder Not Stopped .................................................................................................................................... 194, 241
Event LC Input < MIN ............................................................................................................................................ 115, 251
Event LC Input > MAX........................................................................................................................... 116, 173, 247, 249
Event Limit Switch ................................................................................................................................................. 135, 250
Event Linearization Error ....................................................................................................................................... 207, 238
Event Load MAX ................................................................................................................................................... 119, 248
Event Load MIN .................................................................................................................................................... 119, 252
Event Maint. Electric.............................................................................................................................................. 143, 254
Event Maint.Feeder Run ....................................................................................................................................... 144, 254
Event MAX Flow Gate ........................................................................................................................................... 208, 243
Event Maximum Fill Weight ................................................................................................................................... 192, 240
Event Mechanics ................................................................................................................................................... 160, 246
Event Mechatronics ............................................................................................................................................... 161, 246
Event Memory ....................................................................................................................................................... 116, 254
Event MIN Flow Gate ............................................................................................................................................ 208, 243
Event Minimum Check Quantity ............................................................................................................................ 191, 239
Event Minimum Fill Weight .................................................................................................................................... 192, 239
Event Moisture MAX.............................................................................................................................................. 202, 247
Event NAMUR Error VCU1-DI6 ............................................................................................................................. 133, 244
Event NAMUR Error VMO1-DI7 ............................................................................................................................ 136, 245
Index
Event NAMUR Error VMO2-DI7 ............................................................................................................................ 136, 245

Event No Check Release ...................................................................................................................................... 189, 241
Event Not Ready ................................................................................................................................................... 161, 246
Event Not Ready for Start ..................................................................................................................................... 162, 246
Event Out of Tolerance ......................................................................................................................................... 142, 247
Event Power Failure .............................................................................................................................................. 116, 244
Event Prepare Check Measurement ..................................................................................................................... 194, 241
Event Pressure-MAX ............................................................................................................................................. 213, 250
Event Pressure-MIN .............................................................................................................................................. 213, 253
Event Relative Span Correction Error ................................................................................................................... 197, 241
Event Relative Tare Correction Error .................................................................................................................... 196, 240
Event Run Disabled .............................................................................................................................................. 104, 246
Event Setpoint Limited .......................................................................................................................................... 116, 253
Event Slip .............................................................................................................................................................. 147, 250
Event Slip 2 ........................................................................................................................................................... 210, 251
Event Speed MAX ................................................................................................................................................. 120, 248
Event Speed MIN .................................................................................................................................................. 120, 252
Event Stand-By ..................................................................................................................................................... 114, 253
Event Tachometer Input ........................................................................................................................................ 115, 238
Event Tare Correction ........................................................................................................................................... 113, 239
Event Volum. caused by LC-error ......................................................................................................................... 114, 243
Event Group: Calibration ................................................................................................................................................ 237
Event Group: Check Measurement ................................................................................................................................ 239
Event Group: Controller.................................................................................................................................................. 242
Event Group: Electrical System ...................................................................................................................................... 244
Event Group: Interlock.................................................................................................................................................... 246
Event Group: Material Flow ............................................................................................................................................ 247
Event Group: MAX ......................................................................................................................................................... 247
Event Group: Mechanic .................................................................................................................................................. 250
Event Group: MIN .......................................................................................................................................................... 251
Event Group: Sequence Monitoring ............................................................................................................................... 253
Event Group: System Message ...................................................................................................................................... 254
Event messages ............................................................................................................................................................... 24
Event Messages ............................................................................................................................................................. 237
Events Details ................................................................................................................................................................ 237
Exit Scale ....................................................................................................................................................................... 101
External Control Type....................................................................................................................................................... 50
Factor Deviation ............................................................................................................................................................. 123
FCB analog outputs ....................................................................................................................................................... 214
FCB digital outputs ......................................................................................................................................................... 218
FCB Variant.................................................................................................................................................................... 218
FCB_AO 01 .................................................................................................................................................................... 214
FCB_AO 02 .................................................................................................................................................................... 215
FCB_AO 03 .................................................................................................................................................................... 216
FCB_AO 04 .................................................................................................................................................................... 216
FCB_AO 05 .................................................................................................................................................................... 217
FCB_DO 01 .................................................................................................................................................................... 218
FCB_DO 02 .................................................................................................................................................................... 219
FCB_DO 03 .................................................................................................................................................................... 219
FCB_DO 04 .................................................................................................................................................................... 219
FCB_DO 05 .................................................................................................................................................................... 219
FCB_DO 06 .................................................................................................................................................................... 219
FCB_DO 07 .................................................................................................................................................................... 219
FCB_DO 08 .................................................................................................................................................................... 219
FCB_DO 09 .................................................................................................................................................................... 220
FCB_DO 10 .................................................................................................................................................................... 220
FCB_DO 11 .................................................................................................................................................................... 220
FCB_DO 12 .................................................................................................................................................................... 220
FCB_DO 13 .................................................................................................................................................................... 220
FCB_DO 14 .................................................................................................................................................................... 220
FCB_DO 15 .................................................................................................................................................................... 220
FCB_DO 16 .................................................................................................................................................................... 221
FCB_DO 17 .................................................................................................................................................................... 221
FCB_DO 18 .................................................................................................................................................................... 221
FCB_DO 19 .................................................................................................................................................................... 221
FCB_DO 20 .................................................................................................................................................................... 221
Index
Feeder Constant ............................................................................................................................................................ 179

Feeder control ................................................................................................................................................................ 109
Feeder Definition ............................................................................................................................................................ 101
Feeder Monitoring .......................................................................................................................................................... 114
Feeder Start ................................................................................................................................................................... 104
Feeder Stopped ............................................................................................................................................................. 193
Feedrate Setpoint........................................................................................................................................................... 104
Fig. 01: The measuring principle for the beltweigher and weighfeeder .............................................................................. 9
Fig. 02: Weighfeeder control principle .............................................................................................................................. 11
Fig. 03: Weighfeeder with feed control as the control principle ........................................................................................ 11
Fig. 04: The belt scale with feed control as the control principle ...................................................................................... 12
Fig. 05: Constant belt load control principle ..................................................................................................................... 13
Fig. 06: Load curve over belt circuits ................................................................................................................................ 13
Fig. 07: The weighfeeder control principle with BIC and VAP .......................................................................................... 14
Fig. 08: Feeding ............................................................................................................................................................... 15
Fig. 09: DISOCONT Tersus VHM operating panel display ............................................................................................... 23
Fig. 10: Lines configuration .............................................................................................................................................. 32
Fig. 11: Selection dialog for process values ..................................................................................................................... 33
Fig. 12: Single Unit KME Model ....................................................................................................................................... 48
Fig. 13: Separated Units Control Type ............................................................................................................................. 49
Fig. 14: Filling System KME Type .................................................................................................................................... 49
Fig. 15: External KME Type ............................................................................................................................................. 50
Fig. 16: Weighbridge ........................................................................................................................................................ 53
Fig. 17: Belt scale alignment points: A for troughed belts, B for flat belts ......................................................................... 53
Fig. 18: Belt run measurement and belt slip measurement .............................................................................................. 57
Fig. 19: Arrangement for verification with bulk material .................................................................................................... 60
Fig. 20: Parameter sets .................................................................................................................................................... 65
Fig. 21: Setpoint and switch-on sources......................................................................................................................... 257
Fig. 22: The start and stop sequence ............................................................................................................................. 258
Fig. 23: The module for measuring the belt load, belt velocity and flow rate .................................................................. 260
Fig. 24: Standard flow rate controller ............................................................................................................................. 262
Fig. 25: Universal flow rate controller ............................................................................................................................. 263
Fig. 26: Effect of the controller parameters on the controller output with a discontinuous control deviation on t=0........ 264
Fig. 27: Upper controller magnitude limit ........................................................................................................................ 265
Fig. 28: Batching flow chart without setpoint ramp ......................................................................................................... 267
Fig. 29: 2-sensor slip identification ................................................................................................................................. 269
Fig. 30: Local operation with VLG .................................................................................................................................. 271
Fig. 31: VMO 20100 with VCU 20100 ............................................................................................................................ 271
Fig. 32: VMO 20101 with VCU ....................................................................................................................................... 272
Fig. 33: Inserted local operation logic ............................................................................................................................. 272
Fig. 34: Local operation logic for rotating drives ............................................................................................................. 273
Fig. 35: The logic for position-controlled drives .............................................................................................................. 275
Fig. 36: Prefeeder control weighfeeder .......................................................................................................................... 277
Fig. 37: Loading controller with a coefficient estimate (i.e., a weighbridge).................................................................... 278
Fig. 38: Loading controller with a coefficient estimate (i.e., two weighbridges) .............................................................. 279
Fig. 39: Setpoint calculation for loading ......................................................................................................................... 280
Fig. 40: Loading setpoint optimization (OPT) and resulting feed belt velocity ................................................................ 281
Fig. 41: Scaling fill level measurement and limits ........................................................................................................... 281
Fig. 42: Bin fill level control............................................................................................................................................. 282
Fig. 43: Flow chart control measurement ....................................................................................................................... 284
Fig. 44: Simplified signal flow diagram ........................................................................................................................... 286
Fig. 45: System architecture and signal processing ....................................................................................................... 286
Fig. 46: Logic diagram of the links between events and ready messages ..................................................................... 287
Fig. 47: Alternative inputs using the example of a weight signal for an additional bin .................................................... 294
Fig. 48: Example of a function block link ........................................................................................................................ 296
Fig. 49: Binary function blocks ....................................................................................................................................... 297
Fig. 50: Analog function blocks ...................................................................................................................................... 299
Fig. 51: Test Connector .................................................................................................................................................. 300
Filling control bin weigher ............................................................................................................................................... 100
Filling System Control Type ............................................................................................................................................. 49
Filling Type ..................................................................................................................................................................... 179
Filter Actual Flow Rate .................................................................................................................................................. 117
Filter Actual Flow Rate analog ...................................................................................................................................... 117
Filter Belt Load .............................................................................................................................................................. 118
Filter Belt Speed ............................................................................................................................................................ 118
Filter Deviation .............................................................................................................................................................. 122
Index
Filter Pressure Value DMS ............................................................................................................................................. 211

Filters ............................................................................................................................................................................. 117
Finish Check Measurement............................................................................................................................................ 190
Five Safety Rules of Electrical Engineering........................................................................................................................ 6
Fixed mode configuration ............................................................................................................................................... 154
FLOAT-Format ............................................................................................................................................................... 152
Flow Gate ....................................................................................................................................................................... 207
Flow rate controller......................................................................................................................................................... 262
Flow Rate Filter .............................................................................................................................................................. 182
Flow Rate Offset ............................................................................................................................................................ 129
Flow Rate Range ........................................................................................................................................................... 129
Flow Rate Units .............................................................................................................................................................. 102
Format Data ................................................................................................................................................................... 148
Function Blocks for Analog Signals ................................................................................................................................ 298
Function Blocks for Binary Signals ................................................................................................................................. 297
Function Check ................................................................................................................................................................ 59
Gateway ......................................................................................................................................................................... 157
General Diagram ................................................................................................................................................................ 7
Gravimetric Mode ............................................................................................................................................................. 10
Handling the Function Blocks ......................................................................................................................................... 296
Hardware Modules ........................................................................................................................................................... 93
HI01 Event LC Input > MAX ......................................................................................................................................... 247
HI02 Event Actual Flow Rate MAX ............................................................................................................................... 248
HI03 Event Load MAX .................................................................................................................................................. 248
HI04 Event Speed MAX ............................................................................................................................................... 248
HI05 Event Deviation.................................................................................................................................................... 248
HI10 Event LC Input > MAX ......................................................................................................................................... 249
HI11 Event Bin Level MAX ........................................................................................................................................... 249
HI12 Event 2nd Bridge MAX ........................................................................................................................................ 249
HI14 Event DMS-Input > MAX...................................................................................................................................... 249
HI16 Event Pressure-MAX ........................................................................................................................................... 250
HMI Value 01 ................................................................................................................................................................. 223
HMI Value 02 ................................................................................................................................................................. 223
HMI Value 03 ................................................................................................................................................................. 224
HMI Value 04 ................................................................................................................................................................. 224
HMI Value 05 ................................................................................................................................................................. 224
HMI Value 06 ................................................................................................................................................................. 224
HMI Value 07 ................................................................................................................................................................. 224
HMI Value 08 ................................................................................................................................................................. 224
HMI Value 09 ................................................................................................................................................................. 224
HMI Value 10 ................................................................................................................................................................. 224
Hourly Total Time ........................................................................................................................................................... 221
I-Component TN............................................................................................................................................. 122, 180, 186
ID Preset Value 1 ........................................................................................................................................................... 154
ID Preset Value 2 ........................................................................................................................................................... 154
ID Preset Value 3 ........................................................................................................................................................... 154
ID Preset Value 4 ........................................................................................................................................................... 154
ID Preset Value 5 ........................................................................................................................................................... 154
ID Preset Value 6 ........................................................................................................................................................... 154
ID Preset Value 7 ........................................................................................................................................................... 154
ID Preset Value 8 ........................................................................................................................................................... 155
ID Read Value 1 ............................................................................................................................................................. 155
ID Read Value 10 ........................................................................................................................................................... 156
ID Read Value 11 ........................................................................................................................................................... 156
ID Read Value 12 ........................................................................................................................................................... 156
ID Read Value 13 ........................................................................................................................................................... 156
ID Read Value 14 ........................................................................................................................................................... 156
ID Read Value 15 ........................................................................................................................................................... 156
ID Read Value 16 ........................................................................................................................................................... 157
ID Read Value 2 ............................................................................................................................................................. 155
ID Read Value 3 ............................................................................................................................................................. 155
ID Read Value 4 ............................................................................................................................................................. 155
ID Read Value 5 ............................................................................................................................................................. 155
ID Read Value 6 ............................................................................................................................................................. 155
ID Read Value 7 ............................................................................................................................................................. 155
ID Read Value 8 ............................................................................................................................................................. 156
Index
ID Read Value 9 ............................................................................................................................................................. 156

IL01 Event Run Disabled.............................................................................................................................................. 246
IL02 Event Mechanics .................................................................................................................................................. 246
IL03 Event Electricity .................................................................................................................................................... 246
IL04 Event Mechatronics .............................................................................................................................................. 246
IL05 Event Not Ready .................................................................................................................................................. 246
IL06 Event Not Ready for Start .................................................................................................................................... 246
IL10 Event FCB-Error ................................................................................................................................................... 246
Initialise Time Elements ................................................................................................................................................. 204
Interlock.......................................................................................................................................................................... 246
Interlocking ..................................................................................................................................................................... 159
IP Address...................................................................................................................................................................... 157
JOG enable (Block 1) ..................................................................................................................................................... 226
JOG enable (Block 2) ..................................................................................................................................................... 228
JOG enable (Block 3) ..................................................................................................................................................... 230
JOG enable (Block 4) ..................................................................................................................................................... 232
JOG enable (Block 5) ..................................................................................................................................................... 234
Keyboard Mode ON/OFF ................................................................................................................................................. 30
Language ......................................................................................................................................................................... 96
LC Load Measurement .................................................................................................................................................. 171
LC Characteristic Value.................................................................................................................................. 106, 171, 183
LC Filter.......................................................................................................................................................... 120, 172, 183
LC Rated Capacity ......................................................................................................................................... 107, 172, 183
Lever Ratio ..................................................................................................................................................................... 107
Limit Actual Flow Rate MAX .......................................................................................................................................... 118
Limit Actual Flow Rate MIN ........................................................................................................................................... 118
Limit Load MAX ............................................................................................................................................................. 119
Limit Load MIN .............................................................................................................................................................. 119
Limit Speed MAX .......................................................................................................................................................... 120
Limit Speed MIN............................................................................................................................................................ 120
Limit Max. Bin Error ........................................................................................................................................................ 199
Limit Value Difference .................................................................................................................................................... 113
Limit Values.................................................................................................................................................................... 118
Linearization ................................................................................................................................................................... 285
Linearization ................................................................................................................................................................... 205
Linearization I1 ............................................................................................................................................................... 206
Linearization I2 ............................................................................................................................................................... 206
Linearization I3 ............................................................................................................................................................... 206
Linearization I4 ............................................................................................................................................................... 206
Linearization ON ............................................................................................................................................................ 205
Linearization S1 ............................................................................................................................................................. 205
Linearization S2 ............................................................................................................................................................. 206
Linearization S3 ............................................................................................................................................................. 206
Linearization S4 ............................................................................................................................................................. 206
Links in the Parameter Block 'Interlocking' ..................................................................................................................... 287
LO01 Event LC Input < MIN ......................................................................................................................................... 251
LO02 Event Actual Flow Rate MIN ............................................................................................................................... 252
LO03 Event Load MIN .................................................................................................................................................. 252
LO04 Event Speed MIN ............................................................................................................................................... 252
LO10 Event DMS-Input < MIN...................................................................................................................................... 252
LO11 Event Bin Level MIN ........................................................................................................................................... 252
LO12 Event 2nd Bridge MIN ........................................................................................................................................ 253
LO16 Event Pressure-MIN ........................................................................................................................................... 253
Load Cell 1 analog Input Offset ...................................................................................................................................... 108
Load Cell 1 analog Input Range ..................................................................................................................................... 109
Load Cell 2 analog Input Offset ...................................................................................................................................... 109
Load Cell 2 analog Input Range ..................................................................................................................................... 109
Local Mode (Gate) ......................................................................................................................................................... 235
Local Mode (Speed) ....................................................................................................................................................... 225
Local operation............................................................................................................................................................... 270
Local operation logic for rotating drives and valves........................................................................................................ 273
Logger cycle time ........................................................................................................................................................... 222
Login for Privileged Users (Login/Logout) ........................................................................................................................ 40
Lower Limit ..................................................................................................................................................... 124, 163, 181
Maintenance and Recalibration ........................................................................................................................................ 63
Maintenance Electric ...................................................................................................................................................... 143
Index
Maintenance Feeder Run ............................................................................................................................................... 144

Maintenance interval ...................................................................................................................................................... 143
Material Flow .................................................................................................................................................................. 247
MAX ............................................................................................................................................................................... 247
Maximum Fill Weight ...................................................................................................................................................... 192
Mean Limit Value ........................................................................................................................................................... 113
Measured Values and Graphics ....................................................................................................................................... 26
Measuring and Feeding at the Discharge Point (VAP) ..................................................................................................... 14
Measuring principle ............................................................................................................................................................ 8
Measuring the flow rate (M)............................................................................................................................................ 260
Mechanic ........................................................................................................................................................................ 250
Mechanical Prerequisites ................................................................................................................................................. 53
MF05 Event Moisture MAX .......................................................................................................................................... 247
MF06 Event Out of Tolerance ...................................................................................................................................... 247
MF07 Event Batch setpoint Limit .................................................................................................................................. 247
MIN................................................................................................................................................................................. 251
Minimum Check Quantity ............................................................................................................................................... 191
Minimum Fill Weight ....................................................................................................................................................... 192
Modes of Operation: Normal Operation and Keyboard Operation.................................................................................... 26
Moisture ......................................................................................................................................................................... 200
Moisture Active............................................................................................................................................................... 200
Moisture MAX................................................................................................................................................................. 202
Moisture Offset ............................................................................................................................................................... 201
Moisture Range .............................................................................................................................................................. 201
Moisture Select .............................................................................................................................................................. 201
Motor Select ................................................................................................................................................................... 235
Motor Select (Block 1) .................................................................................................................................................... 225
Name of the Device .......................................................................................................................................................... 24
Net Mask ........................................................................................................................................................................ 157
Nominal Bin Load ........................................................................................................................................................... 173
Nominal Flow Rate ......................................................................................................................................................... 101
Nominal Moisture ........................................................................................................................................................... 201
Nominal Speed............................................................................................................................................................... 101
Norming.......................................................................................................................................................................... 212
Offset.............................................................................................................................................................................. 163
Offset FCB_AO 1 ........................................................................................................................................................... 214
Offset FCB_AO 2 ........................................................................................................................................................... 215
Offset FCB_AO 3 ........................................................................................................................................................... 216
Offset FCB_AO 4 ........................................................................................................................................................... 216
Offset FCB_AO 5 ........................................................................................................................................................... 217
ON in Remote (Block 1) ................................................................................................................................................. 225
ON/OFF Clock ON ......................................................................................................................................................... 204
On/Off Operation .............................................................................................................................................................. 25
ON/OFF Select............................................................................................................................................................... 204
OPEN in Remote ............................................................................................................................................................ 235
Operating and Control Access ......................................................................................................................................... 17
Operating the calibration functions ................................................................................................................................... 37
Operating the control measurement (KME) ...................................................................................................................... 50
Operation ......................................................................................................................................................................... 17
Optimize Controller ........................................................................................................................................................ 122
Optimizing Hopper Fill Level Regulation .......................................................................................................................... 46
Own Address.................................................................................................................................................................. 148
P01 - Hardware Modules.................................................................................................................................................. 93
P01.01 - Analog Channel A10 .......................................................................................................................................... 93
P01.02 - Analog Channel A11 .......................................................................................................................................... 94
P01.03 - VCU20100-Unit 2............................................................................................................................................... 94
P01.04 - VCU2 Analog Channel A10 .............................................................................................................................. 94
Index
P01.06 - Event Communication VCU20100-Unit 2 .......................................................................................................... 94

P01.07 - VCU20100-Unit 3............................................................................................................................................... 95
P01.10 - Event Communication VCU20100-Unit 3 .......................................................................................................... 95
P01.11 - VHM RS485 Address......................................................................................................................................... 95
P01.12 - VMO20100-Unit 1 .............................................................................................................................................. 96
P01.13 - Event Communication VMO20100-Unit 1 ......................................................................................................... 96
P01.14 - VMO20100-Unit 2 .............................................................................................................................................. 96
P01.15 - Event Communication VMO20100-Unit 2 ......................................................................................................... 96
P02 - Dialog Behaviour .................................................................................................................................................... 96
P02.01 - Language ........................................................................................................................................................... 96
P02.02 - Units .................................................................................................................................................................. 97
P02.03 - Scale Name ....................................................................................................................................................... 97
P02.04 - Access Rights Limitation HMI ............................................................................................................................ 97
P02.05 - Remote IP Address HMI 1 ................................................................................................................................. 97
P02.06 - Event Communication HMI 1 ............................................................................................................................ 98
P02.11 - Event Communication VHM serial .................................................................................................................... 99
P02.12 - Password ........................................................................................................................................................... 99
P02.13 - 2. Password ....................................................................................................................................................... 99
P02.14 - Reset Counter 1............................................................................................................................................... 100
P02.15 - Reset Counter 2............................................................................................................................................... 100
P02.16 - Batch control .................................................................................................................................................... 100
P02.17 - Switch Grav./Vol. command ............................................................................................................................ 100
P02.18 - Switch Keyboard-/Normal Mode ...................................................................................................................... 100
P02.19 - Filling control bin weigher ................................................................................................................................ 100
P02.20 - Data Log ON/OFF............................................................................................................................................ 101
P02.21 - Exit Scale ......................................................................................................................................................... 101
P03 - Feeder Definition .................................................................................................................................................. 101
P03.01 - Nominal Flow Rate .......................................................................................................................................... 101
P03.02 - Nominal Speed ................................................................................................................................................ 101
P03.03 - Flow Rate Units ............................................................................................................................................... 102
P03.04 - Counter 1 Unit.................................................................................................................................................. 102
P03.05 - Pulse Length Total ........................................................................................................................................... 102
P03.06 - Counter 2 Unit.................................................................................................................................................. 103
P03.07 - Counter 3 Unit.................................................................................................................................................. 103
P03.08 - DO Pulse Counter........................................................................................................................................... 103
P03.09 - Totalizer Increment .......................................................................................................................................... 103
P04 - Control Sources .................................................................................................................................................... 103
P04.01 - Feeder Start ..................................................................................................................................................... 104
P04.02 - Feedrate Setpoint ............................................................................................................................................ 104
P04.03 - Source Run Enable.......................................................................................................................................... 104
P04.04 - Event Run Disabled ........................................................................................................................................ 104
P04.05 - Source Relative Setpoint ................................................................................................................................. 105
P04.06 - Relativer Setpoint Range ................................................................................................................................. 105
P04.07 - Relative Setpoint Offset ................................................................................................................................... 105
P04.08 - Difference Flow Rate ....................................................................................................................................... 105
P04.09 - Difference Flow Rate Range ............................................................................................................................ 106
P04.10 - Difference Flow Rate Offset............................................................................................................................. 106
P04.11 - Difference Function.......................................................................................................................................... 106
P05 - Rated Data ........................................................................................................................................................... 106
P05.01 - Pulses per length ............................................................................................................................................. 106
P05.02 - LC Characteristic Value ................................................................................................................................... 106
P05.03 - LC Rated Capacity........................................................................................................................................... 107
P05.04 - Effective Platform Length ................................................................................................................................. 107
P05.05 - Lever Ratio ...................................................................................................................................................... 107
P05.06 - Angle ............................................................................................................................................................... 107
P05.07 - Speed Measurement ....................................................................................................................................... 107
P05.08 - Source Load Cell ............................................................................................................................................. 108
P05.09 - Source Load Cell 2 .......................................................................................................................................... 108
P05.10 - Load Cell 1 analog Input Offset ....................................................................................................................... 108
P05.11 - Load Cell 1 analog Input Range ...................................................................................................................... 109
Index
P05.12 - Load Cell 2 analog Input Offset ....................................................................................................................... 109

P05.13 - Load Cell 2 analog Input Range ...................................................................................................................... 109
P06 - Feeder control ...................................................................................................................................................... 109
P06.01 - Afterflow Totalizer ............................................................................................................................................ 109
P06.02 - Zero Drop-Out Active ....................................................................................................................................... 109
P06.03 - Zero Drop-Out Limit ......................................................................................................................................... 110
P06.04 - Start-Up Mode ................................................................................................................................................. 110
P06.05 - DO CleanOut Timer ........................................................................................................................................ 110
P06.06 - CleanOut ON Time .......................................................................................................................................... 111
P06.07 - CleanOut OFF Time ........................................................................................................................................ 111
P06.08 - DI Chain Motion Monitor ................................................................................................................................. 111
P06.09 - Chain Motion Delay ......................................................................................................................................... 111
P06.10 - Event Chain Motion Monitor ........................................................................................................................... 112
P06.11 - Auto Zero Active .............................................................................................................................................. 112
P06.12 - Zeroing Limit .................................................................................................................................................... 112
P06.13 - Event Tare Correction ..................................................................................................................................... 113
P06.14 - Limit Value Difference ...................................................................................................................................... 113
P06.15 - Mean Limit Value ............................................................................................................................................. 113
P06.16 - Volum on LC failure ......................................................................................................................................... 114
P06.17 - Event Volum. caused by LC-error ................................................................................................................... 114
P07 - Feeder Monitoring................................................................................................................................................. 114
P07.01 - Event Stand-By ............................................................................................................................................... 114
P07.02 - Stand-By Limit Value ....................................................................................................................................... 115
P07.03 - Event Tachometer Input ................................................................................................................................. 115
P07.04 - Event Error LC Input ....................................................................................................................................... 115
P07.05 - Event LC Input < MIN ..................................................................................................................................... 115
P07.06 - Event LC Input > MAX .................................................................................................................................... 116
P07.07 - Event Setpoint Limited .................................................................................................................................... 116
P07.08 - Event Power Failure ....................................................................................................................................... 116
P07.09 - Event Memory................................................................................................................................................. 116
P07.10 - Source Emergency Setpoint ............................................................................................................................ 117
P07.11 - Emergency Setpoint ........................................................................................................................................ 117
P07.12 - Event Analog Input < Offset ............................................................................................................................ 117
P08 - Filters .................................................................................................................................................................... 117
P08.01 - Filter Actual Flow Rate .................................................................................................................................... 117
P08.02 - Filter Actual Flow Rate analog ........................................................................................................................ 117
P08.03 - Filter Belt Load................................................................................................................................................ 118
P08.04 - Filter Belt Speed ............................................................................................................................................. 118
P09 - Limit Values .......................................................................................................................................................... 118
P09.01 - Limit Actual Flow Rate MIN ............................................................................................................................ 118
P09.02 - Event Actual Flow Rate MIN ........................................................................................................................... 118
P09.03 - Limit Actual Flow Rate MAX ........................................................................................................................... 118
P09.04 - Event Actual Flow Rate MAX .......................................................................................................................... 119
P09.05 - Limit Load MIN................................................................................................................................................ 119
P09.06 - Event Load MIN .............................................................................................................................................. 119
P09.07 - Limit Load MAX .............................................................................................................................................. 119
P09.08 - Event Load MAX ............................................................................................................................................. 119
P09.09 - Limit Speed MIN ............................................................................................................................................. 120
P09.10 - Event Speed MIN............................................................................................................................................ 120
P09.11 - Limit Speed MAX ............................................................................................................................................ 120
P09.12 - Event Speed MAX .......................................................................................................................................... 120
P10 - Calibration Data .................................................................................................................................................... 120
P10.01 - LC Filter ........................................................................................................................................................... 120
P10.02 - Range Correction............................................................................................................................................. 120
P10.03 - Belt Circuit Time .............................................................................................................................................. 121
P10.04 - Calibration Weight ........................................................................................................................................... 121
P10.05 - Basic Tare ....................................................................................................................................................... 121
P10.06 - Tare Correction ................................................................................................................................................ 121
P10.07 - Belt Circuit No. ................................................................................................................................................. 121
P11 - Rate controller ...................................................................................................................................................... 121
P11.01 - Optimize Controller .......................................................................................................................................... 122
P11.02 - P-Component KP ............................................................................................................................................. 122
P11.03 - I-Component TN .............................................................................................................................................. 122
P11.04 - Filter Deviation ................................................................................................................................................ 122
P11.05 - Time Deviation ................................................................................................................................................. 123
P11.06 - Threshold Deviation ......................................................................................................................................... 123
Index
P11.07 - Factor Deviation............................................................................................................................................... 123

P11.08 - Deviation abs. max. ......................................................................................................................................... 123
P11.09 - Event Deviation............................................................................................................................................... 124
P11.10 - Event Controller Limited ................................................................................................................................. 124
P11.11 - Lower Limit ...................................................................................................................................................... 124
P11.12 - Upper Limit ...................................................................................................................................................... 125
P11.13 - Controller Magnitude Offset ............................................................................................................................. 125
P11.14 - Position at STOP ............................................................................................................................................. 125
P11.15 - Volumetric Start-Up ......................................................................................................................................... 125
P11.16 - Volumetric Clearance ...................................................................................................................................... 126
P11.17 - Setpoint Offset ................................................................................................................................................. 126
P11.18 - Setpoint Range ................................................................................................................................................ 126
P11.19 - Store ................................................................................................................................................................ 126
P11.20 - Volumetric Mode .............................................................................................................................................. 126
P11.21 - Bypass ............................................................................................................................................................. 127
P11.22 - Setpoint Filter 1st Ord ...................................................................................................................................... 127
P11.23 - Setpoint Filter 2nd Ord ..................................................................................................................................... 127
P11.24 - Set/Act Sources ............................................................................................................................................... 127
P11.25 - Adaptation 1 .................................................................................................................................................... 128
P12 - Analog Outputs ..................................................................................................................................................... 128
P12.01 - AO Setpoint .................................................................................................................................................... 128
P12.02 - Setpoint Offset ................................................................................................................................................. 128
P12.03 - Setpoint Range ................................................................................................................................................ 128
P12.04 - AO Actual Flow Rate ...................................................................................................................................... 128
P12.05 - Flow Rate Offset .............................................................................................................................................. 129
P12.06 - Flow Rate Range ............................................................................................................................................. 129
P12.07 - AO Belt Load .................................................................................................................................................. 129
P12.08 - Belt Load Offset ............................................................................................................................................... 129
P12.09 - Belt Load Range .............................................................................................................................................. 129
P12.10 - AO Speed ....................................................................................................................................................... 129
P12.11 - Speed Offset .................................................................................................................................................... 130
P12.12 - Speed Range ................................................................................................................................................... 130
P12.13 - AO Deviation................................................................................................................................................... 130
P12.14 - Deviation Offset ............................................................................................................................................... 130
P12.15 - Deviation Range .............................................................................................................................................. 130
P12.16 - AO Motor Speed Control ................................................................................................................................ 131
P13 - Digital Inputs ......................................................................................................................................................... 131
P13.01 - Event External Event 1 ................................................................................................................................... 131
P13.02 - DI External Event 1 ......................................................................................................................................... 131
P13.09 - DI Acknowledge Events .................................................................................................................................. 133
P13.10 - DI Local Mode................................................................................................................................................. 133
P13.11 - DI Volumetric Mode ........................................................................................................................................ 133
P13.12 - DI Volumetric synchron ................................................................................................................................... 133
P13.13 - Event NAMUR Error VCU1-DI6 ...................................................................................................................... 133
P13.19 - DI Reset Totalizer 1 ........................................................................................................................................ 135
P13.20 - DI Reset Totalizer 2 ........................................................................................................................................ 135
P13.21 - Belt Limit Switch .............................................................................................................................................. 135
P13.22 - Event Limit Switch .......................................................................................................................................... 135
P13.23 - DI Zero Set ..................................................................................................................................................... 136
P13.24 - Event NAMUR Error VMO1-DI7...................................................................................................................... 136
P13.25 - Event NAMUR Error VMO2-DI7...................................................................................................................... 136
P14 - Digital Outputs ...................................................................................................................................................... 136
P14.01 - DO Scale Start ................................................................................................................................................ 136
P14.02 - DO Feeder Started ......................................................................................................................................... 136
P14.03 - DO Start Prefeeder ......................................................................................................................................... 137
Index
P14.04 - DO ALARM ..................................................................................................................................................... 137

P14.05 - DO Deviation .................................................................................................................................................. 137
P14.06 - DO Actual Flow Rate MIN ............................................................................................................................... 137
P14.07 - DO Actual Flow Rate MAX ............................................................................................................................. 137
P14.08 - DO Load MIN .................................................................................................................................................. 138
P14.09 - DO Load MAX................................................................................................................................................. 138
P14.10 - DO Speed MIN ............................................................................................................................................... 138
P14.11 - DO Speed MAX .............................................................................................................................................. 138
P14.12 - DO Volumetric Mode ...................................................................................................................................... 138
P14.13 - DO Local Mode ............................................................................................................................................... 138
P14.14 - DO WARNING ................................................................................................................................................ 139
P14.15 - DO Keyboard Mode ........................................................................................................................................ 139
P14.16 - DO Zero Set OK ............................................................................................................................................. 139
P15 - Batch Mode .......................................................................................................................................................... 139
P15.01 - Batch Mode ..................................................................................................................................................... 139
P15.02 - Batch Setpoint Source ..................................................................................................................................... 139
P15.03 - Adaptation Time............................................................................................................................................... 140
P15.04 - Correction Amount ........................................................................................................................................... 140
P15.05 - Adaptation Factor ............................................................................................................................................ 140
P15.06 - Batch Automatic Record .................................................................................................................................. 140
P15.07 - DI Batch Terminate ......................................................................................................................................... 140
P15.08 - DO Batch Running .......................................................................................................................................... 141
P15.09 - DO Dribble Feed ............................................................................................................................................. 141
P15.10 - DO Full Feed .................................................................................................................................................. 141
P15.11 - Analog Setpoint Relat. ..................................................................................................................................... 141
P15.12 - Batch Setpoint Range ...................................................................................................................................... 141
P15.13 - Batch Setpoint Offset ....................................................................................................................................... 141
P15.14 - Batch Tolerance............................................................................................................................................... 142
P15.15 - Event Out of Tolerance ................................................................................................................................... 142
P15.16 - Pre-cut-off Amount........................................................................................................................................... 142
P15.17 - DO Pre-cut-off................................................................................................................................................. 142
P15.18 - Batch Setpoint Limit ......................................................................................................................................... 142
P15.19 - Event Batch setpoint Limit .............................................................................................................................. 143
P15.20 - Batch behaviour after power down .................................................................................................................. 143
P16 - Maintenance interval............................................................................................................................................. 143
P16.01 - Maintenance Electric ....................................................................................................................................... 143
P16.02 - Event Maint. Electric ....................................................................................................................................... 143
P16.03 - Maintenance Feeder Run ................................................................................................................................ 144
P16.04 - Event Maint.Feeder Run ................................................................................................................................. 144
P17 - VAP ...................................................................................................................................................................... 144
P17.01 - VAP Active ....................................................................................................................................................... 144
P17.02 - Platform Dis.Length ......................................................................................................................................... 144
P18 - Belt Monitoring ...................................................................................................................................................... 144
P18.01 - Belt Sensor Active ........................................................................................................................................... 145
P18.02 - DI Source Belt Sensor .................................................................................................................................... 145
P18.03 - BIC Active ........................................................................................................................................................ 145
P18.04 - Sensor Length ................................................................................................................................................. 145
P18.05 - Sensor Width ................................................................................................................................................... 146
P18.06 - Sensor Offset ................................................................................................................................................... 146
P18.07 - Belt Drift ........................................................................................................................................................... 146
P18.08 - Event Belt Drift ................................................................................................................................................ 146
P18.09 - Belt Skew......................................................................................................................................................... 146
P18.10 - Event Belt Skew.............................................................................................................................................. 146
P18.11 - Slip Value ........................................................................................................................................................ 147
P18.12 - Event Slip ....................................................................................................................................................... 147
P18.13 - DO Belt Drift.................................................................................................................................................... 147
P18.14 - DO Belt Skew ................................................................................................................................................. 147
P18.15 - DO Belt Slip .................................................................................................................................................... 148
P18.16 - DI BIC freeze .................................................................................................................................................. 148
P19 - Communication EasyServe .................................................................................................................................. 148
P19.01 - Own Address ................................................................................................................................................... 148
P19.02 - Baud Rate ........................................................................................................................................................ 148
P19.03 - Format Data ..................................................................................................................................................... 148
P20 - Communication Fieldbus ...................................................................................................................................... 149
P20.01 - Protocol Type................................................................................................................................................... 149
P20.02 - Timeout Host ................................................................................................................................................... 149
Index
P20.03 - Event Cyclic Communication .......................................................................................................................... 150

P20.04 - Event Acyclic Communication......................................................................................................................... 150
P20.05 - Check in Keyboard Mode ................................................................................................................................ 150
P20.06 - Compatibility DISOCONT Master .................................................................................................................... 150
P20.07 - Word Sequence ............................................................................................................................................... 150
P20.08 - Byte Sequence ................................................................................................................................................ 151
P20.09 - Configuration ................................................................................................................................................... 151
P20.10 - Address ........................................................................................................................................................... 151
P20.11 - Resolution ........................................................................................................................................................ 151
P20.12 - Baud rate ......................................................................................................................................................... 151
P20.13 - Data Format ..................................................................................................................................................... 152
P20.14 - Physics ............................................................................................................................................................ 152
P20.15 - Address ........................................................................................................................................................... 152
P20.16 - FLOAT-Format................................................................................................................................................. 152
P20.17 - Address ........................................................................................................................................................... 152
P20.18 - Baud rate ......................................................................................................................................................... 152
P20.19 - Parameter ........................................................................................................................................................ 153
P20.20 - Preset Count .................................................................................................................................................... 153
P20.21 - READ_ID Count ............................................................................................................................................... 153
P20.22 - Access Rights Limitation FB ............................................................................................................................ 153
P20.23 - Remote IP Address FB .................................................................................................................................... 153
P21 - Fixed mode configuration ..................................................................................................................................... 154
P21.01 - ID Preset Value 1............................................................................................................................................. 154
P21.02 - ID Preset Value 2............................................................................................................................................. 154
P21.03 - ID Preset Value 3............................................................................................................................................. 154
P21.04 - ID Preset Value 4............................................................................................................................................. 154
P21.05 - ID Preset Value 5............................................................................................................................................. 154
P21.06 - ID Preset Value 6............................................................................................................................................. 154
P21.07 - ID Preset Value 7............................................................................................................................................. 154
P21.08 - ID Preset Value 8............................................................................................................................................. 155
P21.09 - ID Read Value 1 .............................................................................................................................................. 155
P21.10 - ID Read Value 2 .............................................................................................................................................. 155
P21.11 - ID Read Value 3 .............................................................................................................................................. 155
P21.12 - ID Read Value 4 .............................................................................................................................................. 155
P21.13 - ID Read Value 5 .............................................................................................................................................. 155
P21.14 - ID Read Value 6 .............................................................................................................................................. 155
P21.15 - ID Read Value 7 .............................................................................................................................................. 155
P21.16 - ID Read Value 8 .............................................................................................................................................. 156
P21.17 - ID Read Value 9 .............................................................................................................................................. 156
P21.18 - ID Read Value 10 ............................................................................................................................................ 156
P21.19 - ID Read Value 11 ............................................................................................................................................ 156
P21.20 - ID Read Value 12 ............................................................................................................................................ 156
P21.21 - ID Read Value 13 ............................................................................................................................................ 156
P21.22 - ID Read Value 14 ............................................................................................................................................ 156
P21.23 - ID Read Value 15 ............................................................................................................................................ 156
P21.24 - ID Read Value 16 ............................................................................................................................................ 157
P22 - Ethernet ................................................................................................................................................................ 157
P22.01 - IP Address ....................................................................................................................................................... 157
P22.02 - Net Mask ......................................................................................................................................................... 157
P22.03 - Gateway .......................................................................................................................................................... 157
P23 - PLC Outputs ......................................................................................................................................................... 157
P23.01 - DO PLC 1 ....................................................................................................................................................... 157
P23.02 - DO PLC 2 ....................................................................................................................................................... 158
P23.03 - DO PLC 3 ....................................................................................................................................................... 158
P23.04 - DO PLC 4 ....................................................................................................................................................... 158
P23.05 - DO PLC 5 ....................................................................................................................................................... 158
P23.06 - DO PLC 6 ....................................................................................................................................................... 158
P23.07 - DO PLC 7 ....................................................................................................................................................... 158
P23.08 - DO PLC 8 ....................................................................................................................................................... 158
P23.09 - AO PLC 1 ....................................................................................................................................................... 159
P23.10 - AO PLC 2 ....................................................................................................................................................... 159
P24 - Interlocking ........................................................................................................................................................... 159
P24.01 - DI Event Mechanics 1 ..................................................................................................................................... 159
Index

P24.06 - DI Event Electricity 1....................................................................................................................................... 160
P24.09 - DO Event Mechanics ...................................................................................................................................... 160
P24.10 - Event Mechanics ............................................................................................................................................ 160
P24.11 - DO Event Electricity ........................................................................................................................................ 160
P24.12 - Event Electricity .............................................................................................................................................. 161
P24.13 - DO Event Mechatronics 1 ............................................................................................................................... 161
P24.14 - DO Event Mechatronics 2 ............................................................................................................................... 161
P24.15 - Event Mechatronics ........................................................................................................................................ 161
P24.16 - DO Ready ....................................................................................................................................................... 161
P24.17 - Event Not Ready............................................................................................................................................. 161
P24.18 - DO Ready for Start ......................................................................................................................................... 161
P24.19 - Event Not Ready for Start ............................................................................................................................... 162
P25 - Belt Load Controller .............................................................................................................................................. 162
P25.01 - Belt Load Controller ......................................................................................................................................... 162
P25.02 - Controller Magnitude Adaption ........................................................................................................................ 162
P25.03 - Blind Distance .................................................................................................................................................. 163
P25.04 - Offset ............................................................................................................................................................... 163
P25.05 - Lower Limit ...................................................................................................................................................... 163
P25.06 - Upper Limit ...................................................................................................................................................... 163
P25.07 - Position at STOP ............................................................................................................................................. 163
P25.08 - Store ................................................................................................................................................................ 164
P25.09 - Controller Magnitude Prefeeder ....................................................................................................................... 164
P25.10 - Pulse Length .................................................................................................................................................... 164
P25.11 - S P-Component .............................................................................................................................................. 164
P25.12 - S I-Component................................................................................................................................................ 165
P25.13 - S Threshold Response ................................................................................................................................... 165
P25.14 - S DO Open Flow Gate .................................................................................................................................... 165
P25.15 - S DO Close Flow Gate ................................................................................................................................... 165
P25.16 - QA Setpoint Source ......................................................................................................................................... 165
P25.17 - QA Setpoint Range .......................................................................................................................................... 166
P25.18 - QA Setpoint Offset ........................................................................................................................................... 166
P25.19 - QA-Vmin .......................................................................................................................................................... 166
P25.20 - QA-Qmin .......................................................................................................................................................... 167
P25.21 - QA-Ypuls ......................................................................................................................................................... 168
P25.22 - QA-Ymin .......................................................................................................................................................... 168
P25.23 - QA Coeffizient Calculation ............................................................................................................................... 169
P25.24 - Yz Dead Time .................................................................................................................................................. 169
P25.25 - QA Filter Coefficient......................................................................................................................................... 169
P25.26 - QA v-Adaption ................................................................................................................................................. 170
P25.27 - QA Upper Limit relative .................................................................................................................................... 170
P25.28 - Blind Distance 2. Weighbridge ......................................................................................................................... 170
P25.29 - QA Adaption 2. Weighbridge ........................................................................................................................... 170
P26 - Bin Weigher .......................................................................................................................................................... 170
P26.01 - Bin Weigher Active .......................................................................................................................................... 171
P26.02 - LC Load Measurement ................................................................................................................................... 171
P26.05 - LC Filter ........................................................................................................................................................... 172
P26.06 - Bipolar Measurement....................................................................................................................................... 172
P26.07 - Event Error LC Input (Bin) .............................................................................................................................. 172
P26.08 - Event LC Input > MAX .................................................................................................................................... 173
P26.09 - Nominal Bin Load ............................................................................................................................................ 173
P26.10 - Display Format................................................................................................................................................. 173
P26.11 - Display Filter .................................................................................................................................................... 173
P26.12 - Control Level MIN ............................................................................................................................................ 174
P26.13 - Control Level MAX ........................................................................................................................................... 174
P26.14 - DO Bin Filling .................................................................................................................................................. 174
P26.15 - Bin Level MIN .................................................................................................................................................. 174
P26.16 - Event Bin Level MIN ....................................................................................................................................... 175
P26.17 - DO Bin Level MIN ........................................................................................................................................... 175
P26.18 - Bin Level MAX ................................................................................................................................................. 175
P26.19 - Event Bin Level MAX ...................................................................................................................................... 175
P26.20 - DO Bin Level MAX .......................................................................................................................................... 176
Index
P26.21 - AO Bin Load ................................................................................................................................................... 176

P26.22 - AO Offset ........................................................................................................................................................ 176
P26.23 - AO Range ....................................................................................................................................................... 176
P26.24 - Range Correction............................................................................................................................................. 176
P26.25 - Tare (Bin)......................................................................................................................................................... 177
P26.26 - Calibration Weight ........................................................................................................................................... 177
P26.27 - Controller in OFF-Mode ................................................................................................................................... 177
P26.28 - DI Bin Load Sensor......................................................................................................................................... 177
P26.29 - Event Bin Load MAX Sensor .......................................................................................................................... 177
P26.30 - Bin Level analog Input Offset ........................................................................................................................... 178
P26.31 - Bin Level analog Input Range .......................................................................................................................... 178
P27 - Bin Level Controller .............................................................................................................................................. 178
P27.01 - Bin Controller ON............................................................................................................................................. 178
P27.02 - Filling Type ...................................................................................................................................................... 179
P27.03 - AO Controller Magnitude Bin Level................................................................................................................. 179
P27.04 - DO Feeder ON................................................................................................................................................ 179
P27.05 - Setpoint Bin Level ............................................................................................................................................ 179
P27.06 - Feeder Constant .............................................................................................................................................. 179
P27.07 - Dead Time TT .................................................................................................................................................. 179
P27.08 - P-Component KP ............................................................................................................................................. 180
P27.09 - I-Component TN .............................................................................................................................................. 180
P27.10 - D Portion TV .................................................................................................................................................... 180
P27.11 - D Filter TD ....................................................................................................................................................... 180
P27.12 - Bypass ............................................................................................................................................................. 180
P27.13 - Bypass D Portion ............................................................................................................................................. 181
P27.14 - Controller Magnitude Offset ............................................................................................................................. 181
P27.15 - Lower Limit ...................................................................................................................................................... 181
P27.16 - Upper Limit ...................................................................................................................................................... 181
P27.17 - Dead Band Deviation ....................................................................................................................................... 181
P27.18 - Dead Band Factor............................................................................................................................................ 181
P27.19 - Setpoint Filter................................................................................................................................................... 182
P27.20 - Flow Rate Filter................................................................................................................................................ 182
P27.21 - DI Init. Controller ............................................................................................................................................. 182
P27.22 - Bin Setpoint source.......................................................................................................................................... 182
P28 - 2nd Weighbridge................................................................................................................................................... 182
P28.01 - 2nd Weighbridge active ................................................................................................................................... 182
P28.02 - 2nd Weighbridge.............................................................................................................................................. 183
P28.05 - Effective Platform Length ................................................................................................................................. 183
P28.06 - LC Filter ........................................................................................................................................................... 183
P28.07 - Event Error LC Input (2nd Bridge) .................................................................................................................. 184
P28.08 - 2nd Bridge MIN ................................................................................................................................................ 184
P28.09 - Event 2nd Bridge MIN..................................................................................................................................... 184
P28.10 - DO 2nd Bridge MIN ........................................................................................................................................ 184
P28.11 - 2nd Bridge MAX............................................................................................................................................... 184
P28.12 - Event 2nd Bridge MAX ................................................................................................................................... 185
P28.13 - DO 2nd Bridge MAX ....................................................................................................................................... 185
P28.14 - Range Correction (2nd Bridge) ........................................................................................................................ 185
P28.15 - Tare (2nd Bridge)............................................................................................................................................. 185
P28.16 - Controller active ............................................................................................................................................... 185
P28.17 - P-Component KP ............................................................................................................................................. 185
P28.18 - I-Component TN .............................................................................................................................................. 186
P28.19 - Analog Output 2nd Bridge ............................................................................................................................... 186
P28.20 - 2nd Bridge Offset ............................................................................................................................................. 186
P28.21 - 2nd Bridge Range ............................................................................................................................................ 186
P28.22 - 2nd Bridge analog Input Offset ........................................................................................................................ 186
P28.23 - 2nd Bridge analog Input Range ....................................................................................................................... 187
P29 - Check System ...................................................................................................................................................... 187
P29.01 - Type of Check System ..................................................................................................................................... 187
P29.02 - Auto Correction ................................................................................................................................................ 188
P29.03 - Cyclic Auto Start .............................................................................................................................................. 188
P29.04 - Cycle Time ....................................................................................................................................................... 188
P29.05 - Release Check System ................................................................................................................................... 188
P29.06 - Event No Check Release................................................................................................................................ 189
P29.07 - Check Start Span............................................................................................................................................. 189
Index
P29.08 - Check Start Tare.............................................................................................................................................. 189

P29.09 - Accept Correction ............................................................................................................................................ 189
P29.10 - Finish Check Measurement ............................................................................................................................. 190
P29.11 - Set Quantity or Rotations ................................................................................................................................ 190
P29.12 - Check Circuits.................................................................................................................................................. 190
P29.13 - Check Quantity ................................................................................................................................................ 190
P29.14 - Storage Quantity .............................................................................................................................................. 191
P29.15 - Minimum Check Quantity................................................................................................................................. 191
P29.16 - Event Minimum Check Quantity...................................................................................................................... 191
P29.17 - Minimum Fill Weight ........................................................................................................................................ 192
P29.18 - Event Minimum Fill Weight ............................................................................................................................. 192
P29.19 - Maximum Fill Weight ....................................................................................................................................... 192
P29.20 - Event Maximum Fill Weight ............................................................................................................................ 192
P29.21 - Damping Time ................................................................................................................................................. 193
P29.22 - Blind Distance .................................................................................................................................................. 193
P29.23 - DO Control Started ......................................................................................................................................... 193
P29.24 - Feeder Stopped ............................................................................................................................................... 193
P29.25 - Event Feeder Not Stopped ............................................................................................................................. 194
P29.26 - Event Prepare Check Measurement ............................................................................................................... 194
P29.27 - DO Check Measurement Active...................................................................................................................... 194
P29.28 - Event Expect Acceptance ............................................................................................................................... 194
P29.29 - DO Expect Acceptance.................................................................................................................................... 195
P29.30 - Absolute Range ............................................................................................................................................... 195
P29.31 - Relative Range ................................................................................................................................................ 195
P29.32 - Event Absolute Tare Correction Error ............................................................................................................. 196
P29.33 - Event Relative Tare Correction Error .............................................................................................................. 196
P29.34 - Event Absolute Span Correction Error ............................................................................................................ 197
P29.35 - Event Relative Span Correction Error ............................................................................................................. 197
P29.36 - Correction Evaluation ...................................................................................................................................... 197
P29.37 - Correction Speed ............................................................................................................................................. 197
P29.38 - AO Check Measurement Result ..................................................................................................................... 198
P29.39 - DO Check Gate .............................................................................................................................................. 198
P29.40 - Check Gate Feedback ..................................................................................................................................... 198
P29.41 - Check Gate Time ............................................................................................................................................. 199
P29.42 - Event Check Gate Error.................................................................................................................................. 199
P29.43 - Limit Max. Bin Error ......................................................................................................................................... 199
P29.44 - Event Bin Error ............................................................................................................................................... 200
P29.45 - DO Correction Error ........................................................................................................................................ 200
P30 - Moisture ................................................................................................................................................................ 200
P30.01 - Moisture Active ................................................................................................................................................ 200
P30.02 - Moisture Select ................................................................................................................................................ 201
P30.03 - AI Moisture Measurement ............................................................................................................................... 201
P30.04 - Nominal Moisture ............................................................................................................................................. 201
P30.05 - Moisture Offset ................................................................................................................................................ 201
P30.06 - Moisture Range ............................................................................................................................................... 201
P30.07 - DO Moisture active ......................................................................................................................................... 202
P30.08 - Moisture MAX .................................................................................................................................................. 202
P30.09 - DO Moisture MAX ........................................................................................................................................... 202
P30.10 - Event Moisture MAX ....................................................................................................................................... 202
P30.11 - AO Flow Rate corrected ................................................................................................................................. 202
P30.12 - AO Flow Rate Offset ....................................................................................................................................... 203
P30.13 - AO Flow Rate Range ...................................................................................................................................... 203
P30.14 - Pulse Counter corrected .................................................................................................................................. 203
P31 - Dead Time ............................................................................................................................................................ 203
P31.01 - Dead Time Active ............................................................................................................................................ 203
P31.02 - Dead Time ....................................................................................................................................................... 203
P31.03 - Setpoint Select................................................................................................................................................. 204
P31.04 - Setpoint Clock ON ........................................................................................................................................... 204
P31.05 - ON/OFF Select ................................................................................................................................................ 204
P31.06 - ON/OFF Clock ON ........................................................................................................................................... 204
P31.07 - Time Elements Preassign ................................................................................................................................ 204
P31.08 - Initialise Time Elements ................................................................................................................................... 204
P31.09 - DO Dead Time Active ..................................................................................................................................... 205
P31.10 - DO Setpoint Active ......................................................................................................................................... 205
P31.11 - DO ON/OFF Active ......................................................................................................................................... 205
P32 - Linearization ......................................................................................................................................................... 205
Index
P32.01 - Linearization ON .............................................................................................................................................. 205

P32.02 - Linearization S1 ............................................................................................................................................... 205
P32.03 - Linearization I1 ................................................................................................................................................ 206
P32.10 - Event Linearization Error ................................................................................................................................ 207
P33 - Flow Gate ............................................................................................................................................................. 207
P33.01 - AI Position Flow Gate ..................................................................................................................................... 207
P33.02 - AI Offset.......................................................................................................................................................... 207
P33.03 - AI Range ......................................................................................................................................................... 207
P33.04 - AO Position Flow Gate ................................................................................................................................... 207
P33.05 - AO Offset ........................................................................................................................................................ 207
P33.06 - AO Range ....................................................................................................................................................... 208
P33.07 - Event MIN Flow Gate ...................................................................................................................................... 208
P33.08 - Position MIN Flow Gate ................................................................................................................................... 208
P33.09 - Event MAX Flow Gate .................................................................................................................................... 208
P33.10 - Position MAX Flow Gate .................................................................................................................................. 208
P34 - 2-Sensor Slip ........................................................................................................................................................ 209
P34.01 - 2-Sensor Slip active ......................................................................................................................................... 209
P34.02 - Source Sensor 1 .............................................................................................................................................. 209
P34.03 - DI Sensor 1 ..................................................................................................................................................... 209
P34.04 - Characteristic Value Sensor 1 ......................................................................................................................... 209
P34.05 - DI Sensor 2 ..................................................................................................................................................... 209
P34.06 - Characteristic Value Sensor 2 ......................................................................................................................... 209
P34.07 - Slip Value 2 ..................................................................................................................................................... 210
P34.08 - Event Slip 2..................................................................................................................................................... 210
P34.09 - DO Slip 2 ........................................................................................................................................................ 210
P35 - Pressure Compensation ....................................................................................................................................... 210
P35.01 - Compensation Active ....................................................................................................................................... 210
P35.02 - Compensation Source ..................................................................................................................................... 211
P35.03 - Pressure Characteristic Value ......................................................................................................................... 211
P35.04 - Pressure Rated Cap. ....................................................................................................................................... 211
P35.05 - Filter Pressure Value DMS .............................................................................................................................. 211
P35.06 - Event DMS-Input ............................................................................................................................................ 211
P35.07 - Event DMS-Input > MAX................................................................................................................................. 212
P35.08 - Event DMS-Input < MIN .................................................................................................................................. 212
P35.09 - Zero ................................................................................................................................................................. 212
P35.10 - Norming ........................................................................................................................................................... 212
P35.11 - Pressure-MIN................................................................................................................................................... 213
P35.12 - Event Pressure-MIN ....................................................................................................................................... 213
P35.13 - DO Pressure-MIN ........................................................................................................................................... 213
P35.14 - Pressure-MAX ................................................................................................................................................. 213
P35.15 - Event Pressure-MAX ...................................................................................................................................... 213
P35.16 - DO Pressure-MAX .......................................................................................................................................... 214
P35.17 - DI Switch On Compensation ........................................................................................................................... 214
P35.18 - Compensation analog Input Offset .................................................................................................................. 214
P35.19 - Compensation analog Input Range ................................................................................................................. 214
P36 - FCB analog outputs .............................................................................................................................................. 214
P36.01 - FCB_AO 01 ..................................................................................................................................................... 214
P36.02 - Offset FCB_AO 1 ............................................................................................................................................. 214
P36.03 - Range FCB_AO 1 ............................................................................................................................................ 215
P36.04 - Reference FCB_AO 1 ...................................................................................................................................... 215
P36.05 - FCB_AO 02 ..................................................................................................................................................... 215
P36.06 - Offset FCB_AO 2 ............................................................................................................................................. 215
P36.07 - Range FCB_AO 2 ............................................................................................................................................ 215
P36.09 - FCB_AO 03 ..................................................................................................................................................... 216
P36.10 - Offset FCB_AO 3 ............................................................................................................................................. 216
P36.11 - Range FCB_AO 3 ............................................................................................................................................ 216
P36.13 - FCB_AO 04 ..................................................................................................................................................... 216
P36.14 - Offset FCB_AO 4 ............................................................................................................................................. 216
Index
P36.15 - Range FCB_AO 4 ............................................................................................................................................ 217

P36.17 - FCB_AO 05 ..................................................................................................................................................... 217
P36.18 - Offset FCB_AO 5 ............................................................................................................................................. 217
P36.19 - Range FCB_AO 5 ............................................................................................................................................ 217
P36.21 - FCB Variant ..................................................................................................................................................... 218
P36.22 - Event FCB-Error ............................................................................................................................................. 218
P37 - FCB digital outputs ............................................................................................................................................... 218
P37.01 - FCB_DO 01 ..................................................................................................................................................... 218
P37.02 - FCB_DO 02 ..................................................................................................................................................... 219
P37.03 - FCB_DO 03 ..................................................................................................................................................... 219
P37.04 - FCB_DO 04 ..................................................................................................................................................... 219
P37.05 - FCB_DO 05 ..................................................................................................................................................... 219
P37.06 - FCB_DO 06 ..................................................................................................................................................... 219
P37.07 - FCB_DO 07 ..................................................................................................................................................... 219
P37.08 - FCB_DO 08 ..................................................................................................................................................... 219
P37.09 - FCB_DO 09 ..................................................................................................................................................... 220
P37.10 - FCB_DO 10 ..................................................................................................................................................... 220
P37.11 - FCB_DO 11 ..................................................................................................................................................... 220
P37.12 - FCB_DO 12 ..................................................................................................................................................... 220
P37.13 - FCB_DO 13 ..................................................................................................................................................... 220
P37.14 - FCB_DO 14 ..................................................................................................................................................... 220
P37.15 - FCB_DO 15 ..................................................................................................................................................... 220
P37.16 - FCB_DO 16 ..................................................................................................................................................... 221
P37.17 - FCB_DO 17 ..................................................................................................................................................... 221
P37.18 - FCB_DO 18 ..................................................................................................................................................... 221
P37.19 - FCB_DO 19 ..................................................................................................................................................... 221
P37.20 - FCB_DO 20 ..................................................................................................................................................... 221
P38 - Data Logging ........................................................................................................................................................ 221
P38.01 - Hourly Total Time ............................................................................................................................................ 221
P38.02 - Daily Total Time ............................................................................................................................................... 221
P38.03 - Logger cycle time............................................................................................................................................. 222
P38.04 - Data Log Value 1 ............................................................................................................................................. 222
P38.05 - Data Log Value 2 ............................................................................................................................................. 222
P38.06 - Data Log Value 3 ............................................................................................................................................. 222
P38.07 - Data Log Value 4 ............................................................................................................................................. 222
P38.08 - Data Log Value 5 ............................................................................................................................................. 222
P38.09 - Data Log Value 6 ............................................................................................................................................. 222
P38.10 - Data Log Value 7 ............................................................................................................................................. 223
P38.11 - Data Log Value 8 ............................................................................................................................................. 223
P38.12 - Data Log Value 9 ............................................................................................................................................. 223
P38.13 - Data Log Value 10 ........................................................................................................................................... 223
P39 - Configuration HMI Values ..................................................................................................................................... 223
P39.01 - HMI Value 01 ................................................................................................................................................... 223
P39.02 - HMI Value 02 ................................................................................................................................................... 223
P39.03 - HMI Value 03 ................................................................................................................................................... 224
P39.04 - HMI Value 04 ................................................................................................................................................... 224
P39.05 - HMI Value 05 ................................................................................................................................................... 224
P39.06 - HMI Value 06 ................................................................................................................................................... 224
P39.07 - HMI Value 07 ................................................................................................................................................... 224
P39.08 - HMI Value 08 ................................................................................................................................................... 224
P39.09 - HMI Value 09 ................................................................................................................................................... 224
P39.10 - HMI Value 10 ................................................................................................................................................... 224
P40 - Local Mode (Speed) ............................................................................................................................................. 225
P40.01 - Motor Select (Block 1) ..................................................................................................................................... 225
P40.02 - ON in Remote (Block 1) ................................................................................................................................... 225
P40.03 - Controller Magnitude (Block 1) ........................................................................................................................ 226
P40.04 - Controller Magnitude Offset (Block 1) .............................................................................................................. 226
P40.05 - JOG enable (Block 1) ...................................................................................................................................... 226
P40.06 - Release local Start (Block 1) ........................................................................................................................... 226
P40.07 - DI External Error 1 (Block 1) ........................................................................................................................... 227
P40.10 - DI ON Motor (2nd) (Block 1) ........................................................................................................................... 227
Index

P41 - Local Mode (Gate) ................................................................................................................................................ 235
P41.01 - Motor Select..................................................................................................................................................... 235
P41.02 - OPEN in Remote ............................................................................................................................................. 235
P41.03 - DI Limit Switch OPEN ..................................................................................................................................... 235
P41.04 - CLOSE in Remote ........................................................................................................................................... 235
P41.05 - DI Limit Switch CLOSE ................................................................................................................................... 236
P41.06 - Release local Start........................................................................................................................................... 236
P41.07 - DI External Error 1 .......................................................................................................................................... 236
Parameter ...................................................................................................................................................................... 153
Parameter Block 01 - Hardware Modules......................................................................................................................... 93
Parameter Block 02 - Dialog Behaviour ........................................................................................................................... 96
Parameter Block 03 - Feeder Definition ......................................................................................................................... 101
Parameter Block 04 - Control Sources ........................................................................................................................... 103
Parameter Block 05 - Rated Data .................................................................................................................................. 106
Parameter Block 06 - Feeder control ............................................................................................................................. 109
Parameter Block 07 - Feeder Monitoring........................................................................................................................ 114
Parameter Block 08 - Filters ........................................................................................................................................... 117
Parameter Block 09 - Limit Values ................................................................................................................................. 118
Parameter Block 10 - Calibration Data ........................................................................................................................... 120
Parameter Block 11 - Rate controller ............................................................................................................................. 121
Parameter Block 12 - Analog Outputs ............................................................................................................................ 128
Parameter Block 13 - Digital Inputs ................................................................................................................................ 131
Parameter Block 14 - Digital Outputs ............................................................................................................................. 136
Parameter Block 15 - Batch Mode ................................................................................................................................. 139
Parameter Block 16 - Maintenance interval.................................................................................................................... 143
Index
Parameter Block 17 - VAP ............................................................................................................................................. 144

Parameter Block 18 - Belt Monitoring ............................................................................................................................. 144
Parameter Block 19 - Communication EasyServe ......................................................................................................... 148
Parameter Block 20 - Communication Fieldbus ............................................................................................................. 148
Parameter Block 21 - Fixed mode configuration ............................................................................................................ 153
Parameter Block 22 - Ethernet ....................................................................................................................................... 157
Parameter Block 23 - PLC Outputs ................................................................................................................................ 157
Parameter Block 24 - Interlocking .................................................................................................................................. 159
Parameter Block 25 - Belt Load Controller ..................................................................................................................... 162
Parameter Block 26 - Bin Weigher ................................................................................................................................. 170
Parameter Block 27 - Bin Level Controller ..................................................................................................................... 178
Parameter Block 28 - 2nd Weighbridge.......................................................................................................................... 182
Parameter Block 29 - Check System ............................................................................................................................. 187
Parameter Block 30 - Moisture ....................................................................................................................................... 200
Parameter Block 31 - Dead Time ................................................................................................................................... 203
Parameter Block 32 - Linearization ................................................................................................................................ 205
Parameter Block 33 - Flow Gate .................................................................................................................................... 207
Parameter Block 34 - 2-Sensor Slip ............................................................................................................................... 208
Parameter Block 35 - Pressure Compensation .............................................................................................................. 210
Parameter Block 36 - FCB analog outputs ..................................................................................................................... 214
Parameter Block 37 - FCB digital outputs ...................................................................................................................... 218
Parameter Block 38 - Data Logging ............................................................................................................................... 221
Parameter Block 39 - Configuration HMI Values ............................................................................................................ 223
Parameter Block 40 - Local Mode (Speed) .................................................................................................................... 225
Parameter Block 41 - Local Mode (Gate) ....................................................................................................................... 234
Parameter Details ............................................................................................................................................................ 93
Parameter List .................................................................................................................................................................. 69
Parameter Overview ........................................................................................................................................................ 69
Parameters....................................................................................................................................................................... 65
Password ......................................................................................................................................................................... 99
P-Component KP ........................................................................................................................................... 122, 180, 185
Physics ........................................................................................................................................................................... 152
Platform Dis.Length ........................................................................................................................................................ 144
PLC Functionality (Optional) .......................................................................................................................................... 295
PLC Outputs................................................................................................................................................................... 157
Position at STOP.................................................................................................................................................... 125, 163
Position MAX Flow Gate ................................................................................................................................................ 208
Position MIN Flow Gate.................................................................................................................................................. 208
Pre-cut-off Amount ......................................................................................................................................................... 142
Preset Count .................................................................................................................................................................. 153
Pressure Characteristic Value ........................................................................................................................................ 211
Pressure Compensation ................................................................................................................................................. 210
Pressure Rated Cap. ...................................................................................................................................................... 211
Pressure-MAX ................................................................................................................................................................ 213
Pressure-MIN ................................................................................................................................................................. 213
Protocol Type ................................................................................................................................................................. 149
Pulse Counter corrected................................................................................................................................................. 203
Pulse Length .................................................................................................................................................................. 164
Pulse Length Total ......................................................................................................................................................... 102
Pulse Output for External Totalizing Counters ............................................................................................................... 293
Pulses per length ........................................................................................................................................................... 106
QA Adaption 2. Weighbridge .......................................................................................................................................... 170
QA Coeffizient Calculation ............................................................................................................................................. 169
QA Filter Coefficient ....................................................................................................................................................... 169
QA Setpoint Offset ......................................................................................................................................................... 166
QA Setpoint Range ........................................................................................................................................................ 166
QA Setpoint Source ....................................................................................................................................................... 165
QA Upper Limit relative .................................................................................................................................................. 170
QA v-Adaption ................................................................................................................................................................ 170
QA-Qmin ........................................................................................................................................................................ 167
QA-Vmin......................................................................................................................................................................... 166
QA-Ymin......................................................................................................................................................................... 168
QA-Ypuls ........................................................................................................................................................................ 168
Range Correction ................................................................................................................................................... 120, 176
Range Correction (2nd Bridge) ...................................................................................................................................... 185
Range FCB_AO 1 .......................................................................................................................................................... 215
Index
Range FCB_AO 2 .......................................................................................................................................................... 215

Range FCB_AO 3 .......................................................................................................................................................... 216
Range FCB_AO 4 .......................................................................................................................................................... 217
Range FCB_AO 5 .......................................................................................................................................................... 217
Rate controller ................................................................................................................................................................ 121
Rated Data ..................................................................................................................................................................... 106
READ_ID Count ............................................................................................................................................................. 153
Reading and Setting Parameters ..................................................................................................................................... 35
Reference FCB_AO 1..................................................................................................................................................... 215
Reference FCB_AO 2..................................................................................................................................................... 215
Reference FCB_AO 3..................................................................................................................................................... 216
Reference FCB_AO 4..................................................................................................................................................... 217
Reference FCB_AO 5..................................................................................................................................................... 218
regulated .......................................................................................................................................................................... 10
Relative Range............................................................................................................................................................... 195
Relative Setpoint .............................................................................................................................................................. 28
Relative Setpoint Offset.................................................................................................................................................. 105
Relativer Setpoint Range ............................................................................................................................................... 105
Release Check System .................................................................................................................................................. 188
Release local Start ......................................................................................................................................................... 236
Release local Start (Block 1) .......................................................................................................................................... 226
Remote IP Address FB................................................................................................................................................... 153
Remote IP Address HMI 1................................................................................................................................................ 97
Reset Counter 1 ............................................................................................................................................................. 100
Reset Counter 2 ............................................................................................................................................................. 100
Reset to Factory Settings ................................................................................................................................................. 36
Resetting (zero setting) the totalizing counter .................................................................................................................. 29
Resolution ...................................................................................................................................................................... 151
Restrictions for Operating Panel with Ethernet Connection and Connection Monitoring .................................................. 27
S DO Close Flow Gate .................................................................................................................................................. 165
S DO Open Flow Gate .................................................................................................................................................. 165
S I-Component .............................................................................................................................................................. 165
S P-Component............................................................................................................................................................. 164
S Threshold Response .................................................................................................................................................. 165
Safety notes ....................................................................................................................................................................... 3
SC01 Event Setpoint Limited ....................................................................................................................................... 253
SC02 Event Stand-By .................................................................................................................................................. 253
SC03 Event Maint.Feeder Run .................................................................................................................................... 254
SC04 Event Maint. Electric........................................................................................................................................... 254
SC05 Event External Event 1 ....................................................................................................................................... 254
Scale calibration ............................................................................................................................................................... 55
Scale Name...................................................................................................................................................................... 97
Selecting the operating range .......................................................................................................................................... 25
Selection and Display of the Scales (Feeder) .................................................................................................................. 39
Sensor Length ................................................................................................................................................................ 145
Sensor Offset ................................................................................................................................................................. 146
Sensor Width.................................................................................................................................................................. 146
Separated Units Control Type .......................................................................................................................................... 48
Sequence Monitoring ..................................................................................................................................................... 253
Service Functions ............................................................................................................................................................. 35
Set Quantity or Rotations .............................................................................................................................................. 190
Set setpoint ...................................................................................................................................................................... 28
Set the Homepage (Config).............................................................................................................................................. 39
Set/Act Sources ............................................................................................................................................................. 127
Setpoint and switch-on sources ..................................................................................................................................... 257
Setpoint Bin Level .......................................................................................................................................................... 179
Setpoint Clock ON .......................................................................................................................................................... 204
Index
Setpoint Filter ................................................................................................................................................................. 182

Setpoint Filter 1st Ord .................................................................................................................................................... 127
Setpoint Filter 2nd Ord ................................................................................................................................................... 127
Setpoint Offset ....................................................................................................................................................... 126, 128
Setpoint Range ...................................................................................................................................................... 126, 128
Setpoint Select ............................................................................................................................................................... 204
Setting belt run monitoring ............................................................................................................................................... 56
Setting Control ................................................................................................................................................................. 59
Setting the Address (VHM addr.) ..................................................................................................................................... 38
Setting the Clock .............................................................................................................................................................. 36
Setting the Display ........................................................................................................................................................... 38
Signal Words ...................................................................................................................................................................... 4
Signal Words for Application Notes .................................................................................................................................... 5
Signal Words for Safety Warnings ..................................................................................................................................... 4
Simulation Mode .............................................................................................................................................................. 36
Single Unit Control Type .................................................................................................................................................. 48
Slip Value ....................................................................................................................................................................... 147
Slip Value 2 .................................................................................................................................................................... 210
Some Definitions ................................................................................................................................................................ 8
Source Emergency Setpoint........................................................................................................................................... 117
Source Load Cell ............................................................................................................................................................ 108
Source Load Cell 2 ......................................................................................................................................................... 108
Source Relative Setpoint ................................................................................................................................................ 105
Source Run Enable ........................................................................................................................................................ 104
Source Sensor 1 ............................................................................................................................................................ 209
Special Operating Functions ............................................................................................................................................ 30
Speed Measurement ...................................................................................................................................................... 107
Speed Offset .................................................................................................................................................................. 130
Speed Range ................................................................................................................................................................. 130
Stand-By Limit Value ...................................................................................................................................................... 115
Startup.............................................................................................................................................................................. 53
Start-Up Mode ................................................................................................................................................................ 110
Storage Quantity ............................................................................................................................................................ 191
Store....................................................................................................................................................................... 126, 164
Switch Feeding On/Off ..................................................................................................................................................... 28
Switch Grav./Vol. command ........................................................................................................................................... 100
Switch Keyboard-/Normal Mode ..................................................................................................................................... 100
Switch on.......................................................................................................................................................................... 17
Switching the Scales On/Off............................................................................................................................................. 28
SY01 Event Memory .................................................................................................................................................... 254
SY02 Event Communication VCU20100-Unit 2 ........................................................................................................... 255
SY03 Event Communication VCU20100-Unit 3 ........................................................................................................... 255
SY04 Event Communication HMI 1 .............................................................................................................................. 255
SY07 Event Communication VHM serial ...................................................................................................................... 255
SY08 Event Cyclic Communication .............................................................................................................................. 256
SY10 Event Acyclic Communication ............................................................................................................................ 256
SY15 Event Communication VMO20100-Unit 1 ........................................................................................................... 256
SY16 Event Communication VMO20100-Unit 2 ........................................................................................................... 256
Symbol for Running Operation ......................................................................................................................................... 26
System Message ............................................................................................................................................................ 254
Tab.01: Definition for formula symbols ............................................................................................................................... 8
Tab.02: Operating access ................................................................................................................................................ 18
Tab.03: Function calls on the scales controller homepage............................................................................................... 22
Tab.04: Source parameters that have an effect in normal operation ................................................................................ 26
Tab.05: Control keys ........................................................................................................................................................ 31
Tab.06: Keys in the lines configuration ............................................................................................................................ 32
Tab.07: Meaning of the identifier in the rapid selection table (5) ...................................................................................... 33
Tab.08: Bin weigher parameters ...................................................................................................................................... 34
Tab.09: Operating keys for controlling hopper fill level ..................................................................................................... 35
Tab.10: Parameter sets: Usage and activation ................................................................................................................ 36
Tab.11: Keys for the calibration programs........................................................................................................................ 37
Tab.12: Keys in the VHM configuration dialog ................................................................................................................. 38
Tab.13: Fields for setting the address .............................................................................................................................. 38
Tab.14: Parameters for the display .................................................................................................................................. 38
Index
Tab.15: Keys in the list of scales ...................................................................................................................................... 39

Tab.16: Setting startup routine ......................................................................................................................................... 39
Tab.17: Alternatives ......................................................................................................................................................... 40
Tab.18: The details and course ........................................................................................................................................ 42
Tab.21: Handling the results of control ............................................................................................................................. 44
Tab.26: Basic parameters ................................................................................................................................................ 54
Tab.27: Activating belt run monitoring .............................................................................................................................. 58
Tab.28: The control procedure ......................................................................................................................................... 59
Tab.29: Suggested measures .......................................................................................................................................... 63
Tab.30: Using parameter sets in the DISOCONT Tersus................................................................................................. 65
Tab.31: Abbreviations frequently used in parameters ...................................................................................................... 66
Tab.32: Step-by-step specification of signal links............................................................................................................. 67
Tab.33: Signal sources and their descriptions.................................................................................................................. 67
Tab.34: Meaning of the columns ...................................................................................................................................... 67
Tab.35: The meaning of the Level parameter segment for an internal True signal .......................................................... 68
Tab.36: Example of the assignment of a binary channel to a physical input channel....................................................... 68
Tab.37: Event classes ...................................................................................................................................................... 68
Tab.38: Event groups ..................................................................................................................................................... 237
Tab.39: States and points in time in the flow chart ......................................................................................................... 258
Tab.40: Relevant parameters ......................................................................................................................................... 259
Tab.41: Controller Modes ............................................................................................................................................... 263
Tab.42: Special operating modes................................................................................................................................... 264
Tab.43: Controller parameters ....................................................................................................................................... 264
Tab.44: Special cases of controller parameter setting ................................................................................................... 264
Tab.45: The effect of selected parameters of the universal controller ............................................................................ 266
Tab.46: Process: discharge weighing with regulating loss-in-weight feeder................................................................... 268
Tab.47: Continuous signals ............................................................................................................................................ 274
Tab.48: Legend .............................................................................................................................................................. 287
Tab.49: Long counting pulse .......................................................................................................................................... 293
Tab.50: Counting pulse weight ....................................................................................................................................... 293
Tab.51: Blocks available for processing binary signals .................................................................................................. 298
Tare (2nd Bridge) ........................................................................................................................................................... 185
Tare (Bin) ....................................................................................................................................................................... 177
Tare Correction .............................................................................................................................................................. 121
Tare the beltweigher ........................................................................................................................................................ 42
Taring the bin weigher ...................................................................................................................................................... 45
Terminology ....................................................................................................................................................................... 8
Test that the Control is Functioning .................................................................................................................................. 54
The beltweigher with feed control ..................................................................................................................................... 12
The logic for position-controlled feed gates .................................................................................................................... 275
The Setting Regulation ..................................................................................................................................................... 55
The web server in the scales controller (VCU) ................................................................................................................. 21
Threshold Deviation ....................................................................................................................................................... 123
Time Deviation ............................................................................................................................................................... 123
Time Elements Preassign .............................................................................................................................................. 204
Timeout Host .................................................................................................................................................................. 149
Totalizer Increment ........................................................................................................................................................ 103
Trend ................................................................................................................................................................................ 31
Type of Check System ................................................................................................................................................... 187
Types of control measurement ......................................................................................................................................... 48
Units ................................................................................................................................................................................. 97
unregulated ...................................................................................................................................................................... 10
Upper Limit ..................................................................................................................................................... 125, 163, 181
Using alternative signals (such as analog or fieldbus) for DMS inputs ........................................................................... 294
VAP ................................................................................................................................................................................ 144
VAP Active ..................................................................................................................................................................... 144
VCU2 Analog Channel A10 ............................................................................................................................................. 94
VCU20100-Unit 2 ............................................................................................................................................................. 94
VCU20100-Unit 3 ............................................................................................................................................................. 95
Index

VHM operating panel ....................................................................................................................................................... 23
VHM RS485 Address ....................................................................................................................................................... 95
VMO20100-Unit 1 ............................................................................................................................................................ 96
VMO20100-Unit 2 ............................................................................................................................................................ 96
Volum on LC failure ........................................................................................................................................................ 114
Volumetric / (Volumetric Synchronous) / Gravimetric Modes of Regulator Operation ...................................................... 30
Volumetric Clearance ..................................................................................................................................................... 126
Volumetric Mode ...................................................................................................................................................... 10, 126
Volumetric Start-Up ........................................................................................................................................................ 125
Volumetric Synchronous Mode ........................................................................................................................................ 10
WE01 Event Power Failure .......................................................................................................................................... 244
WE02 Event NAMUR Error VCU1-DI6 ......................................................................................................................... 244
WE08 Event Analog Input < Offset............................................................................................................................... 245
WE13 Event NAMUR Error VMO1-DI7 ........................................................................................................................ 245
WE14 Event NAMUR Error VMO2-DI7 ........................................................................................................................ 245
Weighfeeder with Controlled Belt Velocity........................................................................................................................ 10
Weighing Platforms ........................................................................................................................................................ 289
What is the DISOCONT Tersus? ....................................................................................................................................... 7
WM01 Event Limit Switch............................................................................................................................................. 250
WM02 Event Slip .......................................................................................................................................................... 250
WM03 Event Belt Skew ................................................................................................................................................ 250
WM04 Event Belt Drift .................................................................................................................................................. 251
WM05 Event Slip 2 ....................................................................................................................................................... 251
WM06 Event Chain Motion Monitor.............................................................................................................................. 251
Word Sequence ............................................................................................................................................................. 150
Yz Dead Time ................................................................................................................................................................ 169
Zero ................................................................................................................................................................................ 212
Zero Drop-Out Active ..................................................................................................................................................... 109
Zero Drop-Out Limit ....................................................................................................................................................... 110
Zeroing Limit .................................................................................................................................................................. 112

DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder Instruction Manual bvh2407gb

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder Instruction Manual bvh2407gb

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder

PASS - Service you can rely on

Quality and reliability are the cornerstones of our company’s

During office hours, service specialists from all divisions are

Are you looking for individual, perfect-fit service solutions?

© by Schenck Process GmbH

Note: Translation of the original German Instruction

(origin: ST4, 9007199727104651 V2)

1 About This Manual ................................................................

3 General Diagram ................................................................

DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual BV-H2407GB, 1238

4.3.1.7 Command and Edit Keys ........................................................................................................... 26

BV-H2407GB, 1238 DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual

6 Maintenance and Recalibration ................................................................

DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual BV-H2407GB, 1238

7.4.2.24 Parameter Block 24 - Interlocking ............................................................................................ 159

8 Event Messages ................................................................

BV-H2407GB, 1238 DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual

9.13 Correction with a known quantity...................................................................................................... 286

DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual BV-H2407GB, 1238

1 About This Manual

This manual is available in different forms:

DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual BV-H2407GB, 1238

DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual BV-H2407GB, 1238

Acknowledging Event Messages

Service and Maintenance

Moisture and Humidity

2.1.1 Signal Words for Safety Warnings

BV-H2407GB, 1238 DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual

2.1.2 Signal Words for Application Notes

DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual BV-H2407GB, 1238

2.2 Five Safety Rules of Electrical Engineering

2.3 Damaged / Defective Electrical Components

BV-H2407GB, 1238 DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual

3.1 What is the

DISOCONT, MULTICOR and MULTISTREAM are registered trademarks of Schenck Process

DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual BV-H2407GB, 1238

3.2 Some Definitions

Abbreviation Meaning Meaning Dimension Unit

3.3 Measuring principle

BV-H2407GB, 1238 DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual

Fig. 1: The measuring principle for the beltweigher and weighfeeder

WB Weighbridge LC Force transducer and load cell

MR Measuring idler SB Belt run sensor

Y The controller magnitude on the belt drive (only

DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual BV-H2407GB, 1238

3.4 Control operating modes

3.5 Control strategies

3.5.1 Weighfeeder with Controlled Belt Velocity

BV-H2407GB, 1238 DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual

Fig. 2: Weighfeeder control principle

v Belt velocity Xd Control deviation

Q Belt load R Velocity controllers

I Actual flow rate Y Controller magnitude on the external drive controller

The actual flow rate I can be calculated as follows:

Fig. 3: Weighfeeder with feed control as the control principle

DISOCONT® Tersus Weighfeeder, Instruction Manual BV-H2407GB, 1238

R1 Flow rate controller P Flow rate setpoint

R2 Belt load controller I Actual flow rate

Xd Control deviation Y Controller magnitude on the external drive controller

Qs The setpoint for the belt load Q Belt load

3.5.2 The beltweigher with feed control

I Actual flow rate v Belt velocity

P Flow rate setpoint Q Belt load